Вы находитесь на странице: 1из 321

BSC6900 GU

V900R014C00
Site Maintenance Guide
Issue 07
Date 2013-06-28
HUAWEI TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD.


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 2013. All rights reserved.
No part of this document may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means without prior written
consent of Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Trademarks and Permissions
and other Huawei trademarks are trademarks of Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
All other trademarks and trade names mentioned in this document are the property of their respective holders.

Notice
The purchased products, services and features are stipulated by the contract made between Huawei and the
customer. All or part of the products, services and features described in this document may not be within the
purchase scope or the usage scope. Unless otherwise specified in the contract, all statements, information,
and recommendations in this document are provided "AS IS" without warranties, guarantees or representations
of any kind, either express or implied.
The information in this document is subject to change without notice. Every effort has been made in the
preparation of this document to ensure accuracy of the contents, but all statements, information, and
recommendations in this document do not constitute a warranty of any kind, express or implied.






Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Address: Huawei Industrial Base
Bantian, Longgang
Shenzhen 518129
People's Republic of China
Website: http://www.huawei.com
Email: support@huawei.com
Issue 07 (2013-06-28) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
i
About This Document
Purpose
This document describes how to perform the hardware maintenance tasks after the BSC6900
commissioning, to maintain the hardware operation of the BSC6900. The maintenance tasks
involve powering on/off the BSC6900 cabinet, replacing components, and routine maintenance
tasks such as checking LEDs and monitoring the site environment.
Product Version
The following table lists the product version related to the document.
Product Name Product Version
BSC6900 V900R014C00

Intended Audience
This document is intended for:
l Network planning engineers
l System engineers
l Field engineers
Organization
1 Changes in the BSC6900 GU Site Maintenance Guide
This chapter describes the changes in the BSC6900 GU Site Maintenance Guide.
2 Site Maintenance Tool Preparations
This section lists the tools required for BSC6900 site maintenance. These tools must be placed
in the equipment room or at nearby places for easy access.
3 High-Risk Hardware Operations
BSC6900 GU
Site Maintenance Guide About This Document
Issue 07 (2013-06-28) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
ii
High-risk hardware operations include installing boards and replacing boards, both of which
have the same impact. Exercise cautious when deciding to install or replace a board because this
operation may interrupt services or result in a system power outage. Perform this operation as
soon as possible when the traffic is light to reduce the impact on the system.
4 Routine Hardware Maintenance Items
This chapter describes the routine hardware maintenance items of the BSC6900. Different items
require different maintenance methods.
5 Powering On/Off the BSC6900
This chapter describes how to power on and power off the BSC6900. The following is described:
the distribution of the power switches, powering on the BSC6900 cabinet, powering off the
BSC6900 cabinet in a normal situation, and powering off the BSC6900 cabinet in case of
emergencies.
6 Cleaning the Fan Box
This chapter describes how to clean a fan box. To ensure stability and reliability of the equipment,
the maintenance personnel should clean each fan box (including the fan boxes in the service
subracks and the fan boxes in the independent fan subrack) regularly, preferably once every
year.
7 Cleaning and Replacing the Air Filters
This chapter describes how to clean and replace an air filter. The air filter protects the boards
and the BSC6900 from dust. If an air filter is damaged, you must replace it with a new one in
time.
8 Replacing Boards and Modules
This chapeter describes how to replace boards of the same hardware version and modules in the
BSC6900 cabinet, which involves replacing the boards and modules, acknowledging a
successful replacement, and handling of the faulty boards. Each section provides an estimated
time for the replacement of the board as a reference.
9 Replacing the Cables
This chapter describes how to replace the Ethernet cable, E1/T1 cable, optical cable, clock signal
cable, cable to the alarm box, and power distribution box monitoring cable. This chapter also
describes how to check that the cables are successfully replaced and how to handle the faulty
cables.
10 LEDs on the Boards
This chapter describes the LEDs on the BSC6900 boards.
11 DIP Switches on Components
This chapter describes the DIP switches on the boards and subracks of the BSC6900.
12 BSC6900 Site Maintenance Record
This chapter describes the BSC6900 site maintenance record.
Conventions
Symbol Conventions
The symbols that may be found in this document are defined as follows.
BSC6900 GU
Site Maintenance Guide About This Document
Issue 07 (2013-06-28) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
iii
Symbol Description
Indicates a hazard with a high level or medium level of risk
which, if not avoided, could result in death or serious injury.
Indicates a hazard with a low level of risk which, if not
avoided, could result in minor or moderate injury.
Indicates a potentially hazardous situation that, if not
avoided, could result in equipment damage, data loss,
performance deterioration, or unanticipated results.
Indicates a tip that may help you solve a problem or save
time.
Provides additional information to emphasize or supplement
important points of the main text.

General Conventions
The general conventions that may be found in this document are defined as follows.
Convention Description
Times New Roman Normal paragraphs are in Times New Roman.
Boldface Names of files, directories, folders, and users are in
boldface. For example, log in as user root.
Italic Book titles are in italics.
Courier New Examples of information displayed on the screen are in
Courier New.

Command Conventions
The command conventions that may be found in this document are defined as follows.
Convention Description
Boldface The keywords of a command line are in boldface.
Italic Command arguments are in italics.
[ ] Items (keywords or arguments) in brackets [ ] are optional.
{ x | y | ... } Optional items are grouped in braces and separated by
vertical bars. One item is selected.
[ x | y | ... ] Optional items are grouped in brackets and separated by
vertical bars. One item is selected or no item is selected.
BSC6900 GU
Site Maintenance Guide About This Document
Issue 07 (2013-06-28) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
iv
Convention Description
{ x | y | ... }
*
Optional items are grouped in braces and separated by
vertical bars. A minimum of one item or a maximum of all
items can be selected.
[ x | y | ... ]
*
Optional items are grouped in brackets and separated by
vertical bars. Several items or no item can be selected.

GUI Conventions
The GUI conventions that may be found in this document are defined as follows.
Convention Description
Boldface Buttons, menus, parameters, tabs, window, and dialog titles
are in boldface. For example, click OK.
> Multi-level menus are in boldface and separated by the ">"
signs. For example, choose File > Create > Folder.

Keyboard Operations
The keyboard operations that may be found in this document are defined as follows.
Format Description
Key Press the key. For example, press Enter and press Tab.
Key 1+Key 2 Press the keys concurrently. For example, pressing Ctrl+Alt
+A means the three keys should be pressed concurrently.
Key 1, Key 2 Press the keys in turn. For example, pressing Alt, A means
the two keys should be pressed in turn.

Mouse Operations
The mouse operations that may be found in this document are defined as follows.
Action Description
Click Select and release the primary mouse button without moving
the pointer.
Double-click Press the primary mouse button twice continuously and
quickly without moving the pointer.
Drag Press and hold the primary mouse button and move the
pointer to a certain position.
BSC6900 GU
Site Maintenance Guide About This Document
Issue 07 (2013-06-28) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
v
Contents
About This Document.....................................................................................................................ii
1 Changes in the BSC6900 GU Site Maintenance Guide..........................................................1
2 Site Maintenance Tool Preparations..........................................................................................5
3 High-Risk Hardware Operations...............................................................................................6
4 Routine Hardware Maintenance Items...................................................................................13
4.1 Equipment Room Maintenance Items..........................................................................................................................14
4.2 Maintaining the Power Supply and Grounding Systems..............................................................................................14
4.3 Cabinet Maintenance Items..........................................................................................................................................16
4.4 Cable Maintenance Items.............................................................................................................................................17
5 Powering On/Off the BSC6900.................................................................................................19
5.1 Distribution of Power Switches on the Common Power Distribution Box..................................................................20
5.2 Distribution of Power Switches on the High-Power PDB............................................................................................22
5.3 Powering On the Cabinet..............................................................................................................................................23
5.4 Powering Off the Cabinet in a Normal Situation.........................................................................................................26
5.5 Powering Off the Cabinet in Emergency Cases...........................................................................................................27
6 Cleaning the Fan Box..................................................................................................................28
7 Cleaning and Replacing the Air Filters...................................................................................30
7.1 Position of the Air Filters.............................................................................................................................................31
7.2 Cleaning the Air Filter at the Bottom of the N68E-22 Cabinet....................................................................................32
7.3 Cleaning the Air Filter on the Inner Side of the Cabinet Door.....................................................................................34
7.4 Replacing the Air Filters...............................................................................................................................................35
8 Replacing Boards and Modules................................................................................................37
8.1 Strategy on Replacing Legacy Components in an Upgrade Scenario..........................................................................41
8.2 Procedure for Replacing a Board..................................................................................................................................41
8.2.1 Removing a Board.....................................................................................................................................................41
8.2.2 Inserting a Board.......................................................................................................................................................45
8.3 Replacing an AEUa Board...........................................................................................................................................47
8.4 Replacing an AOUa Board...........................................................................................................................................50
8.5 Replacing an AOUc Board...........................................................................................................................................54
8.6 Replacing a DPUa/DPUb/DPUc/DPUd/DPUe/DPUf Board.......................................................................................57
BSC6900 GU
Site Maintenance Guide Contents
Issue 07 (2013-06-28) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
vi
8.7 Replacing an EIUa Board.............................................................................................................................................59
8.8 Replacing an FG2a Board.............................................................................................................................................63
8.9 Replacing an FG2c Board.............................................................................................................................................66
8.10 Replacing an FG2d Board..........................................................................................................................................70
8.11 Replacing a GCUa/GCGa Board................................................................................................................................74
8.12 Replacing a GOUa Board...........................................................................................................................................76
8.13 Replacing a GOUc Board...........................................................................................................................................80
8.14 Replacing a GOUd Board...........................................................................................................................................84
8.15 Replacing an MDMC Board.......................................................................................................................................87
8.16 Replacing a NIUa Board.............................................................................................................................................89
8.17 Replacing an OIUa Board...........................................................................................................................................91
8.18 Replacing an OMU Board..........................................................................................................................................95
8.18.1 Checking OMU Status Before Replacing an OMU Board......................................................................................96
8.18.2 Scenario: Replacing an OMU Board in Single-OMU Mode.................................................................................101
8.18.3 Scenario: Replacing the Standby OMU in Dual-System Mode............................................................................128
8.18.4 Scenario: Replacing OMUa or OMUb Boards with OMUc Boards.....................................................................142
8.18.5 Scenario: Replacing Active and Standby OMUs in Dual-System Mode..............................................................160
8.18.6 Common Operation for Replacing OMU Board...................................................................................................169
8.19 Replacing a PAMU Board........................................................................................................................................173
8.20 Replacing a PEUa Board..........................................................................................................................................176
8.21 Replacing a POUa Board..........................................................................................................................................180
8.22 Replacing a POUc Board..........................................................................................................................................184
8.23 Replace an SAUa/SAUc Board................................................................................................................................188
8.24 Replacing an SCUa/SCUb Board.............................................................................................................................193
8.25 Replacing a TNUa Board.........................................................................................................................................196
8.26 Replacing a UOIa Board...........................................................................................................................................199
8.27 Replacing a UOIc Board...........................................................................................................................................202
8.28 Replacing an XPUa/SPUa Board.............................................................................................................................205
8.29 Replacing an XPUb/SPUb Board.............................................................................................................................208
8.30 Replacing a WOPB Board........................................................................................................................................211
8.31 Replacing a Subrack.................................................................................................................................................212
8.32 Replacing the Independent Fan Subrack..................................................................................................................216
8.33 Replacing the Power Distribution Box.....................................................................................................................218
8.34 Replacing the Fan Box.............................................................................................................................................224
8.35 Replacing the Pluggable Optical Module.................................................................................................................227
8.36 Replacing an Optical Splitter/Combiner...................................................................................................................230
8.37 Replacing the KVM..................................................................................................................................................232
8.38 Replacing the LAN Switch.......................................................................................................................................234
8.39 Replacing the GBAM...............................................................................................................................................235
9 Replacing the Cables................................................................................................................242
9.1 Replacing a Power Cable............................................................................................................................................244
9.2 Replacing an E1/T1 Cable..........................................................................................................................................246
BSC6900 GU
Site Maintenance Guide Contents
Issue 07 (2013-06-28) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
vii
9.3 Replacing an Optical Cable........................................................................................................................................248
9.4 Replacing an Ethernet Cable......................................................................................................................................250
9.5 Replacing a Clock Signal Cable.................................................................................................................................252
9.6 Replacing a Y-Shaped Clock Cable...........................................................................................................................254
9.7 Replacing an Inter-TNUa Cable.................................................................................................................................255
9.8 Replacing an EMU RS485 Communication Cable....................................................................................................257
9.9 Replacing a Signal Cable to the Alarm Box...............................................................................................................258
9.10 Replacing the Monitoring Signal Cable for the Power Distribution Box.................................................................260
9.11 Replacing the Monitoring Signal Cable for the Independent Fan Subrack..............................................................261
9.12 Replacing an SFP+ High-Speed Cable.....................................................................................................................262
10 LEDs on the Boards.................................................................................................................265
10.1 LEDs on the AEUa Board........................................................................................................................................268
10.2 LEDs on the AOUa Board........................................................................................................................................268
10.3 LEDs on the AOUc Board........................................................................................................................................269
10.4 LEDs on the DPUa Board........................................................................................................................................269
10.5 LEDs on the DPUb Board........................................................................................................................................270
10.6 LEDs on the DPUc Board........................................................................................................................................271
10.7 LEDs on the DPUd Board........................................................................................................................................271
10.8 LEDs on the DPUe Board........................................................................................................................................272
10.9 LEDs on the EIUa Board..........................................................................................................................................272
10.10 LEDs on the FG2a Board.......................................................................................................................................273
10.11 LEDs on the FG2c Board.......................................................................................................................................274
10.12 LEDs on the FG2d Board.......................................................................................................................................275
10.13 LEDs on the GCUa/GCGa Board...........................................................................................................................275
10.14 LEDs on the GOUa Board......................................................................................................................................276
10.15 LEDs on the GOUc Board......................................................................................................................................277
10.16 LEDs on the GOUd Board......................................................................................................................................277
10.17 LEDs on the MDMC Board....................................................................................................................................278
10.18 LEDs on the NIUa Board.......................................................................................................................................279
10.19 LEDs on the OIUa Board.......................................................................................................................................279
10.20 LEDs on the OMUa/OMUb Board.........................................................................................................................280
10.21 LEDs on the PAMU Board.....................................................................................................................................281
10.22 LEDs on the PEUa Board.......................................................................................................................................281
10.23 LEDs on the POUa Board......................................................................................................................................282
10.24 LEDs on the POUc Board......................................................................................................................................283
10.25 LEDs on the SAUa Board......................................................................................................................................283
10.26 LEDs on the SAUc Board......................................................................................................................................284
10.27 LEDs on the SCUa Board.......................................................................................................................................285
10.28 LEDs on the SCUb Board......................................................................................................................................286
10.29 LEDs on the SPUa Board.......................................................................................................................................287
10.30 LEDs on the SPUb Board.......................................................................................................................................288
10.31 LEDs on the TNUa Board......................................................................................................................................288
BSC6900 GU
Site Maintenance Guide Contents
Issue 07 (2013-06-28) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
viii
10.32 LEDs on the UOIa Board.......................................................................................................................................289
10.33 LEDs on the UOIc Board.......................................................................................................................................290
11 DIP Switches on Components.............................................................................................. 291
11.1 DIP Switch on the Subrack.......................................................................................................................................292
11.2 DIP Switches on the AEUa Board............................................................................................................................294
11.3 DIP Switches on the AOUa Board...........................................................................................................................297
11.4 DIP Switches on the EIUa Board.............................................................................................................................299
11.5 DIP Switch on the MDMC Board............................................................................................................................302
11.6 DIP Switch on the PAMU Board.............................................................................................................................302
11.7 DIP Switches on the PEUa Board............................................................................................................................303
11.8 DIP Switch on the PFCU Board...............................................................................................................................306
11.9 DIP Switches on the POUa Board............................................................................................................................308
12 BSC6900 Site Maintenance Record...................................................................................... 311
BSC6900 GU
Site Maintenance Guide Contents
Issue 07 (2013-06-28) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
ix
1 Changes in the BSC6900 GU Site
Maintenance Guide
This chapter describes the changes in the BSC6900 GU Site Maintenance Guide.
07 (2013-06-28)
This is the seventh commercial release of V900R014C00.
Compared with issue 06 (2013-04-15), this issue does not include any new topics.
Compared with issue 06 (2013-04-15), this issue incorporates the following changes:
Content Description
Scenario: Replacing Two OMUa or OMUb
Boards with Two OMUc Boards
The steps is optimized.

Compared with issue 06 (2013-04-15), this issue does not exclude any topics.
06 (2013-04-15)
This is the sixth commercial release of V900R014C00.
Compared with issue 05 (2013-03-25), this issue does not include any new topics.
Compared with issue 05 (2013-03-25), this issue incorporates the following changes:
Content Description
8.39 Replacing the GBAM The steps of Replace the GBAM with
an OMU board is optimized.

Compared with issue 05 (2013-03-25), this issue does not exclude any topics.
BSC6900 GU
Site Maintenance Guide 1 Changes in the BSC6900 GU Site Maintenance Guide
Issue 07 (2013-06-28) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
1
05 (2013-03-25)
This is the fifth commercial release of V900R014C00.
Compared with issue 04 (2012-12-31), this issue does not include any new topics.
Compared with issue 04 (2012-12-31), this issue incorporates the following changes:
Content Description
Scenario: Replacing Two OMUa or OMUb
Boards with Two OMUc Boards
The steps using USB installation disk is
deleted and modified to install
manually.

Compared with issue 04 (2012-12-31), this issue does not exclude any topics.
04 (2012-12-31)
This is the fourth commercial release of V900R014C00.
Compared with issue 03 (2012-11-07), this issue does not include any new topics.
Compared with issue 03 (2012-11-07), this issue incorporates the following changes:
Content Description
8.8 Replacing an FG2a Board
8.9 Replacing an FG2c Board
8.10 Replacing an FG2d Board
8.12 Replacing a GOUa Board
8.13 Replacing a GOUc Board
8.14 Replacing a GOUd Board
8.20 Replacing a PEUa Board
8.21 Replacing a POUa Board
8.22 Replacing a POUc Board
The step that query the IPPATH status
of board and block the IP path to be
replacing is added.

Compared with issue 03 (2012-11-07), this issue does not exclude any topics.
03 (2012-11-07)
This is the third commercial release of V900R014C00.
Compared with issue 02 (2012-08-30), this issue does not include any new topics.
Compared with issue 02 (2012-08-30), this issue incorporates the following changes:
BSC6900 GU
Site Maintenance Guide 1 Changes in the BSC6900 GU Site Maintenance Guide
Issue 07 (2013-06-28) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
2
Content Description
Scenario: Replacing Two OMUa or OMUb
Boards with Two OMUc Boards
Scenario: Replacing an OMUa or OMUb Board
with Two OMUc Boards
Scenario: Replacing an OMUa or OMUb Board
with an OMUc Board
The prerequisite is modified.

Compared with issue 02 (2012-08-30), this issue does not exclude any topics.
02 (2012-08-30)
This is the second commercial release of V900R014C00.
Compared with issue 01 (2012-04-26), this issue does not include any new topics.
Compared with issue 01 (2012-04-26), this issue incorporates the following changes:
Content Description
8.18 Replacing an OMU Board The procedure for installing the
operating system patch and upgrading
the Ethernet adapter drive is added.

Compared with issue 01 (2012-04-26), this issue does not exclude any topics.
01 (2012-04-26)
This is the first commercial release of V900R014C00.
Compared with issue Draft A (2012-02-15), this issue does not include any new topics.
Compared with issue Draft A (2012-02-15), this issue does not incorporates any changes.
Compared with issue Draft A (2012-02-15), this issue does not exclude any topics.
Draft A (2012-02-15)
This is the Draft A release of V900R014C00.
Compared with issue 04 (2012-01-05) of V900R013C00, this issue includes the following new
topics:
l 8.23 Replace an SAUa/SAUc Board
Compared with issue 04 (2012-01-05) of V900R013C000, this issue incorporates the following
changes:
BSC6900 GU
Site Maintenance Guide 1 Changes in the BSC6900 GU Site Maintenance Guide
Issue 07 (2013-06-28) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
3
Content Description
8.31 Replacing a Subrack The procedure for replacing a subrack
is modified.

Compared with issue 04 (2012-01-05) of V900R013C00, this issue does not exclude any topics.
BSC6900 GU
Site Maintenance Guide 1 Changes in the BSC6900 GU Site Maintenance Guide
Issue 07 (2013-06-28) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
4
2 Site Maintenance Tool Preparations
This section lists the tools required for BSC6900 site maintenance. These tools must be placed
in the equipment room or at nearby places for easy access.
Table 2-1 lists the maintenance items and tools.
Table 2-1 Maintenance items and tools for site maintenance
Item Tools
Cleaning the fan
box
ESD wrist strap, Phillips screwdriver, vacuum cleaner, ESD soft brush,
and clean cotton cloth
Cleaning the air
filters
ESD wrist strap, Phillips screwdriver, and clean cotton cloth
Replacing a board ESD wrist strap, Phillips screwdriver, flat-head screwdriver, ESD box
or bag, clean cotton cloth, and fiber cleaner
Replacing the fan
box, power
distribution box,
or subrack
ESD wrist strap, Phillips screwdriver, flat-head screwdriver, ESD box
or bag, diagonal pliers, dry cotton cloth, and fiber cleaner
Replacing the
cables
ESD wrist strap, Ethernet meter, Ethernet cable pliers, flat-head
screwdriver, clean cotton cloth, fiber cleaner, ESD gloves, and diagonal
pliers
Tools summary for
the BSC6900 site
maintenance
ESD gloves, ESD wrist strap, Phillips screwdriver, flat-head
screwdriver, ESD box or bag, dustfree cotton cloth, fiber cleaner,
Ethernet cable tester, Ethernet cable pliers, vacuum cleaner, ESD soft
brush, and diagonal pliers
BSC6900 GU
Site Maintenance Guide 2 Site Maintenance Tool Preparations
Issue 07 (2013-06-28) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
5
3 High-Risk Hardware Operations
High-risk hardware operations include installing boards and replacing boards, both of which
have the same impact. Exercise cautious when deciding to install or replace a board because this
operation may interrupt services or result in a system power outage. Perform this operation as
soon as possible when the traffic is light to reduce the impact on the system.
High-Risk Operations Impact
8.3 Replacing an AEUa
Board
l Replacing the standby AEU has no adverse impact on the
system. When no standby AEU is in position, replacing
the board disrupts services carried on this board.
l If the BSC6900 and its peer equipment are connected
through only the AEU board, the ongoing services
between the BSC6900 and its peer equipment are
disrupted when you replace the AEU board.
8.4 Replacing an AOUa
Board
8.5 Replacing an AOUc
Board
l Replacing the standby AOU has no adverse impact on the
system. If no standby AOU is in position, replacing the
board disrupts services carried on this board.
l If the BSC6900 and its peer equipment are connected
through only the AOU board, the ongoing services
between the BSC6900 and its peer equipment are
disrupted when you replace the AOU board.
8.6 Replacing a DPUa/
DPUb/DPUc/DPUd/DPUe/
DPUf Board
Replacing the DPU board interrupts all the services carried
on the board.
8.7 Replacing an EIUa
Board
l Replacing the standby EIU has no adverse impact on the
system. Replacing the EIU board that works
independently, however, disrupts services carried on this
board.
l If the BSC6900 and its peer equipment are connected
through only the EIU board, the ongoing services between
the BSC6900 and its peer equipment are disrupted when
you replace the EIU board.
BSC6900 GU
Site Maintenance Guide 3 High-Risk Hardware Operations
Issue 07 (2013-06-28) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
6
High-Risk Operations Impact
8.8 Replacing an FG2a
Board
8.9 Replacing an FG2c
Board
8.10 Replacing an FG2d
Board
l If the FG2 board is standby and the data over the port on
the FG2 board are backed up, replacing the standby FG2
board has no adverse impact on the system.
l When the FG2 boards work in backup mode and the ports
work in load sharing mode, replacing the standby FG2
board disrupts part of services if the traffic over the ports
exceeds the bandwidth of the ports on the active board.
When the FG2 boards work in backup mode with
independent ports, replacing the standby FG2 board
interrupts all the services carried on the standby board.
l Replacing an FG2 board that works independently
interrupts all the services on the board.
l If the BSC6900 and its peer equipment are connected
through only the FG2 board, the ongoing services
between the BSC6900 and its peer equipment are
disrupted when you replace the FG2 board.
8.11 Replacing a GCUa/
GCGa Board
Replacing a standby GCU/GCG board does not affect the
system. Replacing a GCU/GCG board that works
independently interrupts services carried on the BSC6900.
8.12 Replacing a GOUa
Board
8.13 Replacing a GOUc
Board
8.14 Replacing a GOUd
Board
l If the GOU board is standby and the data over the port on
the GOU board are backed up, replacing the standby GOU
board has no adverse impact on the system.
l When the GOU boards work in backup mode and the ports
work in load sharing mode, replacing the standby GOU
board disrupts part of services if the total traffic over the
ports exceeds the bandwidth of the ports on the active
board. When the GOU boards work in backup mode with
independent ports, replacing the standby GOU board
interrupts all the services carried on the standby board.
l Replacing a GOU board that works independently
disrupts the services on that board.
l If the BSC6900 and its peer equipment are connected
through only the GOU board, the ongoing services
between the BSC6900 and its peer equipment are
disrupted when you replace the GOU board.
8.15 Replacing an MDMC
Board
Replacing the MDMC board interrupts the monitoring on the
common PDB.
8.16 Replacing a NIUa
Board
Replacing the NIU board interrupts all the services carried
on the board.
BSC6900 GU
Site Maintenance Guide 3 High-Risk Hardware Operations
Issue 07 (2013-06-28) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
7
High-Risk Operations Impact
8.17 Replacing an OIUa
Board
l Replacing the standby OIU board has no adverse impact
on the system. When no standby OIU board is in position,
replacing the board disrupts services carried on this board.
l If the BSC6900 and its peer equipment are connected
through only the OIU board, the ongoing services
between the BSC6900 and its peer equipment are
disrupted when you replace the OIU board.
8.18 Replacing an OMU
Board
Replacing the OMU board interrupts all the services carried
on the board.
8.19 Replacing a PAMU
Board
Replacing the PAMU board interrupts the monitoring on the
BSC6900 PDB.
8.20 Replacing a PEUa
Board
l Replacing the standby PEU has no adverse impact on the
system. Replacing the PEU board that works
independently, however, disrupts services carried on this
board.
l If the BSC6900 and its peer equipment are connected
through only the PEU board, the ongoing services
between the BSC6900 and its peer equipment are
disrupted when you replace the PEU board.
8.21 Replacing a POUa
Board
8.22 Replacing a POUc
Board
l Replacing the standby POU has no adverse impact on the
system. Replacing the POU board that works
independently, however, disrupts services carried by the
subrack that houses the board.
l If the BSC6900 and its peer equipment are connected
through only the POU board, the ongoing services
between the BSC6900 and its peer equipment are
disrupted when you replace the POU board.
8.23 Replace an SAUa/
SAUc Board
Replacing the SAU board that works independently will
interrupt the communication between the host boards and the
SAU, which results in system data loss.
8.24 Replacing an SCUa/
SCUb Board
l Replacing the standby SCU board decreases the internal
switching capacity and has no impact on services.
l If no standby board is in position, replacing the SCU
board in the MPS resets all boards in the BSC6900 and
interrupts all the ongoing services in the BSC6900.
l If no standby board is in position, replacing the SCU
board in the EPS/TCS resets all boards in the subrack and
interrupts all the ongoing services. In addition, the
communication between the EPS/TCS and the MPS is
interrupted.
BSC6900 GU
Site Maintenance Guide 3 High-Risk Hardware Operations
Issue 07 (2013-06-28) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
8
High-Risk Operations Impact
8.26 Replacing a UOIa
Board
8.27 Replacing a UOIc
Board
l Replacing the standby UOI board has no adverse impact
on the system. When no standby UOI board is in position,
replacing the board disrupts services carried on this board.
l If the BSC6900 and its peer equipment are connected
through only the UOI board, the ongoing services
between the BSC6900 and its peer equipment are
disrupted when you replace the UOI board.
8.25 Replacing a TNUa
Board
l Replacing the standby TNU board decreases the internal
switching capacity and has no impact on the ongoing
services.
l When no standby board is in position, replacing the TNU
board in the MPS resets all the other boards in the MPS
and interrupts all the ongoing services in the subrack.
l When no standby board is in position, replacing the TNU
board in the EPS/TCS resets all the other boards in the
EPS/TCS and interrupts all the ongoing services in the
subrack. In addition, the communication between the
EPS/TCS and the MPS is interrupted.
8.28 Replacing an XPUa/
SPUa Board
l Replacing the standby main control XPU/SPU board has
no adverse impact on the services in the system.
Replacing the main control XPU/SPU board that works
independently, however, disrupts services carried in the
subrack.
l Replacing the standby non main control XPU/SPU board
has no adverse impact on the services in the system.
Replacing the non main control XPU/SPU board that
works independently, however, disrupts services carried
in the board.
8.30 Replacing a WOPB
Board
Replacing the WOPB board temporarily makes the
overvoltage protection ineffective.
8.31 Replacing a Subrack l Replacing the subrack interrupts services carried on the
boards in this subrack.
l Replace a subrack with caution quickly when the traffic
is low, for example, in the early morning.
l Three persons are required to replace a subrack due to the
weight.
8.32 Replacing the
Independent Fan Subrack
l Do not push the independent fan subrack completely into
the cabinet, that is, certain space should be reserved for
installing cables.
l Pay attention to the mounting bar and guide rails when
installing cables.
BSC6900 GU
Site Maintenance Guide 3 High-Risk Hardware Operations
Issue 07 (2013-06-28) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
9
High-Risk Operations Impact
8.33 Replacing the Power
Distribution Box
l Replacing the power distribution box in the EPR/TCR
interrupts all the services carried by the EPR/TCR.
l Replacing the power distribution box in the MPR
interrupts all the services carried by the entire BSC6900.
8.34 Replacing the Fan Box Replacing the fan assembly severely affects the heat
dissipation. You are advised to replace the fan assembly
within one minute. Otherwise, the boards will be damaged
due to high temperature.
8.35 Replacing the
Pluggable Optical Module
l Replacing the pluggable optical module on the standby
optical interface board does not affect the system.
l If there is no standby board in position, replacing the
pluggable optical module on the active optical interface
board interrupts all the services carried on the board.
8.36 Replacing an Optical
Splitter/Combiner
l When replacing the optical splitter/combiner, do not look
into the optical port without eye protection.
l Replacing an optical splitter/combiner disrupts ongoing
services on the corresponding interface boards.
Therefore, replace it in low traffic hours, for example, at
midnight.
8.37 Replacing the KVM When replacing the KVM, one cannot operate the GBAM
through the GUI.
8.38 Replacing the LAN
Switch
Replacing the LAN switch disrupts the communication
between the LMT/M2000 and the GBAM.
8.39 Replacing the GBAM l Replacing the GBAM disrupts the communication
between the GBAM and the host boards.
l Replacing the GBAM disrupts the communication
between the LMT/M2000 and the BSC6900. In this case,
you cannot maintain the BSC6900 or collect the alarm
information. The BSC6900 host boards, however, work
normally during the replacement of the GBAM.
8.38 Replacing the LAN
Switch
Replacing the LAN switch disrupts the communication
between the LMT/M2000 and the GBAM.
8.39 Replacing the GBAM l Replacing the GBAM disrupts the communication
between the GBAM and the host boards.
l Replacing the GBAM disrupts the communication
between the LMT/M2000 and the BSC6900. In this case,
you cannot maintain the BSC6900 or collect the alarm
information. The BSC6900 host boards, however, work
normally during the replacement of the GBAM.
BSC6900 GU
Site Maintenance Guide 3 High-Risk Hardware Operations
Issue 07 (2013-06-28) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
10
High-Risk Operations Impact
9.1 Replacing a Power
Cable
l During the replacement of the power cable between the
PDF and the power distribution box, if single-input
external power is supplied, the replacement causes the
system to power off and interrupts ongoing services. If
dual-input external power is supplied, the replacement
does not affect the system but triggers a power failure
alarm.
l During the replacement of the power cable between the
power distribution box and the subrack, if single-input
power is supplied, the replacement causes the subrack to
power off and interrupts ongoing services carried on the
boards in the subrack. If dual-input power is supplied, the
replacement does not affect the system.
l During the replacement of the power cable between the
power distribution box and the independent fan subrack,
if single-input power is supplied, the replacement causes
the subrack to power off and affects the system heat
dissipation. If dual-input power is supplied, the
replacement does not affect the system.
l Before replacing a power cable, check the power supply
mode (for example, single input or dual input) of the
power cable and notify of the customers. For single-input
power supply, be prepared for possible service
interruption.
9.2 Replacing an E1/T1
Cable
l Replacing the E1/T1 cable disrupts the services carried
over the E1/T1 cable.
l If the BSC6900 and its peer end are connected through
only the E1/T1 cable, all the services between the
BSC6900 and its peer end are disrupted during the
replacement.
9.3 Replacing an Optical
Cable
l Do not look directly at connectors of the fiber optic cables
when replacing the fiber optic cable. The beam may hurt
your eyes.
l When the BSC6900 and other NEs are connected in
optical port backup mode, replacing one fiber optic cable
does not affect system services. However, the
replacement interrupts all the services carried on this
cable in other connection mode.
l When the BSC6900 and its peer equipment are connected
through only the fiber optic cable, replacing this cable
interrupts all the services between the BSC6900 and its
peer NEs.
BSC6900 GU
Site Maintenance Guide 3 High-Risk Hardware Operations
Issue 07 (2013-06-28) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
11
High-Risk Operations Impact
9.4 Replacing an Ethernet
Cable
l Replacing the Ethernet cable connected to the LMT
interrupts the communication between the LMT and the
OMU.
l The Port Trunking function is used in the interconnection
ports on the inter-subrack SCU board. Replacing one
Ethernet cable does not affect the system.
l For the interface board, if the BSC6900 is connected to
the peer equipment through only the Ethernet cable,
replacing this cable interrupts all the services between the
BSC6900 and its peer NEs.
l The OMUEOMU board is configured with a pair of
Ethernet cables for backup. Replacing one of them does
not affect the system.
9.6 Replacing a Y-Shaped
Clock Cable
Replacing a Y-shaped clock cable may cause a clock-related
alarm and an automatic switchover between the active and
standby SCU boards.
9.7 Replacing an Inter-
TNUa Cable
Replacing the inter-TNU cable disrupts the TDM switching
services between the two subracks that are connected by the
inter-TNU cable.
BSC6900 GU
Site Maintenance Guide 3 High-Risk Hardware Operations
Issue 07 (2013-06-28) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
12
4 Routine Hardware Maintenance Items
About This Chapter
This chapter describes the routine hardware maintenance items of the BSC6900. Different items
require different maintenance methods.
4.1 Equipment Room Maintenance Items
This section describes the maintenance items in the BSC6900 equipment room. The items
include the ambience alarm, anti-theft device, door and window, temperature, humidity, indoor
air conditioner, and dustproof condition.
4.2 Maintaining the Power Supply and Grounding Systems
This section describes the maintenance items of the BSC6900 power supply and the grounding
system. The maintenance items consist of power cables, voltage, PGND cables, components
inside the cabinet, earth resistance, batteries, and rectifier.
4.3 Cabinet Maintenance Items
This section describes the maintenance items of the BSC6900 cabinet. The maintenance items
consist of fans, air filters, cabinet surface, locks and doors of cabinet, cabinet cleanliness, fan
box cleanliness, ESD wrist strap, cabinet components, and idle optical ports on boards.
4.4 Cable Maintenance Items
This section describes the cable maintenance items. The maintenance items consist of cable
labels, connectors and sockets, connection of E1/T1 cables, connection of Ethernet cables, and
connection of optical cables.
BSC6900 GU
Site Maintenance Guide 4 Routine Hardware Maintenance Items
Issue 07 (2013-06-28) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
13
4.1 Equipment Room Maintenance Items
This section describes the maintenance items in the BSC6900 equipment room. The items
include the ambience alarm, anti-theft device, door and window, temperature, humidity, indoor
air conditioner, and dustproof condition.
Table 4-1 lists the maintenance items of the equipment room.
Table 4-1 Maintenance items of the equipment room
Item Interval Operation Guide Reference
Standard
Alarms on
equipment room
environment
Daily Check whether power
supply alarms, fire
alarms, or smoke
alarms are generated.
No power supply
alarms, fire alarms, or
smoke alarms are
reported.
Check anti-theft nets,
equipment room
doors, and windows
Weekly Check whether the
anti-theft nets, doors,
and windows are
intact.
The anti-theft device,
door, and window are
in good condition.
Check room
temperature
Daily Check the
temperature indicator
in the equipment
room.
The temperature is
between 15C and 30
C.
Check room
humidity
Daily Check the humidity
indicator in the
equipment room.
The humidity is
between 40% and
65%.
Check indoor air
conditioner
Weekly Check the running
status of the air
conditioner.
The air conditioner
works properly. The
temperature set on the
air conditioner is
consistent with that
on the thermometer.
Check dustproof
condition
Weekly Check the equipment
shell, equipment
interior, floor, and
desktop.
The cabinet surface is
clean, and the cabinet
interior is dustfree.

4.2 Maintaining the Power Supply and Grounding Systems
This section describes the maintenance items of the BSC6900 power supply and the grounding
system. The maintenance items consist of power cables, voltage, PGND cables, components
inside the cabinet, earth resistance, batteries, and rectifier.
Table 4-2 lists the maintenance items of the power supply and grounding systems.
BSC6900 GU
Site Maintenance Guide 4 Routine Hardware Maintenance Items
Issue 07 (2013-06-28) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
14
Table 4-2 Maintenance items of the power supply and grounding systems
Item Interval Operation Guide Reference Standard
Power cables Monthly or
quarterly
Check all the power cables
between the power supply
system and the power
distribution box of the
cabinet.
l The power cables are not
aged.
l The PGND cables are
securely connected. The
connection points are not
corroded.
Voltage Monthly or
quarterly
Measure the voltage of the
power supply using a
multimeter.
The voltage of the power
supply is within the standard
voltage range. For details,
refer to Technical
Specifications of the Cabinet.
PGND cables Monthly or
quarterly
Check all the PGND
cables and ground bars.
l The PGND cables are not
aged.
l The PGND cables are
securely connected. The
connection points are not
corroded.
l The ground bars are not
corroded. Proper anti-
corrosion measures are
taken.
Components
inside the
cabinet
Monthly or
quarterly
Check the connection
terminals and captive
screws of all the PGND
cables.
l The PGND cables are not
aged.
l The PGND cables are
securely connected. The
connection points are not
corroded.
l The connection terminals
and captive screws are
securely and correctly
connected, and they are
not corroded.
Earth
resistance
Monthly or
quarterly
Use an electric earth
resistance tester to
measure the earth
resistance and keep a
record.
The grounding resistance is
less than or equal to 10 ohms.
BSC6900 GU
Site Maintenance Guide 4 Routine Hardware Maintenance Items
Issue 07 (2013-06-28) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
15
Item Interval Operation Guide Reference Standard
Batteries and
rectifier
Yearly Check the batteries and
rectifier of the power
supply system in each
piece of equipment room.
l The batteries are normal.
There is no battery
leakage, swelling, or
corrosion.
l The capacity of all
batteries meets the
standard requirements
and the batteries are
correctly connected.
l The rectifier meets the
required specifications.

4.3 Cabinet Maintenance Items
This section describes the maintenance items of the BSC6900 cabinet. The maintenance items
consist of fans, air filters, cabinet surface, locks and doors of cabinet, cabinet cleanliness, fan
box cleanliness, ESD wrist strap, cabinet components, and idle optical ports on boards.
Table 4-3 lists the maintenance items of the BSC6900 cabinet.
Table 4-3 BSC6900 cabinet maintenance items
Item Interval Operation Guide Reference Standard
Fans
Weekly or
monthly
Check the running state of
the fans.
The fan works properly
without making abnormal
sounds.
Air filters Quarterly
Check the air filters of
each cabinet.
The air filters are dust-free
and damage-free. Clean the
dirty air filter according to
7 Cleaning and Replacing
the Air Filters. Replace
the damaged air filter
according to 7.4 Replacing
the Air Filters.
Cabinet surface
Monthly or
quarterly
Check the cabinet surface
and the cabinet labels.
The cabinet surface is
intact. The labels are
legible.
Locks and
doors
Monthly or
quarterly
Check whether the lock is
normal and the door can be
opened and closed easily.
The locks and the doors of
the cabinet work properly.
Cleanness of
the cabinets
Monthly or
quarterly
Check whether the cabinet
is clean.
The cabinet surface is
clean. The interior of the
cabinet is dust-free.
BSC6900 GU
Site Maintenance Guide 4 Routine Hardware Maintenance Items
Issue 07 (2013-06-28) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
16
Item Interval Operation Guide Reference Standard
Cleanness of
the fan box
Yearly
Clean the fan box
according to 6 Cleaning
the Fan Box.
The surface of the fan box
is clean. The interior of the
fan box is dust-free.
Inside of the
cabinet
Monthly or
quarterly
Check the LEDs of every
component inside the
cabinet.
The LEDs work properly.
For details on the LEDs,
refer to the following part:
Front Panel of the High-
Power Power Distribution
Box, Fan Box (Configured
with the PFCU Board),
LEDs on the Boards.
ESD wrist strap Quarterly
Measure the grounding
resistance of the ESD wrist
strap as follows:
l Use an ESD wrist strap
tester to test the ESD
wrist strap.
l Use a multimeter.
l When you use an ESD
wrist strap tester, the
GOOD LED on it is
ON.
l When you use a
multimeter, the
grounding resistance of
the ESD wrist strap
ranges from 0.8
megohm to 1.2
megohms.
Protection of
the idle optical
ports on boards
Monthly or
quarterly
Check the dustproof caps
on the idle optical ports.
The dustproof caps are on
the idle optical ports.

4.4 Cable Maintenance Items
This section describes the cable maintenance items. The maintenance items consist of cable
labels, connectors and sockets, connection of E1/T1 cables, connection of Ethernet cables, and
connection of optical cables.
Table 4-4 describes the cable maintenance items.
Table 4-4 Cable maintenance items
Item Interval Operation Guide Reference Standard
Check
connectors and
sockets
Monthly or
quarterly
Check the insulators of
the connectors or the
sockets.
The insulators of the
connectors or the sockets
are clean.
BSC6900 GU
Site Maintenance Guide 4 Routine Hardware Maintenance Items
Issue 07 (2013-06-28) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
17
Item Interval Operation Guide Reference Standard
E1/T1 cable
connections
Yearly
Check the connections
of the E1/T1 cables.
l The E1/T1 cables are
properly connected.
l The E1/T1 cables are
intact.
l The labels on the cables
are legible.
Ethernet cable
connections
Yearly
Check the connections
of the Ethernet cables.
l The Ethernet cables are
properly connected.
l The Ethernet cables are
intact.
l The labels on the cables
are legible.
Optical cable
connections
Yearly
Check the connections
of the optical cables.
l The optical cables are
properly connected.
l The optical cables are
intact.
l The labels on the cables
are legible.
BSC6900 GU
Site Maintenance Guide 4 Routine Hardware Maintenance Items
Issue 07 (2013-06-28) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
18
5 Powering On/Off the BSC6900
About This Chapter
This chapter describes how to power on and power off the BSC6900. The following is described:
the distribution of the power switches, powering on the BSC6900 cabinet, powering off the
BSC6900 cabinet in a normal situation, and powering off the BSC6900 cabinet in case of
emergencies.
5.1 Distribution of Power Switches on the Common Power Distribution Box
This section describes the mapping between the six routes of power outputs from the power
distribution box of the BSC6900 cabinet and the components in the BSC6900 cabinet.
5.2 Distribution of Power Switches on the High-Power PDB
The power distribution box of the MPR/EPR/TCR provides 20 (10 x 2) routes of power outputs.
This section describes the mapping between the eight routes of power outputs from the power
distribution box of the MPR/EPR/TCR and the components in the cabinet.
5.3 Powering On the Cabinet
This section describes how to power on the BSC6900 cabinet and how to handle common power
failures in the components of the cabinet.
5.4 Powering Off the Cabinet in a Normal Situation
This section describes how to power off the BSC6900 cabinet in a normal situation. You must
power off the BSC6900 cabinet before relocating the equipment or before a forecasted territorial
power blackout. Powering off the BSC6900 cabinet disrupts all the ongoing services. Therefore,
power off the BSC6900 cabinet only when required.
5.5 Powering Off the Cabinet in Emergency Cases
This section describes how to power off the BSC6900 cabinet in emergency cases. To ensure
the security of the BSC6900 cabinet, the BSC6900 cabinet must be powered off in emergency
cases, such as fire, smoke, or water immersion.
BSC6900 GU
Site Maintenance Guide 5 Powering On/Off the BSC6900
Issue 07 (2013-06-28) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
19
5.1 Distribution of Power Switches on the Common Power
Distribution Box
This section describes the mapping between the six routes of power outputs from the power
distribution box of the BSC6900 cabinet and the components in the BSC6900 cabinet.
Distribution of Power Switches on the Power Distribution Box of the MPR
(Configured with OMU Board)/EPR/TCR
When the MPR is configured with the OMU board, the distribution of power switches on the
power distribution box of the MPR is the same as the distribution of power switches on the power
distribution box of the EPR/TCR. Figure 5-1 shows the mapping between the six power switches
on the power distribution box and the components in the MPR (configured with OMU board)/
EPR/TCR. Table 5-1 presents the mapping between the six power switches and the components
in the MPR (configured with OMU board)/EPR/TCR.
Figure 5-1 Mapping between the power switches and the components in the MPR (configured
with OMU board)/EPR/TCR

Table 5-1 Mapping between the power switches and the components in the MPR (configured
with OMU board)/EPR/TCR
Component Power Switch on the Power Distribution Box
Subrack 2 SW1, SW4
Subrack 1 SW2, SW5
BSC6900 GU
Site Maintenance Guide 5 Powering On/Off the BSC6900
Issue 07 (2013-06-28) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
20
Component Power Switch on the Power Distribution Box
Subrack 0 SW3, SW6

Distribution of Power Switches on the Power Distribution Box of the MPR
(Configured with GBAM)
Figure 5-2 shows the mapping between the six power switches on the power distribution box
and the components in the MPR that is configured with GBAM. Table 5-2 presents the mapping
between the six power switches on the power distribution box and the components in the MPR
that is configured with GBAM.
Figure 5-2 Mapping between the power switches and the components in the MPR (configured
with GBAM)

Table 5-2 Mapping between the power switches and the components in the MPR (configured
with GBAM)
Component Power Switch on the Power Distribution Box
Subrack 1 SW1, SW4
Subrack 0 SW2, SW5
KVM SW3
LAN switch SW3
BSC6900 GU
Site Maintenance Guide 5 Powering On/Off the BSC6900
Issue 07 (2013-06-28) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
21
Component Power Switch on the Power Distribution Box
GBAM SW3, SW6

5.2 Distribution of Power Switches on the High-Power PDB
The power distribution box of the MPR/EPR/TCR provides 20 (10 x 2) routes of power outputs.
This section describes the mapping between the eight routes of power outputs from the power
distribution box of the MPR/EPR/TCR and the components in the cabinet.
The power distribution box of the MPR/EPR/TCR provides eight routes of power outputs in two
groups (group A and group B), which are controlled by switches A7 to A10 and B7 to B10
respectively. Figure 5-3 shows the mapping between the power switches on the power
distribution box and the components in the MPR/EPR/TCR. Table 5-3 lists the mapping between
the power switches and the components.
Figure 5-3 Distribution of power switches on the power distribution box of the MPR/EPR/TCR

Table 5-3 Mapping between the power switches and the components in the MPR/EPR/TCR
Component Power Switch on the Power Distribution Box
Subrack 2 A8, B8
Subrack 1 A9, B9
Subrack 0 A10, B10
BSC6900 GU
Site Maintenance Guide 5 Powering On/Off the BSC6900
Issue 07 (2013-06-28) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
22
Component Power Switch on the Power Distribution Box
Independent fan subrack A7, B7

5.3 Powering On the Cabinet
This section describes how to power on the BSC6900 cabinet and how to handle common power
failures in the components of the cabinet.
Prerequisites
l The surface of the input power cables is not damaged. The input power cables are correctly
and securely connected.
l The green and yellow PGND cable for the cabinet is properly connected.
l The power switches SW1 to SW6 (or A1 to A10 and B1 to B10) on the power distribution
box are set to OFF.
CAUTION
Ensure that the Checking and Setting the Subrack DIP Switch operation is performed before the
cabinet is powered on. After the cabinet is powered on, any modification to the setting of a DIP
switch on a subrack does not take effect.
Procedure
Step 1 Set the power switches that control the BSC power supply on the power distribution frame (PDF)
to ON.
Step 2 Set the power switches on the power distribution box to ON after the RUN LED on the front
panel of the power distribution box blinks every alternate 0.25s.
If the cabinet is... Then...
MPR, Set the corresponding power switches on the power distribution
box to ON. Then, go to Step 3.
EPR/TCR, Set the power switches that correspond to the subracks
configured in the same cabinet to ON. Then, go to Step 4.

Step 3 Set the power switch on the front panel of the GBAM and the power switch on the rear panel of
the KVM to ON if the GBAM is configured.
Step 4 Check the power supply to the cabinet components, as listed in Table 5-4.
BSC6900 GU
Site Maintenance Guide 5 Powering On/Off the BSC6900
Issue 07 (2013-06-28) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
23
Table 5-4 Checklist for the power supply to the cabinet components
Component Normal LED Status
Board The green RUN LED on the board panel first blinks
0.125s on and 0.125s off. After the board is loaded, the
indicator blinks one second on and one second off.
Fan box The green RUN LED on the panel of the fan box first
blinks 0.25s on and 0.25s off,and then the indicator
blinks one second on and one second off after the
subrack/independent fan subrack is powered on.
Power distribution monitor board The green RUN LED on the board panel first blinks
0.25s on and 0.25s off. After the board is loaded, the
indicator blinks one second on and one second off.
GBAM The main power LED on the front panel is on.
LAN switch The POWER LED on the front panel is on.
KVM The POWER LED on the keyboard is on.

Step 5 Power on the cabinet and then check the power supply to the components in the cabinet. Clear
the power failures, if any, according to Table 5-5.
Table 5-5 Handling power failures in the components in the cabinet
Failure Type Handling Measures
Power failure in all the internal
parts of the cabinet
Check whether the -48 V power cables and the RTN power
cables are properly connected.
l If the cable connection is wrong, set all the power
switches on the power distribution box to OFF, and then
reconnect the power cables.
CAUTION
Set the power switches that control the BSC power supply on
the PDF to OFF before reconnecting the power cables.
l If the cable connection is correct, replace the
Overvoltage Protection Board (WOPB). If the failure
persists, replace the power distribution box.
Power failure in all the boards
in a subrack
Use a multimeter to measure the input voltage of the subrack
l If the input voltage is between -40 V and -57 V, replace
the subrack.
l If the input voltage is not between -40 V and -57 V, check
the connections of the power cables. If the connections
of the power cables are loose, set the power switch on
the power distribution box corresponding to the subrack
to OFF and then reconnect the power cables. Otherwise,
replace the power distribution box because the power
switch on it may be faulty.
BSC6900 GU
Site Maintenance Guide 5 Powering On/Off the BSC6900
Issue 07 (2013-06-28) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
24
Failure Type Handling Measures
Power failure in a certain board
in a subrack
Perform the following operations:
1. Check whether the board is securely connected. If the
board is not securely connected, reinstall the board.
Observe the LEDs on the board panel. For details about
the states of the LEDs on the board panel, see LEDs on
the Boards.
2. Remove the board, and check whether there is any
distorted pin, broken pin, or if any pin is missing on the
board socket. Replace the subrack if there is a distorted
pin, broken pin, or if a pin is missing.
3. Reinstall the board, and observe the LEDs on the board
panel. For details about the states of the LEDs on the
board panel, see LEDs on the Boards.
4. If the LEDs indicate that the board does not work
normally, remove the board and install it into a vacant
slot that is for a board of the same type. Then, observe
the LEDs on the board panel.
l If the board works normally, it indicates that the slot
is faulty. In this case, replace the subrack.
l If the board does not work normally, it indicates that
the board is faulty. In this case, replace the board.
Power failure in the GBAM Use a multimeter to measure the input voltage of the GBAM.
l If the input voltage is between -40 V and -57 V, replace
the power modules of the GBAM.
l If the input voltage is not between -40 V and -57 V, check
the connections of the power cables. If the connections
of the power cables are loose, set the power switch on
the power distribution box corresponding to the GBAM
to OFF and then reconnect the power cables. Otherwise,
replace the power distribution box because the power
switch on it may be faulty.
Power failure in any other part
in the cabinet
Use a multimeter to measure the input voltage of the faulty
component.
l If the input voltage is between -40 V and -57 V, replace
the component.
l If the input voltage is not between -40 V and -57 V, check
the connections of the power cables. If the connections
of the power cables are loose, set the power switch on
the power distribution box corresponding to the
component to OFF and then reconnect the power cables.
Otherwise, replace the power distribution box because
the power switch on it may be faulty.

----End
BSC6900 GU
Site Maintenance Guide 5 Powering On/Off the BSC6900
Issue 07 (2013-06-28) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
25
5.4 Powering Off the Cabinet in a Normal Situation
This section describes how to power off the BSC6900 cabinet in a normal situation. You must
power off the BSC6900 cabinet before relocating the equipment or before a forecasted territorial
power blackout. Powering off the BSC6900 cabinet disrupts all the ongoing services. Therefore,
power off the BSC6900 cabinet only when required.
Prerequisites
l The green and yellow PGND cable for the cabinet is properly connected.
l The data on the BSC6900 is backed up.
Context
To minimize the adverse impact on the BSC6900, power off the EPR/TCR before you power
off the MPR.
Procedure
l In the case that the external GBAM is configured
1. Run the SSH(Secure Shell) client, such as PuTTY, on the LMT PC. Enter the IP
address of the external GBAM and then log in to the GBAM as user root.
2. Run the poweroff command to shut down the external GBAM.
3. Set the power switch on the front panel of the external GBAM to OFF.
4. Set power switches SW1 to SW6 on the power distribution box of the EPR/TCR to
OFF.
5. If multiple EPR/TCRs are configured, repeat Step 4 to power off all the EPRs/TCRs.
CAUTION
If only a few EPRs/TCRs are powered off, data inconsistency will occur.
6. Turn off the power switch on the rear panel of the KVM.
7. Set power switches SW1 to SW6 on the power distribution box of the MPR to OFF.
8. Set the power switches that control the BSC6900 power supply on the PDF to OFF.
l In the case that the OMUa/OMUb board is configured
1. Set the power switches corresponding to the subracks configured in the EPR. That is,
set the power switches A7 to A10 and B7 to B10 on the power distribution box to
OFF in sequence.
2. Flip raise the ejector levers of the OMUa/OMUb board.
NOTE
Repeat this step if two OMUa/OMUb boards are configured. After you flip open the upper and
lower ejector levers, the OMUa/OMUb board automatically shuts down the operating system
and hard disks. The OFFLINE LED on the board is on, which indicates that the board is powered
off.
BSC6900 GU
Site Maintenance Guide 5 Powering On/Off the BSC6900
Issue 07 (2013-06-28) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
26
3. After the OFFLINE LED on the OMUa/OMUb board is ON, set the power switches
A7 to A10 and B7 to B10 on the power distribution box to OFF in sequence.
4. Flip the ejector levers of the OMUa/OMUb board inwards until they are in position.
5. Set the power switches that control the BSC power supply on the PDF to OFF.
l In the case that the OMUc board is configured
1. Set the power switches corresponding to the subracks configured in the EPR. That is,
set the power switches A7 to A10 and B7 to B10 on the power distribution box to
OFF in sequence.
2. Press the PWRBTN button on the OMUc board.
NOTE
Repeat this step if two OMUc boards are configured. After you flip open the upper and lower
ejector levers, the OMUc board automatically shuts down the operating system and hard disks.
The OFFLINE LED on the board is on, which indicates that the board is powered off.
3. After the OFFLINE LED on the OMU board is ON, set the power switches A7 to
A10 and B7 to B10 on the power distribution box to OFF in sequence.
4. Flip the ejector levers of the OMUc board inwards until they are in position.
5. Set the power switches that control the BSC power supply on the PDF to OFF.
----End
5.5 Powering Off the Cabinet in Emergency Cases
This section describes how to power off the BSC6900 cabinet in emergency cases. To ensure
the security of the BSC6900 cabinet, the BSC6900 cabinet must be powered off in emergency
cases, such as fire, smoke, or water immersion.
Procedure
Step 1 Set all the switches on the power distribution box of the BSC6900 cabinet to OFF.
Step 2 If time permits, set the switches that control the power supply to the BSC6900 on the PDF to
OFF.
----End
BSC6900 GU
Site Maintenance Guide 5 Powering On/Off the BSC6900
Issue 07 (2013-06-28) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
27
6 Cleaning the Fan Box
This chapter describes how to clean a fan box. To ensure stability and reliability of the equipment,
the maintenance personnel should clean each fan box (including the fan boxes in the service
subracks and the fan boxes in the independent fan subrack) regularly, preferably once every
year.
Prerequisites
l The tools are ready. They are the ESD wrist strap, clean cotton cloth, ESD soft brush,
vacuum cleaner, and Phillips screwdriver.
l A clean backup fan box is ready for use.
Context
CAUTION
l To protect the components from electrostatic discharge, wear an ESD wrist strap properly.
Ensure that the ESD wrist strap is properly connected to the ESD connector on the cabinet.
If no ESD wrist strap or no proper grounding point is available, wear ESD gloves.
l Cleaning the fan box severely affects heat dissipation; therefore, you should replace the fan
box in less than one minute. Otherwise, the boards will be damaged due to high temperature.
Procedure
Step 1 Clean the backup fan box by using a clean cotton cloth, an ESD soft brush, and a vacuum cleaner.
Step 2 Use a Phillips screwdriver to open the front door of the cabinet and loosen the two captive screws
on the fan box.
Step 3 Remove the fan box from the cabinet.
BSC6900 GU
Site Maintenance Guide 6 Cleaning the Fan Box
Issue 07 (2013-06-28) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
28
DANGER
When replacing the fan box, do not put your hand inside the fan box. Otherwise, the revolving
fan blade will injure your fingers.
Step 4 Install the backup fan box into the cabinet and then fasten the captive screws to secure the fan
box.
Step 5 Clean the removed fan box with a clean cotton cloth, an ESD soft brush, and a vacuum cleaner.
After being cleaned, the fan box is reserved as a backup for future use.
Step 6 Repeat Step 2 through Step 5 to replace other fan boxes.
----End
BSC6900 GU
Site Maintenance Guide 6 Cleaning the Fan Box
Issue 07 (2013-06-28) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
29
7 Cleaning and Replacing the Air Filters
About This Chapter
This chapter describes how to clean and replace an air filter. The air filter protects the boards
and the BSC6900 from dust. If an air filter is damaged, you must replace it with a new one in
time.
7.1 Position of the Air Filters
This section describes the position of the air filters in the BSC6900 cabinet. The air filters are
installed on the inner side of the front and rear doors and at the bottom of the cabinet.
7.2 Cleaning the Air Filter at the Bottom of the N68E-22 Cabinet
This section describes how to clean the air filter at the bottom of the N68E-22 cabinet. The
maintenance personnel should clean the air filter at the bottom of each cabinet regularly,
preferably once every quarter.
7.3 Cleaning the Air Filter on the Inner Side of the Cabinet Door
This describes how to clean the air filter on the inner side of the cabinet door. The maintenance
personnel should clean the air filter regularly, preferably once every quarter.
7.4 Replacing the Air Filters
This section describes how to replace a worn-out BSC6900 air filter. It takes about five minutes
to replace an air filter.
BSC6900 GU
Site Maintenance Guide 7 Cleaning and Replacing the Air Filters
Issue 07 (2013-06-28) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
30
7.1 Position of the Air Filters
This section describes the position of the air filters in the BSC6900 cabinet. The air filters are
installed on the inner side of the front and rear doors and at the bottom of the cabinet.
Figure 7-1 shows the position of the air filters in the single-door N68E-22 cabinet. Figure
7-2 shows the position of the air filters in the double-door N68E-22 cabinet.
Figure 7-1 Air filters in the single-door N68E-22 cabinet

BSC6900 GU
Site Maintenance Guide 7 Cleaning and Replacing the Air Filters
Issue 07 (2013-06-28) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
31
Figure 7-2 Air filters in the double-door N68E-22 cabinet

NOTE
The air filter at the bottom of the cabinet is white, and fixed on the rack with screws. The other filters are
black, and fixed on the cabinet with binding strips.
7.2 Cleaning the Air Filter at the Bottom of the N68E-22
Cabinet
This section describes how to clean the air filter at the bottom of the N68E-22 cabinet. The
maintenance personnel should clean the air filter at the bottom of each cabinet regularly,
preferably once every quarter.
BSC6900 GU
Site Maintenance Guide 7 Cleaning and Replacing the Air Filters
Issue 07 (2013-06-28) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
32
Prerequisites
l The tools are ready. They are the ESD wrist strap, Phillips screwdriver, and cotton cloth.
Context
CAUTION
To protect the components from electrostatic discharge, wear an ESD wrist strap properly.
Ensure that the ESD wrist strap is properly connected to the ESD connector on the cabinet. If
no ESD wrist strap or no proper grounding point is available, wear ESD gloves.
Procedure
Step 1 Open the front door of the cabinet and then remove the two screws from the air filter with a
Phillips screwdriver, as shown in Figure 7-3.
Figure 7-3 Removing the air filter from the bottom of the cabinet

Step 2 Hold the panel of the air filter frame with both hands and lift the frame slightly to raise the panel
higher than the screws fixing the grounding cables at the bottom of the cabinet. Then, pull the
frame out of the cabinet slowly and completely.
Step 3 Clean the air filter with the cotton cloth.
BSC6900 GU
Site Maintenance Guide 7 Cleaning and Replacing the Air Filters
Issue 07 (2013-06-28) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
33
CAUTION
Do not clean an air filter with water, which has the risk of damaging the air filter.
Step 4 Insert the clean air filter carefully along the guide rails into the cabinet. Do not push it forcibly.
Step 5 After the air filter is in position, fix the two screws on the air filter frame with a Phillips
screwdriver, as shown in Figure 7-4.
Figure 7-4 Installing the air filter at the bottom of the cabinet

----End
7.3 Cleaning the Air Filter on the Inner Side of the Cabinet
Door
This describes how to clean the air filter on the inner side of the cabinet door. The maintenance
personnel should clean the air filter regularly, preferably once every quarter.
Prerequisites
l The tools are ready. They are the ESD wrist strap and cotton cloth that is dry and clean.
BSC6900 GU
Site Maintenance Guide 7 Cleaning and Replacing the Air Filters
Issue 07 (2013-06-28) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
34
Context
CAUTION
To protect the components from electrostatic discharge, wear an ESD wrist strap properly.
Ensure that the ESD wrist strap is properly connected to the ESD connector on the cabinet. If
no ESD wrist strap or no proper grounding point is available, wear ESD gloves.
Procedure
Step 1 Open the door of the cabinet and strip off the black air filter from the inside of the door.
Step 2 Clean the air filter and the inside metal surface of the door with the clean cotton cloth.
CAUTION
Do not clean an air filter with water, which has the risk of damaging the air filter.
Step 3 Stick the clean air filter along the edges of the inside of the door.
CAUTION
The air filter must be tightly stuck to the binding strips to avoid falling off. If the binding strips
fail to work, replace them with new ones.
----End
7.4 Replacing the Air Filters
This section describes how to replace a worn-out BSC6900 air filter. It takes about five minutes
to replace an air filter.
Prerequisites
l The tools are ready. The tools are the ESD wrist strip and Phillips screwdriver.
l A new air filters for the BSC6900 are ready.
BSC6900 GU
Site Maintenance Guide 7 Cleaning and Replacing the Air Filters
Issue 07 (2013-06-28) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
35
Context
CAUTION
To protect the components from electrostatic discharge, wear an ESD wrist strap properly.
Ensure that the ESD wrist strap is properly connected to the ESD connector on the cabinet. If
no ESD wrist strap or no proper grounding point is available, wear ESD gloves.
Procedure
Step 1 Remove the air filter from the cabinet.
If... Then...
The air filter is installed at the bottom of
the cabinet,
Loosen the retention screws with the Phillips
screwdriver and then remove the air filter.
The air filter is installed on the inner side
of the front door the rear door,
Remove the air filter.
Step 2 Install the new air filter.
If... Then...
The air filter needs to be installed at the
bottom of the N68E-22 cabinet,
Install the air filter in the original position and
fasten the screws with the Phillips screwdriver.
The air filter needs to be installed on the
inner side of the front door the rear door,
Stick the black air filter along the edges of the
inner side of the door. Place the black air filter
along the edges of the inner side of the door.
Ensure that the edges of the air filter are tightly
attached to the black binding strips to prevent it
from falling off.
----End
Follow-up Procedure
Dispose of the replaced air filter properly to prevent environmental pollution.
BSC6900 GU
Site Maintenance Guide 7 Cleaning and Replacing the Air Filters
Issue 07 (2013-06-28) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
36
8 Replacing Boards and Modules
About This Chapter
This chapeter describes how to replace boards of the same hardware version and modules in the
BSC6900 cabinet, which involves replacing the boards and modules, acknowledging a
successful replacement, and handling of the faulty boards. Each section provides an estimated
time for the replacement of the board as a reference.
Context
Based on the board hardware versions before and after the operation, the operation can be divided
into the following two types:
l Replacing a board with a board of the same hardware version, for example, replacing FG2a
board with FG2a board.
l Replacing a board with a board of a later hardware version, for example, replacing FG2a
board with FG2c board.
For details about how to replace a board with a board of the same hardware version, see this
chapeter.
For details about how to replace one board with a board of a later hardware version, contact
Huawei engineers.
Capacity expansion design, board type combination are involved in the replacement operation.
It is highly recommended that contact the Huawei office engineer to replace a board with a board
of a later hardware version.
8.1 Strategy on Replacing Legacy Components in an Upgrade Scenario
This section describes the legacy components that can be used by the BSC6900 after an upgrade.
It also describes the strategy on how to replace the faulty legacy components.
8.2 Procedure for Replacing a Board
This section describes the procedure for replacing a BSC6900 board.
8.3 Replacing an AEUa Board
This section describes how to replace a faulty AEUa board. The AEUa board is hot-swappable.
It takes about eight minutes to replace the board.
8.4 Replacing an AOUa Board
BSC6900 GU
Site Maintenance Guide 8 Replacing Boards and Modules
Issue 07 (2013-06-28) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
37
This section describes how to replace a faulty AOUa board. The AOUa board is hot-swappable.
It takes about five minutes to replace the board.
8.5 Replacing an AOUc Board
This section describes how to replace a faulty AOUc board. The AOUc board is hot-swappable.
It takes about five minutes to replace the board.
8.6 Replacing a DPUa/DPUb/DPUc/DPUd/DPUe/DPUf Board
This section describes how to replace a faulty DPUa/DPUb/DPUc/DPUd/DPUe/DPUf board.
The DPUa/DPUb/DPUc/DPUd/DPUe/DPUf board is hot-swappable. It takes about two minutes
to replace the board.
8.7 Replacing an EIUa Board
This section describes how to replace a faulty EIUa board. The EIUa board is hot-swappable. It
takes about eight minutes to replace an EIUa board.
8.8 Replacing an FG2a Board
This section describes how to replace a faulty FG2a board. The FG2a board is hot swappable.
It takes about five minutes to replace the board.
8.9 Replacing an FG2c Board
This section describes how to replace a faulty FG2c board. The FG2c board is hot-swappable.
It takes about five minutes to replace the board.
8.10 Replacing an FG2d Board
This section describes how to replace a faulty FG2d board. The FG2d board is hot-swappable.
It takes about five minutes to replace the board.
8.11 Replacing a GCUa/GCGa Board
This section describes how to replace a faulty GCUa/GCGa board. The GCUa/GCGa board is
hot-swappable. It takes about five minutes to replace the board.
8.12 Replacing a GOUa Board
This section describes how to replace a faulty GOUa board. The GOUa board is hot-swappable.
It takes about five minutes to replace the board.
8.13 Replacing a GOUc Board
This section describes how to replace a faulty GOUc board. The GOUc board is hot-swappable.
It takes about five minutes to replace the board.
8.14 Replacing a GOUd Board
This section describes how to replace a faulty GOUd board. The GOUd board is hot-swappable.
It takes about five minutes to replace the board.
8.15 Replacing an MDMC Board
This section describes how to replace a faulty MDMC board. The MDMC board is hot-
swappable. It takes about ten minutes to replace the board.
8.16 Replacing a NIUa Board
This section describes how to replace a faulty NIUa board. The NIUa board is hot-swappable.
It takes about two minutes to replace the board.
8.17 Replacing an OIUa Board
This section describes how to replace a faulty OIUa board. The OIUa board is hot-swappable.
It takes about five minutes to replace the board.
8.18 Replacing an OMU Board
This section describes how to replace an OMU board. A faulty OMU board needs to be replaced
to prevent data from being lost when OMU operation and maintenance are interrupted due to
BSC6900 GU
Site Maintenance Guide 8 Replacing Boards and Modules
Issue 07 (2013-06-28) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
38
disconnection between the OMU and host boards. For details about how to replace an OMU
board for other purposes, also see this section.
8.19 Replacing a PAMU Board
This section describes how to replace a faulty PAMU board. The PAMU board is hot-swappable.
It takes about ten minutes to replace the board.
8.20 Replacing a PEUa Board
This section describes how to replace a faulty PEUa board. The PEUa board is hot-swappable.
It takes about eight minutes to replace a PEUa board.
8.21 Replacing a POUa Board
This section describes how to replace a faulty POUa board. The POUa board is hot-swappable.
It takes about five minutes to replace the board.
8.22 Replacing a POUc Board
This section describes how to replace a faulty POUc board. The POUc board is hot-swappable.
It takes about five minutes to replace the board.
8.23 Replace an SAUa/SAUc Board
This section describes how to replace a faulty SAUa/SAUc board. The SAUa/SAUc board is
hot-swappable. It takes about 16 minutes to replace the SAUa/SAUc board.
8.24 Replacing an SCUa/SCUb Board
This section describes how to replace a faulty SCUa/SCUb board. The SCUa/SCUb board is
hot-swappable. It takes about four minutes to replace the board.
8.25 Replacing a TNUa Board
This section describes how to replace a faulty TNUa board. The TNUa board is hot-swappable.
It takes about four minutes to replace the board.
8.26 Replacing a UOIa Board
This section describes how to replace a faulty UOIa board. The UOIa board is hot swappable.
It takes about five minutes to replace the board.
8.27 Replacing a UOIc Board
This section describes how to replace a faulty UOIc board. The UOIc board is hot-swappable.
It takes about five minutes to replace the board.
8.28 Replacing an XPUa/SPUa Board
This section describes how to replace a faulty XPUa/SPUa board. The XPUa/SPUa board is hot-
swappable. It takes about six minutes to replace and load a board.
8.29 Replacing an XPUb/SPUb Board
This section describes how to replace a faulty XPUb/SPUb board. The XPUb/SPUb board is
hot-swappable. It takes about six minutes to replace and load a board.
8.30 Replacing a WOPB Board
This section describes how to replace a faulty WOPB board. The WOPB board is hot-swappable.
It takes about ten minutes to replace the board.
8.31 Replacing a Subrack
This section describes how to replace a faulty BSC6900 subrack with a new BSC6900 subrack.
After 60 minutes from cutting off the power supply of a faulty subrack, a new subrack will start
working properly.
8.32 Replacing the Independent Fan Subrack
When an independent fan subrack in the BSC6900 is faulty, the independent fan subrack must
be replaced. It takes about 15 minutes to replace an independent fan subrack.
BSC6900 GU
Site Maintenance Guide 8 Replacing Boards and Modules
Issue 07 (2013-06-28) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
39
8.33 Replacing the Power Distribution Box
This section describes how to replace a faulty power distribution box. It takes about 25 minutes
to replace a power distribution box.
8.34 Replacing the Fan Box
When a fan box in the service subrack or in the independent fan subrack is faulty, the fan box
must be replaced. You should finish the replacement of the fan box in less than one minute.
8.35 Replacing the Pluggable Optical Module
This section describes how to replace a pluggable optical module when the module is faulty.
8.36 Replacing an Optical Splitter/Combiner
This section describes how to replace an optical splitter/combiner. The BSC6900 optical
splitters/combiners are LC/LC-LC single-mode optical splitter/combiner and LC/LC-LC multi-
mode optical splitter/combiner. It takes about five minutes to replace an optical splitter/
combiner.
8.37 Replacing the KVM
This section describes how to replace a faulty KVM. It takes about 10 minutes to replace a KVM.
8.38 Replacing the LAN Switch
This section describes how to replace a faulty LAN switch. It takes about 10 minutes to replace
a LAN switch.
8.39 Replacing the GBAM
This section describes how to replace a faulty GBAM. It takes about 40 minutes to replace a
GBAM. There are three models of GBAM, namely, IBM X3650T, C5210, and HP CC3310.
BSC6900 GU
Site Maintenance Guide 8 Replacing Boards and Modules
Issue 07 (2013-06-28) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
40
8.1 Strategy on Replacing Legacy Components in an
Upgrade Scenario
This section describes the legacy components that can be used by the BSC6900 after an upgrade.
It also describes the strategy on how to replace the faulty legacy components.
Table 8-1 describes the strategy on how to replace the faulty legacy components of the
BSC6900.
Table 8-1 Strategy on replacing faulty legacy components of the BSC6900
Legacy Component With Spare Part Without Spare Part
OMUb board Replace the faulty OMUb
board with the spare OMUb
board. For details, see 8.18
Replacing an OMU Board.
Replace the faulty OMUb
board with the spare OMUa
board. For details on how to
replace an OMUb board with
an OMUa board, see 8.18
Replacing an OMU Board.
DPUa board Replace the faulty DPUa
board with the spare DPUa
board. For details, see 8.6
Replacing a DPUa/DPUb/
DPUc/DPUd/DPUe/DPUf
Board.
Replace the faulty DPUa
board with the spare DPUc
board. For details on how to
replace a DPUa board with a
DPUc board, see 8.6
Replacing a DPUa/DPUb/
DPUc/DPUd/DPUe/DPUf
Board.
GBAM/LAN switch Replace the faulty GBAM/
LAN switch with the spare
GBAM/LAN switch. For
details, see 8.39 Replacing
the GBAM and 8.38
Replacing the LAN Switch.
Replace the faulty GBAM
with the spare OMUa board.
For details on how to replace
the GBAM with an OMUa
board, see 8.39 Replacing
the GBAM.
Common power distribution
box
Replace the faulty power
distribution box with the
spare power distribution box.
For details, see 8.33
Replacing the Power
Distribution Box.
Contact Huawei engineers.

8.2 Procedure for Replacing a Board
This section describes the procedure for replacing a BSC6900 board.
8.2.1 Removing a Board
This section describes how to remove a BSC6900 board.
BSC6900 GU
Site Maintenance Guide 8 Replacing Boards and Modules
Issue 07 (2013-06-28) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
41
Prerequisites
The tools are ready, including the ESD wrist strap, Phillips screwdriver, ESD box or bag, dustfree
cotton cloth, and fiber cleaner.
Context
All the boards in the BSC6900 cabinet, except the OMUa board, are hot-swappable. For other
principles of removing a board, see Precautions on Board Operation.
CAUTION
l The OMUa board can be hot-swappable only after the operating system is shut down.
l To protect the components from electrostatic discharge, wear an ESD wrist strap properly.
Ensure that the ESD wrist strap is properly connected to the ESD connector on the cabinet.
If no ESD wrist strap or no proper grounding point is available, wear ESD gloves.
Procedure
l Removing a board (configuring the new ejector levers)
1. Loosen the fastening screws on the board panel counterclockwise. Ensure that the
screws are fully detached from the subrack, as shown in parts A of Figure 8-1
BSC6900 GU
Site Maintenance Guide 8 Replacing Boards and Modules
Issue 07 (2013-06-28) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
42
Figure 8-1 Removing a board (configuring the new ejector levers)

2. Press and hold the two locking buttons and turn the ejector levers on the board panels,
as shown in part B of Figure 8-1. The board is detached from the backplane, as shown
in part C of Figure 8-1.
3. Hold the two ejector levers and pull the board along the guide rails, as shown in part
C of Figure 8-1.
CAUTION
Pull the board steadily without shaking the board to avoid damaging the pins on the
backplane or the board connector.
4. Pull the board out of the subrack by pulling the upper ejector lever on the front panel
with one hand and holding the bottom of the board by the other.
5. Put the removed board in an ESD case or bag.
BSC6900 GU
Site Maintenance Guide 8 Replacing Boards and Modules
Issue 07 (2013-06-28) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
43
CAUTION
While removing a board, do not touch the PCB or any other devices except for jumpers
and DIP switches.
l Removing a board (configuring the old ejector levers)
1. Loosen the fastening screws on the board panel counterclockwise. Ensure that the
screws are fully detached from the subrack, as shown in parts A of Figure 8-2.
Figure 8-2 Removing a board (configuring the old ejector levers)

2. Press the self-locking spring on the two ejector levers on the board panel, and at the
same time, turn the two ejector levers outwards, as shown in part B of Figure 8-2.
The board is detached from the backplane, as shown in part C of Figure 8-2.
3. Hold the two ejector levers and pull the board along the guide rails, as shown in part
C of Figure 8-2.
CAUTION
Pull the board steadily without shaking the board to avoid damaging the pins on the
backplane or the board connector.
4. Pull the board out of the subrack by pulling the upper ejector lever on the front panel
with one hand and holding the bottom of the board by the other.
5. Put the removed board in an ESD case or bag.
BSC6900 GU
Site Maintenance Guide 8 Replacing Boards and Modules
Issue 07 (2013-06-28) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
44
CAUTION
While removing a board, do not touch the PCB or any other devices except for jumpers
and DIP switches.
----End
8.2.2 Inserting a Board
This section describes how to insert a BSC6900 board into the subrack.
Prerequisites
l The tools are ready, including the ESD wrist strap, Phillips screwdriver, and ESD box or
bag.
l A new board is ready and the DIP switches are correctly set.
Context
CAUTION
l You are required to wear an ESD Wrist Strap and plug the ESD wrist strap into the ESD
connector of the cabinet before inserting a board.
l While inserting a board, do not touch the PCB or any other devices except the jumpers and
DIP switches with your bare hands.
For other principles of installing a BSC6900 board, see Precautions on Board Operation.
Procedure
l Inserting a Board (configuring the new ejector levers)
1. Take the new board out of the ESD box. Then, check the pins and the sockets of the
board.
If there is any missing or broken pin, any bent ping or socket, contact Huawei engineers
for replacement.
2. Press and hold the two locking buttons and turn the ejector levers on the board panels,
as shown in parts A of Figure 8-3. Turn the ejector lever into the position, as shown
in part B of Figure 8-3.
BSC6900 GU
Site Maintenance Guide 8 Replacing Boards and Modules
Issue 07 (2013-06-28) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
45
Figure 8-3 Installing a BSC6900 board (configuring the new ejector levers)

3. Hold the panel with one hand and the lower edge of the board with the other hand,
and then push the board into the subrack along the guide rails until the ejector levers
are half closed.
CAUTION
Push in the board slowly and steadily to avoid damage to the pins on the backplane
and the metal piece on the board.
4. Lower the ejector levers of the OMU board until they are in position, as shown in part
C of Figure 8-3.
5. Secure the screws on the OMU board, as shown in part D of Figure 8-3.
NOTE
You need to push the screws inwards to secure the screws into the holes on the subrack.
l Inserting a Board (configuring the old ejector levers)
1. Take the new board out of the ESD box. Then, check the pins and the sockets of the
board.
If there is any missing or broken pin, any bent ping or socket, contact Huawei engineers
for replacement.
2. Press the latch and turn the ejector lever outwards, as shown in parts A of Figure
8-4. Turn the ejector lever into the position, as shown in part B of Figure 8-4.
BSC6900 GU
Site Maintenance Guide 8 Replacing Boards and Modules
Issue 07 (2013-06-28) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
46
Figure 8-4 Installing a BSC6900 board (configuring the old ejector levers)

3. Hold the panel with one hand and the lower edge of the board with the other hand,
and then push the board into the subrack along the guide rails until the ejector levers
are half closed.
CAUTION
Push in the board slowly and steadily to avoid damage to the pins on the backplane
and the metal piece on the board.
4. Lower the ejector levers of the OMU board until they are in position, as shown in part
C of Figure 8-4.
5. Secure the screws on the OMU board, as shown in part D of or Figure 8-4.
NOTE
You need to push the screws inwards to secure the screws into the holes on the subrack.
----End
8.3 Replacing an AEUa Board
This section describes how to replace a faulty AEUa board. The AEUa board is hot-swappable.
It takes about eight minutes to replace the board.
BSC6900 GU
Site Maintenance Guide 8 Replacing Boards and Modules
Issue 07 (2013-06-28) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
47
Prerequisites
l The tools are ready. The tools are the ESD wrist strap, Phillips screwdriver, and ESD box
or bag.
l A new AEUa board is ready.
l The LMT is started and communicates with the OMU properly.
Context
CAUTION
l To avoid damage to the boards, ASIC chips, or other electronic components, wear an ESD
wrist strap properly. Ensure that the ESD wrist strap is properly connected to the ESD
connector on the cabinet. If no ESD wrist strap or no proper grounding point is available,
wear ESD gloves.
l Replacing the standby AEUa has no adverse effect on the system. When no standby AEUa
is in position, replacing the board disrupts services carried on this board.
l If the BSC6900 and its peer equipment are connected only through the AEUa board, the
ongoing services between the BSC6900 and its peer equipment are disrupted when you
replace the AEUa board.
Procedure
Step 1 Run the LST SUBRACK command to query the backup status of the AEUa board to be replaced.
If... Then...
Backup type is Backup, Go to Step 2.
Backup type is No backup, Go to Step 3.
NOTE
If two BSC6900 boards work in backup mode, the boards must be installed in an even-numbered slot and
in the slot numbered with that value plus 1. For example, if the board that is installed in slot 14 does not
work in backup mode, the board that is installed in slot 15 does not work in backup mode either.
Step 2 Run the DSP BRD command to query the status of the board to be replaced.
If... Then...
CPU status is Active normal,
1. Run SWP BRD to switch the board over to
standby.
2. Go to Step 3.
CAUTION
Run this command when the traffic is light, for instance,
at midnight.
BSC6900 GU
Site Maintenance Guide 8 Replacing Boards and Modules
Issue 07 (2013-06-28) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
48
If... Then...
The parameter is of any other values, Go to Step 3.
Step 3 Check whether the labels on the E1/T1 cable and clock cable (if configured) connected to the
AEUa are legible. If the labels are illegible, attach a new label to the cables to avoid improper
connection after the board is replaced.
Step 4 Disconnect the clock cable (if configured). Loosen the captive screws from the E1/T1 cable
connector with a flat-head screwdriver and disconnect the E1/T1 cable.
Step 5 Remove the board to be replaced by referring to 8.2.1 Removing a Board.
Step 6 Check whether the settings of the DIP Switches on the AEUa Board of the standby board are
correct.
If... Then...
The settings are correct, Go to Step 7.
The settings are incorrect,
1. Set the DIP switches correctly.
2. Go to Step 7.
Step 7 Insert the new board into the subrack by referring to 8.2.2 Inserting a Board.
The new board automatically loads program and configuration data, and the RUN LED blinks
every other 0.125s.
Step 8 Connect the E1/T1 cable and clock cable by referring to the labels.
Step 9 If the RUN LED blinks every other second, run DSP BRD to query the status of the new board.
If... Then...
CPU status is Active normal or Standby normal, Go to Step 11.
The parameter is of any other values, Go to Step 10.
Step 10 Check whether a board failure alarm is reported on the LMT.
If... Then...
Alarms caused by a faulty board are
reported,
1. Locate and rectify the fault according to the
alarm help information.
2. Go to Step 9.
No alarms caused by the faulty board are
reported,
Go to Step 11.
Step 11 Run the CMP BRDVER command to check whether the software version of the new board is
consistent with the board version matching table.
BSC6900 GU
Site Maintenance Guide 8 Replacing Boards and Modules
Issue 07 (2013-06-28) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
49
If... Then...
The board version is consistent with the
board version matching table,
Go to Step 12.
The board version is inconsistent with the
board version matching table,
1. Ensure that the program files of the board in
the OMU active workspace installation\bin
\fam on the OMU are correct. If the program
files are incorrect, contact Huawei
engineers.
2. Run RST BRD to reset the board.
3. Go to Step 9.
NOTE
You can obtain the correct board version matching table from the version matching documents.
Step 12 Verify this board is functioning correctly by testing the CS services with dialing and PS services
with web browsing.
----End
Follow-up Procedure
Record the name and the bar code of the replaced board. Check whether there are obvious
physical damages, such as the distorted pin, broken pin, or burnt board. If there is any damage,
fill in BSC6900 Site Maintenance Record Form and pack the replaced board. When packing
a board, pay attention to the following points:
l Wear an ESD wrist strap or a pair of ESD gloves.
l Ensure that each ESD bag or case holds only one board.
l When packing multiple boards, isolate them with ESD materials.
Contact the local Huawei office to dispose of the replaced board.
NOTE
You may obtain the name and the PCB version from the panel or bottom of the faulty board.
8.4 Replacing an AOUa Board
This section describes how to replace a faulty AOUa board. The AOUa board is hot-swappable.
It takes about five minutes to replace the board.
Prerequisites
l The tools are ready. The tools are the ESD wrist strap, Phillips screwdriver, flat-head
screwdriver, ESD box or bag, dustfree cotton cloth, and fiber cleaner.
l A new AOUa board is ready.
l The LMT is started and communicates with the OMU properly.
BSC6900 GU
Site Maintenance Guide 8 Replacing Boards and Modules
Issue 07 (2013-06-28) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
50
Context
CAUTION
l To avoid damage to the boards, ASIC chips, or other electronic components, wear an ESD
wrist strap properly. Ensure that the ESD wrist strap is properly connected to the ESD
connector on the cabinet. If no ESD wrist strap or no proper grounding point is available,
wear ESD gloves.
l Replacing the standby AOUa has no adverse effect on the system. If no standby AOUa is in
position, replacing the board disrupts services carried on this board.
l If the BSC6900 and its peer equipment are connected only through the AOUa board, the
ongoing services between the BSC6900 and its peer equipment are disrupted when you
replace the AOUa board.
Procedure
Step 1 Run the LST SUBRACK command to query the backup status of the AOUa board to be replaced.
If... Then...
Backup type is Backup, Go to Step 2.
Backup type is No backup, Go to Step 4.
NOTE
If two BSC6900 boards work in backup mode, the boards must be installed in an even-numbered slot and
in the slot numbered with that value plus 1. For example, if the board that is installed in slot 14 does not
work in backup mode, the board that is installed in slot 15 does not work in backup mode either.
Step 2 Run the DSP BRD command to query the status of the board to be replaced.
If... Then...
CPU status is Normal,
1. Run SWP BRD to switch the board over to
standby.
2. Go to Step 3.
CAUTION
Run this command when the traffic is light, for instance,
at midnight.
The parameter is of any other values, Go to Step 3.
Step 3 Run the DSP OPT command to query the backup status of all the optical ports on the AOUa
board to be replaced.
BSC6900 GU
Site Maintenance Guide 8 Replacing Boards and Modules
Issue 07 (2013-06-28) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
51
If... Then...
The optical port is standby, Go to Step 4.
The optical port is active,
1. Run the SET MSPCMD command to switch the active port
over to standby status. Set MSP Control Command to MS
(Manual Switchover from working link to protection
link).
2. Go to Step 4.
Step 4 Check whether the labels on the optical cable and clock cable (if configured) connected to the
AOUa are legible. If the labels are illegible, attach a new label to the cables to avoid improper
connection after the board is replaced.
Step 5 Remove the clock cable.
Step 6 Remove the optical cable and cap the connectors. If the connectors are dirty, clean them with
the dustfree cotton cloth or the fiber cleaner.
Step 7 Remove the board by referring to 8.2.1 Removing a Board and cap the optical ports.
Step 8 Check whether the settings of the DIP Switches on the AOUa Board of the standby board are
correct.
If... Then...
The settings are correct, Go to Step 9.
The settings are incorrect,
1. Set the DIP switches correctly.
2. Go to Step 9.
Step 9 Insert the new board into the subrack by referring to 8.2.2 Inserting a Board.
The new board automatically loads program and configuration data, and the RUN LED blinks
every other 0.125s.
Step 10 Remove the caps from optical ports and connectors, and reserve them for later use. Then, install
the optical cables by referring to the labels.
Step 11 Install the clock cable (if configured) by referring to the labels.
Step 12 If the RUN LED blinks every other second, run DSP BRD to query the status of the new board.
If... Then...
CPU status is Active normal or Standby normal, Go to Step 14.
The parameter is of any other values, Go to Step 13.
Step 13 Check whether a board failure alarm is reported on the BSC6900 LMT.
BSC6900 GU
Site Maintenance Guide 8 Replacing Boards and Modules
Issue 07 (2013-06-28) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
52
If... Then...
Alarms caused by a faulty board are
reported,
1. Locate and rectify the fault according to the
alarm help information.
2. Go to Step 12.
No alarms caused by the faulty board are
reported,
Go to Step 14.
Step 14 Run the CMP BRDVER command to check whether the software version of the new board is
consistent with the board version matching table.
If... Then...
The board version is consistent with the
board version matching table,
Go to Step 15.
The board version is inconsistent with the
board version matching table,
1. Ensure that the program files of the board in
the OMU active workspace installation\bin
\fam on the OMU are correct. If the program
files are incorrect, contact Huawei
engineers.
2. Run RST BRD to reset the board.
3. Go to Step 12.
NOTE
You can obtain the correct board version matching table from the version matching documents.
Step 15 Verify this board is functioning correctly by testing the CS services with dialing and PS services
with web browsing.
----End
Follow-up Procedure
Record the name and the bar code of the replaced board. Check whether there are obvious
physical damages, such as the distorted pin, broken pin, or burnt board. If there is any damage,
fill in BSC6900 Site Maintenance Record Form and pack the replaced board. When packing
a board, pay attention to the following points:
l Wear an ESD wrist strap or a pair of ESD gloves.
l Ensure that each ESD bag or case holds only one board.
l When packing multiple boards, isolate them with ESD materials.
Contact the local Huawei office to dispose of the replaced board.
NOTE
You may obtain the name and the PCB version from the panel or bottom of the faulty board.
BSC6900 GU
Site Maintenance Guide 8 Replacing Boards and Modules
Issue 07 (2013-06-28) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
53
8.5 Replacing an AOUc Board
This section describes how to replace a faulty AOUc board. The AOUc board is hot-swappable.
It takes about five minutes to replace the board.
Prerequisites
l The tools are ready. The tools are the ESD wrist strap, Phillips screwdriver, flat-head
screwdriver, ESD box or bag, dustfree cotton cloth, and fiber cleaner.
l A new AOUc board is ready.
l The LMT is started and communicates with the OMU properly.
Context
CAUTION
l To avoid damage to the boards, ASIC chips, or other electronic components, wear an ESD
wrist strap properly. Ensure that the ESD wrist strap is properly connected to the ESD
connector on the cabinet. If no ESD wrist strap or no proper grounding point is available,
wear ESD gloves.
l Replacing the standby AOUc has no adverse effect on the system. Replacing the AOUc board
that works independently, however, disrupts services carried on the board.
l If the BSC6900 and its peer equipment are connected only through the AOUc board, the
ongoing services between the BSC6900 and its peer equipment are disrupted when you
replace the AOUc board.
Procedure
Step 1 Run the LST SUBRACK command to query the backup status of the AOUc board to be replaced.
If... Then...
Backup type is Backup, Go to Step 2.
Backup type is No backup, Go to Step 4.
NOTE
If two BSC6900 boards work in backup mode, the boards must be installed in an even-numbered slot and
in the slot numbered with that value plus 1. For example, if the board that is installed in slot 14 does not
work in backup mode, the board that is installed in slot 15 does not work in backup mode either.
Step 2 Run the DSP BRD command to query the status of the board to be replaced.
BSC6900 GU
Site Maintenance Guide 8 Replacing Boards and Modules
Issue 07 (2013-06-28) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
54
If... Then...
CPU status is Normal,
1. Run the SWP BRD command to switch the board
to standby status.
2. Go to Step 3.
CAUTION
Run this command in low traffic hours, for instance, at
midnight.
The parameter is of any other values, Go to Step 3.
Step 3 Run the DSP OPT command to query the backup status of all the optical ports on the AOUc
board to be replaced.
If... Then...
The optical port is standby, Go to Step 4.
The optical port is active,
1. Run the SET MSPCMD command to switch the active port
to standby status. Set MSP Control Command to MS
(Manual Switchover from working link to protection
link).
2. Go to Step 4.
Step 4 Check whether the labels on the optical cable and clock cable (if configured) connected to the
AOUc are legible. If the labels are illegible, attach a new label to the cables to avoid improper
connection after the board is replaced.
Step 5 Remove the clock cable.
Step 6 Remove the optical cable and cap the connectors. If the connectors are dirty, clean them with
dustfree cotton cloth or fiber cleaner.
Step 7 Remove the board by referring to 8.2.1 Removing a Board and cap the optical ports.
Step 8 Insert the new board into the subrack by referring to 8.2.2 Inserting a Board.
The new board automatically loads program and configuration data, and the RUN LED blinks
every other 0.125s.
Step 9 Remove the caps from optical ports and connectors, and keep them for later use. Then, install
the optical cables by referring to the labels.
Step 10 Install the clock cable (if configured) by referring to the labels.
Step 11 If the RUN LED blinks every other second, run the DSP BRD command to query the status of
the new board.
If... Then...
CPU status is Active normal or Standby normal, Go to Step 13.
BSC6900 GU
Site Maintenance Guide 8 Replacing Boards and Modules
Issue 07 (2013-06-28) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
55
If... Then...
The parameter is of any other values, Go to Step 12.
Step 12 Check whether a board failure alarm is reported on the LMT.
If... Then...
Alarms caused by a faulty board are
reported,
1. Locate and rectify the fault according to the
alarm help information.
2. Go to Step 11.
No alarms caused by the faulty board are
reported,
Go to Step 13.
Step 13 Run the CMP BRDVER command to check whether the software version of the new board is
consistent with the board version matching table.
If... Then...
The board version is consistent with the
board version matching table,
Go to Step 14.
The board version is inconsistent with the
board version matching table,
1. Ensure that the program files of the board in
the OMU active workspace installation\bin
\fam on the OMU are correct. If the program
files are incorrect, contact Huawei
engineers.
2. Run the RST BRD command to reset the
board.
3. Go to Step 11.
NOTE
You can obtain the correct board version matching table from the version matching documents.
Step 14 Verify this board is functioning correctly by testing the CS services with dialing and PS services
with web browsing.
----End
Follow-up Procedure
Record the name and the bar code of the replaced board. Check whether there are obvious
physical damages, such as the distorted pin, broken pin, or burnt board. If there is any damage,
fill in BSC6900 Site Maintenance Record Form and pack the replaced board. When packing
a board, pay attention to the following points:
l Wear an ESD wrist strap or a pair of ESD gloves.
l Ensure that each ESD bag or case holds only one board.
BSC6900 GU
Site Maintenance Guide 8 Replacing Boards and Modules
Issue 07 (2013-06-28) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
56
l When packing multiple boards, isolate them with ESD materials.
Contact the local Huawei office to dispose of the replaced board.
NOTE
You may obtain the name and the PCB version from the panel or bottom of the faulty board.
8.6 Replacing a DPUa/DPUb/DPUc/DPUd/DPUe/DPUf
Board
This section describes how to replace a faulty DPUa/DPUb/DPUc/DPUd/DPUe/DPUf board.
The DPUa/DPUb/DPUc/DPUd/DPUe/DPUf board is hot-swappable. It takes about two minutes
to replace the board.
Prerequisites
l The tools are ready. The tools are the ESD wrist strap, Phillips screwdriver, and ESD box
or bag.
l A new DPUa/DPUb/DPUc/DPUd/DPUe/DPUf board is ready.
l The LMT is started and communicates with the OMU properly.
Context
CAUTION
l To avoid damage to the boards, ASIC chips, or other electronic components, wear an ESD
wrist strap properly. Ensure that the ESD wrist strap is properly connected to the ESD
connector on the cabinet. If no ESD wrist strap or no proper grounding point is available,
wear ESD gloves.
l It is recommended that you need to use the same board type to replace the old board. To use
a board of the different version to replace the board (for example, use a board of version a
to replace a board of version b), contact Huawei for technical support.
CAUTION
Replacing the DPUa/DPUc/DPUd/DPUf board disrupts all the services carried on the board. In
the process of replacing the DPUb/DPUe board, logically inhibiting the board does not disrupt
the services carried on the dedicated channels. Removing the board, however, disrupts all the
services carried on the board.
Procedure
Step 1 Run the LST SUBRACK command to query the inhibited status of the board.
BSC6900 GU
Site Maintenance Guide 8 Replacing Boards and Modules
Issue 07 (2013-06-28) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
57
If... Then...
Logical inhibited board or Physical
inhibited board includes the DPUa/
DPUb/DPUc/DPUd/DPUe/DPUf board
to be replaced.
Go to Step 2.
Logical inhibited board or Physical
inhibited board does not include the
DPUa/DPUb/DPUc/DPUd/DPUe/DPUf
board to be replaced.
1. Run the INH BRD command to physically
inhibit the board.
2. Go to Step 2.
NOTE
Physically inhibiting the DPUa/DPUb/DPUc/DPUd/
DPUe/DPUf board prevents new accesses from the
board and reduces the impact of replacing the board
on the BSC6900 operation.
Step 2 Remove the DPUa/DPUb/DPUc/DPUd/DPUe/DPUf board to be replaced by referring to 8.2.1
Removing a Board.
Step 3 Insert the new board into the subrack by referring to 8.2.2 Inserting a Board.
Step 4 Run the UIN BRD command to unblock the new board.
The new board automatically loads program and configuration data, and the RUN LED blinks
every alternate 0.125s.
Step 5 Run the DSP BRD command to query the status of the new board.
If... Then...
CPU status is Normal, Go to Step 7.
CPU status is not Normal, Go to Step 6.
Step 6 Check whether a board failure alarm is reported on the LMT.
If... Then...
Alarms caused by a faulty board are
reported,
1. Identify and rectify the fault according to the
alarm information.
2. Go to Step 5.
No alarms caused by the faulty board are
reported,
Go to Step 7.
Step 7 Run the CMP BRDVER command to check whether the software version of the new board is
consistent with the board version matching table.
BSC6900 GU
Site Maintenance Guide 8 Replacing Boards and Modules
Issue 07 (2013-06-28) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
58
If... Then...
The board version is consistent with the
board version matching table,
Go to Step 8.
The board version is inconsistent with the
board version matching table,
1. Ensure that the program files of the board in
the OMU active workspace installation\bin
\fam on the OMU are correct. If the program
files are incorrect, contact Huawei
engineers.
2. Run the RST BRD command to reset the
board.
3. Go to Step 5.
NOTE
You can obtain the correct board version matching table from the version matching documents.
Step 8 Test the CS services by dialing and the PS services by browsing web pages to ensure that the
new board is functional.
----End
Follow-up Procedure
Record the name and the bar code of the replaced board. Check whether there are obvious
physical damages, such as the distorted pin, broken pin, or burnt board. If there is any damage,
fill in BSC6900 Site Maintenance Record Form and pack the replaced board. When packing
a board, pay attention to the following points:
l Wear an ESD wrist strap or a pair of ESD gloves.
l Ensure that each ESD bag or case holds only one board.
l When packing multiple boards, isolate them with ESD materials.
Contact the local Huawei office to dispose of the replaced board.
NOTE
You may obtain the name and the PCB version from the panel or bottom of the faulty board.
8.7 Replacing an EIUa Board
This section describes how to replace a faulty EIUa board. The EIUa board is hot-swappable. It
takes about eight minutes to replace an EIUa board.
Prerequisites
l The tools are ready. The tools are the ESD wrist strap, Phillips screwdriver, flat-head
screwdriver, and ESD box or bag.
l A new EIUa board is ready.
l The LMT is started and communicates with the OMU properly.
BSC6900 GU
Site Maintenance Guide 8 Replacing Boards and Modules
Issue 07 (2013-06-28) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
59
Context
CAUTION
l To avoid damage to the boards, ASIC chips, or other electronic components, wear an ESD
wrist strap properly. Ensure that the ESD wrist strap is properly connected to the ESD
connector on the cabinet. If no ESD wrist strap or no proper grounding point is available,
wear ESD gloves.
l It is recommended that you need to use the same board type to replace the old board. To use
a board of the different version to replace the board (for example, use a board of version a
to replace a board of version b), contact Huawei for technical support.
CAUTION
l Replacing the standby EIUa has no adverse impact on the system. Replacing the EIUa board
that works independently, however, disrupts services carried on this board.
l If the BSC6900 and its peer equipment are connected through only the EIUa board, the
ongoing services between the BSC6900 and its peer equipment are disrupted when you
replace the EIUa board.
Procedure
Step 1 Run the LST SUBRACK command to query the backup status of the EIUa board to be replaced.
If... Then...
Backup type is Backup, Go to Step 2.
Backup type is No backup, Go to Step 3.
NOTE
If two BSC6900 boards work in backup mode, the boards must be installed in an even-numbered slot and
in the slot numbered with that value plus 1. For example, if the board that is installed in slot 14 does not
work in backup mode, the board that is installed in slot 15 does not work in backup mode either.
Step 2 Run the DSP BRD command to query the status of the board to be replaced.
BSC6900 GU
Site Maintenance Guide 8 Replacing Boards and Modules
Issue 07 (2013-06-28) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
60
If... Then...
CPU status is Active normal,
1. Run the SWP BRD command to switch the board
over to standby status.
2. Go to Step 3.
CAUTION
Run this command when the traffic is light, for instance,
at midnight.
The parameter is of any other values, Go to Step 3.
Step 3 Check whether the labels on the E1/T1 cable and clock cable (if configured) connected to the
EIUa are legible. If the labels are illegible, attach a new label to the cables to avoid improper
connection after the board is replaced.
Step 4 Disconnect the clock cable. Loosen the captive screws from the E1/T1 cable connector with a
flat-head screwdriver and disconnect the E1/T1 cable.
Step 5 Remove the board to be replaced by referring to 8.2.1 Removing a Board.
Step 6 Check whether the settings of the DIP Switches on the EIUa Board of the standby board are
correct.
If... Then...
The settings are correct, Go to Step 7.
The settings are incorrect,
1. Set the DIP switches correctly.
2. Go to Step 7.
Step 7 Install the new board into the subrack by referring to 8.2.2 Inserting a Board.
The new board automatically loads program and configuration data, and the RUN LED blinks
every other 0.125s.
Step 8 Install the cables for the board.
If... Then...
The E1/T1 cables are connected to the
board,
Insert the E1/T1 connector into the socket on
the board, and use a Phillips screwdriver to
tighten the screws on the E1/T1 connector.
The 75-ohm clock cables are connected to
the board,
Insert the clock cables.
Step 9 If the RUN LED blinks every other second, run DSP BRD to query the status of the new board.
BSC6900 GU
Site Maintenance Guide 8 Replacing Boards and Modules
Issue 07 (2013-06-28) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
61
If... Then...
CPU status is Active normal or Standby normal, Go to Step 11.
The parameter is of any other values, Go to Step 10.
Step 10 Check whether a board failure alarm is reported on the BSC6900 LMT.
If... Then...
Alarms caused by a faulty board are
reported,
1. Locate and rectify the fault according to the
alarm help information.
2. Go to Step 9.
No alarms caused by the faulty board are
reported,
Go to Step 11.
Step 11 Run the CMP BRDVER command to check whether the software version of the new board is
consistent with the board version matching table.
If... Then...
The board version is consistent with the
board version matching table,
Go to Step 12.
The board version is inconsistent with the
board version matching table,
1. Ensure that the program files of the board in
the OMU active workspace installation\bin
\fam on the OMU are correct. If the program
files are incorrect, contact Huawei
engineers.
2. Run RST BRD to reset the board.
3. Go to Step 9.
NOTE
You can obtain the correct board version matching table from the version matching documents.
Step 12 Verify this board is functioning correctly by testing the CS services with dialing and PS services
with web browsing.
----End
Follow-up Procedure
Record the name and the bar code of the replaced board. Check whether there are obvious
physical damages, such as the distorted pin, broken pin, or burnt board. If there is any damage,
fill in BSC6900 Site Maintenance Record Form and pack the replaced board. When packing
a board, pay attention to the following points:
l Wear an ESD wrist strap or a pair of ESD gloves.
BSC6900 GU
Site Maintenance Guide 8 Replacing Boards and Modules
Issue 07 (2013-06-28) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
62
l Ensure that each ESD bag or case holds only one board.
l When packing multiple boards, isolate them with ESD materials.
Contact the local Huawei office to dispose of the replaced board.
NOTE
You may obtain the name and the PCB version from the panel or bottom of the faulty board.
8.8 Replacing an FG2a Board
This section describes how to replace a faulty FG2a board. The FG2a board is hot swappable.
It takes about five minutes to replace the board.
Prerequisites
l The tools are ready. The tools are the ESD wrist strap, Phillips screwdriver, flat-head
screwdriver, and ESD box or bag.
l A new FG2a board is ready.
l The LMT is started and communicates with the OMU properly.
Context
CAUTION
l To avoid damage to the boards, ASIC chips, or other electronic components, wear an ESD
wrist strap properly. Ensure that the ESD wrist strap is properly connected to the ESD
connector on the cabinet. If no ESD wrist strap or no proper grounding point is available,
wear ESD gloves.
l It is recommended that you need to use the same board type to replace the old board. To use
a board of the different version to replace the board (for example, use a board of version a
to replace a board of version b), contact Huawei for technical support.
CAUTION
l If the FG2a board is standby and the data over the port on the FG2a board are backed up,
replacing the standby FG2a board has no adverse effect on the system.
l When the FG2a boards work in board backup mode and the ports work in load sharing mode,
replacing the standby FG2a board disrupts part of services if the traffic over the ports exceeds
the bandwidth of the ports on the active board. When the FG2a boards work in board backup
mode with independent ports, replacing the standby FG2a board disrupts all the services
carried on the standby board.
l Replacing an FG2a board that works independently disrupts all the services on the board.
l If the BSC6900 and its peer equipment are connected through only the FG2a board, the
ongoing services between the BSC6900 and its peer equipment are disrupted when you
replace the FG2a board.
BSC6900 GU
Site Maintenance Guide 8 Replacing Boards and Modules
Issue 07 (2013-06-28) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
63
Procedure
Step 1 Run the LST SUBRACK command to query the backup status of the FG2a board to be replaced.
If... Then...
Backup type is Backup, Go to Step 2.
Backup type is No backup, Go to Step 4.
NOTE
If two BSC6900 boards work in backup mode, the boards must be installed in an even-numbered slot and
in the slot numbered with that value plus 1. For example, if the board that is installed in slot 14 does not
work in backup mode, the board that is installed in slot 15 does not work in backup mode either.
Step 2 Run the DSP BRD command to query the status of the FG2a board to be replaced.
If... Then...
CPU status is Active normal,
1. Run the SWP BRD command to switch the board
over to standby status.
2. Go to Step 3.
CAUTION
Run this command when the traffic is light, for instance,
at midnight.
The parameter is of any other values, Go to Step 3.
Step 3 Run the DSP ETHPORT command to query the backup status of all the ports on the FG2a
board to be replaced.
If... Then...
The ports are configured in independent
mode,
Go to Step 4.
The ports are configured in active/standby
mode, and the ports are active,
1. Run the SWP ETHPORT command to
switch the active port to standby status.
2. Go to Step 5.
The ports are configured in active/standby
mode, and the ports are standby,
Go to Step 5.
Step 4 Run the DSP IPPATH command to query the IP Path status carried on the board to be replacing.
The blocked IP path cannot carry new services while the existing services are not affected.
BSC6900 GU
Site Maintenance Guide 8 Replacing Boards and Modules
Issue 07 (2013-06-28) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
64
If... Then...
IPPATH status is AVAILABLE
1. Run the BLK IPPATH command to block the IP
path.
2. Go to Step 5.
IPPATH status is UNAVAILABLE Go to Step 5.
Step 5 Check whether the labels on the Ethernet cable connected to the FG2a board are legible. If the
labels are illegible, attach a new label to the Ethernet cable to avoid improper connection after
replacing the board.
Step 6 Disconnect the Ethernet cable from the replaced board.
Step 7 Remove the board to be replaced by referring to 8.2.1 Removing a Board.
Step 8 Install the new board into the subrack by referring to 8.2.2 Inserting a Board.
The new board automatically loads program and configuration data, and the RUN LED blinks
every other 0.125s.
Step 9 Install the Ethernet cables by referring to the labels.
Step 10 If the RUN LED blinks every other second, run DSP BRD to query the status of the new board.
If... Then...
CPU status is Active normal or Standby normal, Go to Step 12.
The parameter is of any other values, Go to Step 11.
Step 11 Check whether a board failure alarm is reported on the BSC6900 LMT.
If... Then...
Alarms caused by a faulty board are
reported,
1. Locate and rectify the fault according to the
alarm help information.
2. Go to Step 10.
No alarms caused by the faulty board are
reported,
Go to Step 12.
Step 12 Run the CMP BRDVER command to check whether the software version of the new board is
consistent with the board version matching table.
If... Then...
The board version is consistent with the
board version matching table,
Go to Step 13.
BSC6900 GU
Site Maintenance Guide 8 Replacing Boards and Modules
Issue 07 (2013-06-28) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
65
If... Then...
The board version is inconsistent with the
board version matching table,
1. Ensure that the program files of the board in
the OMU active workspace installation\bin
\fam on the OMU are correct. If the program
files are incorrect, contact Huawei
engineers.
2. Run RST BRD to reset the board.
3. Go to Step 10.
NOTE
You can obtain the correct board version matching table from the version matching documents.
Step 13 If the IP path is blocked in Step 4, run the UBL IPPATH command to unblock the IP Path.
Otherwise, go to Step 14 directly.
Step 14 Verify this board is functioning correctly by testing the CS services with dialing and PS services
with web browsing.
----End
Follow-up Procedure
Record the name and the bar code of the replaced board. Check whether there are obvious
physical damages, such as the distorted pin, broken pin, or burnt board. If there is any damage,
fill in BSC6900 Site Maintenance Record Form and pack the replaced board. When packing
a board, pay attention to the following points:
l Wear an ESD wrist strap or a pair of ESD gloves.
l Ensure that each ESD bag or case holds only one board.
l When packing multiple boards, isolate them with ESD materials.
Contact the local Huawei office to dispose of the replaced board.
NOTE
You may obtain the name and the PCB version from the panel or bottom of the faulty board.
8.9 Replacing an FG2c Board
This section describes how to replace a faulty FG2c board. The FG2c board is hot-swappable.
It takes about five minutes to replace the board.
Prerequisites
l The tools are ready. The tools are the ESD wrist strap, Phillips screwdriver, flat-head
screwdriver, and ESD box or bag.
l A new FG2c board is ready.
l The LMT is started and communicates with the OMU properly.
BSC6900 GU
Site Maintenance Guide 8 Replacing Boards and Modules
Issue 07 (2013-06-28) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
66
Context
CAUTION
l To avoid damage to the boards, ASIC chips, or other electronic components, wear an ESD
wrist strap properly. Ensure that the ESD wrist strap is properly connected to the ESD
connector on the cabinet. If no ESD wrist strap or no proper grounding point is available,
wear ESD gloves.
l It is recommended that you need to use the same board type to replace the old board. To use
a board of the different version to replace the board (for example, use a board of version a
to replace a board of version b), contact Huawei for technical support.
CAUTION
l If the FG2c board is standby and the ports on the FG2c board are backed up, replacing the
standby FG2c board has no adverse effect on the system.
l When the FG2c boards work in backup mode and the ports work in load sharing mode,
replacing the standby FG2c board disrupts part of services if the total traffic over the ports
exceeds the bandwidth of the ports on the active board. When the FG2c boards work in
backup mode with independent ports, replacing the standby FG2c board disrupts all the
services carried on the standby board.
l Replacing an FG2c board that works independently disrupts all the services on the board.
l If the BSC6900 and its peer equipment are connected through only the FG2c board, the
ongoing services between the BSC6900 and its peer equipment are disrupted when you
replace the FG2c board.
Procedure
Step 1 Run the LST SUBRACK command to query the backup status of the FG2c board to be replaced.
If... Then...
Backup type is Backup, Go to Step 2.
Backup type is No backup, Go to Step 4.
NOTE
If two BSC6900 boards work in backup mode, the boards must be installed in an even-numbered slot and
in the slot numbered with that value plus 1. For example, if the board that is installed in slot 14 does not
work in backup mode, the board that is installed in slot 15 does not work in backup mode either.
Step 2 Run the DSP BRD command to query the status of the FG2c board to be replaced.
BSC6900 GU
Site Maintenance Guide 8 Replacing Boards and Modules
Issue 07 (2013-06-28) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
67
If... Then...
CPU status is Active normal,
1. Run the SWP BRD command to switch the board
to standby status.
2. Go to Step 3.
CAUTION
Run this command in low traffic hours, for instance, at
midnight.
The parameter is of any other values, Go to Step 3.
Step 3 Run the DSP ETHPORT command to query the backup status of all the ports on the FG2c
board to be replaced.
If... Then...
The ports are configured in independent
mode,
Go to Step 4.
The ports are configured in active/standby
mode, and the ports are active,
1. Run the SWP ETHPORT command to
switch the active port to standby status.
2. Go to Step 5.
The ports are configured in active/standby
mode, and the ports are standby,
Go to Step 5.
Step 4 Run the DSP IPPATH command to query the IP Path status carried on the board to be replacing.
The blocked IP path cannot carry new services while the existing services are not affected.
If... Then...
IPPATH status is AVAILABLE
1. Run the BLK IPPATH command to block the IP
path.
2. Go to Step 5.
IPPATH status is UNAVAILABLE Go to Step 5.
Step 5 Check whether the labels on the Ethernet cable connected to the FG2c board are legible. If the
labels are illegible, attach a new label to the Ethernet cable to avoid improper connection after
replacing the board.
Step 6 Disconnect the Ethernet cable from the replaced board.
Step 7 Remove the board to be replaced by referring to 8.2.1 Removing a Board.
Step 8 Install the new board into the subrack by referring to 8.2.2 Inserting a Board.
The new board automatically loads program and configuration data, and the RUN LED blinks
every other 0.125s.
Step 9 Install the Ethernet cables by referring to the labels.
BSC6900 GU
Site Maintenance Guide 8 Replacing Boards and Modules
Issue 07 (2013-06-28) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
68
Step 10 If the RUN LED blinks every other second, run the DSP BRD command to query the status of
the new board.
If... Then...
CPU status is Active normal or Standby normal, Go to Step 12.
The parameter is of any other values, Go to Step 11.
Step 11 Check whether a board failure alarm is reported on the LMT.
If... Then...
Alarms caused by a faulty board are
reported,
1. Locate and rectify the fault according to the
alarm help information.
2. Go to Step 10.
No alarms caused by the faulty board are
reported,
Go to Step 12.
Step 12 Run the CMP BRDVER command to check whether the software version of the new board is
consistent with the board version matching table.
If... Then...
The board version is consistent with the
board version matching table,
Go to Step 13.
The board version is inconsistent with the
board version matching table,
1. Ensure that the program files of the board in
the OMU active workspace installation\bin
\fam on the OMU are correct. If the program
files are incorrect, contact Huawei
engineers.
2. Run the RST BRD command to reset the
board.
3. Go to Step 10.
NOTE
You can obtain the correct board version matching table from the version matching documents.
Step 13 If the IP path is blocked in Step 4, run the UBL IPPATH command to unblock the IP Path.
Otherwise, go to Step 14 directly.
Step 14 Verify this board is functioning correctly by testing the CS services with dialing and PS services
with web browsing.
----End
BSC6900 GU
Site Maintenance Guide 8 Replacing Boards and Modules
Issue 07 (2013-06-28) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
69
Follow-up Procedure
Record the name and the bar code of the replaced board. Check whether there are obvious
physical damages, such as the distorted pin, broken pin, or burnt board. If there is any damage,
fill in BSC6900 Site Maintenance Record Form and pack the replaced board. When packing
a board, pay attention to the following points:
l Wear an ESD wrist strap or a pair of ESD gloves.
l Ensure that each ESD bag or case holds only one board.
l When packing multiple boards, isolate them with ESD materials.
Contact the local Huawei office to dispose of the replaced board.
NOTE
You may obtain the name and the PCB version from the panel or bottom of the faulty board.
8.10 Replacing an FG2d Board
This section describes how to replace a faulty FG2d board. The FG2d board is hot-swappable.
It takes about five minutes to replace the board.
Prerequisites
l The tools are ready. The tools are the ESD wrist strap, Phillips screwdriver, flat-head
screwdriver, and ESD box or bag.
l A new FG2d board is ready.
l The LMT is started and communicates with the OMU properly.
Context
CAUTION
l To avoid damage to the boards, ASIC chips, or other electronic components, wear an ESD
wrist strap properly. Ensure that the ESD wrist strap is properly connected to the ESD
connector on the cabinet. If no ESD wrist strap or no proper grounding point is available,
wear ESD gloves.
l It is recommended that you need to use the same board type to replace the old board. To use
a board of the different version to replace the board (for example, use a board of version a
to replace a board of version b), contact Huawei for technical support.
BSC6900 GU
Site Maintenance Guide 8 Replacing Boards and Modules
Issue 07 (2013-06-28) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
70
CAUTION
l If the FG2d board is standby and the ports on the FG2d board are backed up, replacing the
standby FG2d board has no adverse effect on the system.
l When the FG2d boards work in backup mode and the ports work in load sharing mode,
replacing the standby FG2d board disrupts part of services if the total traffic over the ports
exceeds the bandwidth of the ports on the active board. When the FG2d boards work in
backup mode with independent ports, replacing the standby FG2d board disrupts all the
services carried on the standby board.
l Replacing an FG2d board that works independently disrupts all the services on the board.
l If the BSC6900 and its peer equipment are connected through only the FG2d board, the
ongoing services between the BSC6900 and its peer equipment are disrupted when you
replace the FG2d board.
Procedure
Step 1 Run the LST SUBRACK command to query the backup status of the FG2d board to be replaced.
If... Then...
Backup type is Backup, Go to Step 2.
Backup type is No backup, Go to Step 4.
NOTE
If two BSC6900 boards work in backup mode, the boards must be installed in an even-numbered slot and
in the slot numbered with that value plus 1. For example, if the board that is installed in slot 14 does not
work in backup mode, the board that is installed in slot 15 does not work in backup mode either.
Step 2 Run the DSP BRD command to query the status of the FG2d board to be replaced.
If... Then...
CPU status is Active normal,
1. Run the SWP BRD command to switch the board
to standby status.
2. Go to Step 3.
CAUTION
Run this command in low traffic hours, for instance, at
midnight.
The parameter is of any other values, Go to Step 3.
Step 3 Run the DSP ETHPORT command to query the backup status of all the ports on the FG2d
board to be replaced.
BSC6900 GU
Site Maintenance Guide 8 Replacing Boards and Modules
Issue 07 (2013-06-28) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
71
If... Then...
The ports are configured in independent
mode,
Go to Step 4.
The ports are configured in active/standby
mode, and the ports are active,
1. Run the SWP ETHPORT command to
switch the active port to standby status.
2. Go to Step 5.
The ports are configured in active/standby
mode, and the ports are standby,
Go to Step 5.
Step 4 Run the DSP IPPATH command to query the IP Path status carried on the board to be replacing.
The blocked IP path cannot carry new services while the existing services are not affected.
If... Then...
IPPATH status is AVAILABLE
1. Run the BLK IPPATH command to block the IP
path.
2. Go to Step 5.
IPPATH status is UNAVAILABLE Go to Step 5.
Step 5 Check whether the labels on the Ethernet cable connected to the FG2d board are legible. If the
labels are illegible, attach a new label to the Ethernet cable to avoid improper connection after
replacing the board.
Step 6 Disconnect the Ethernet cable from the replaced board.
Step 7 Remove the board to be replaced by referring to 8.2.1 Removing a Board.
Step 8 Install the new board into the subrack by referring to 8.2.2 Inserting a Board.
The new board automatically loads program and configuration data, and the RUN LED blinks
every other 0.125s.
Step 9 Install the Ethernet cables by referring to the labels.
Step 10 If the RUN LED blinks every other second, run the DSP BRD command to query the status of
the new board.
If... Then...
CPU status is Active normal or Standby normal, Go to Step 12.
The parameter is of any other values, Go to Step 11.
Step 11 Check whether a board failure alarm is reported on the LMT.
BSC6900 GU
Site Maintenance Guide 8 Replacing Boards and Modules
Issue 07 (2013-06-28) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
72
If... Then...
Alarms caused by a faulty board are
reported,
1. Locate and rectify the fault according to the
alarm help information.
2. Go to Step 10.
No alarms caused by the faulty board are
reported,
Go to Step 12.
Step 12 Run the CMP BRDVER command to check whether the software version of the new board is
consistent with the board version matching table.
If... Then...
The board version is consistent with the
board version matching table,
Go to Step 13.
The board version is inconsistent with the
board version matching table,
1. Ensure that the program files of the board in
the OMU active workspace installation\bin
\fam on the OMU are correct. If the program
files are incorrect, contact Huawei
engineers.
2. Run the RST BRD command to reset the
board.
3. Go to Step 10.
NOTE
You can obtain the correct board version matching table from the version matching documents.
Step 13 If the IP path is blocked in Step 4, run the UBL IPPATH command to unblock the IP Path.
Otherwise, go to Step 14 directly.
Step 14 Verify this board is functioning correctly by testing the CS services with dialing and PS services
with web browsing.
----End
Follow-up Procedure
Record the name and the bar code of the replaced board. Check whether there are obvious
physical damages, such as the distorted pin, broken pin, or burnt board. If there is any damage,
fill in BSC6900 Site Maintenance Record Form and pack the replaced board. When packing
a board, pay attention to the following points:
l Wear an ESD wrist strap or a pair of ESD gloves.
l Ensure that each ESD bag or case holds only one board.
l When packing multiple boards, isolate them with ESD materials.
Contact the local Huawei office to dispose of the replaced board.
NOTE
You may obtain the name and the PCB version from the panel or bottom of the faulty board.
BSC6900 GU
Site Maintenance Guide 8 Replacing Boards and Modules
Issue 07 (2013-06-28) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
73
8.11 Replacing a GCUa/GCGa Board
This section describes how to replace a faulty GCUa/GCGa board. The GCUa/GCGa board is
hot-swappable. It takes about five minutes to replace the board.
Prerequisites
l The tools are ready. The tools are the ESD wrist strap, Phillips screwdriver, flat-head
screwdriver, and ESD box or bag.
l A new GCUa/GCGa board is ready.
l The LMT is started and communicates with the OMU properly.
Context
CAUTION
l To avoid damage to the boards, ASIC chips, or other electronic components, wear an ESD
wrist strap properly. Ensure that the ESD wrist strap is properly connected to the ESD
connector on the cabinet. If no ESD wrist strap or no proper grounding point is available,
wear ESD gloves.
l It is recommended that you need to use the same board type to replace the old board. To use
a board of the different version to replace the board (for example, use a board of version a
to replace a board of version b), contact Huawei for technical support.
CAUTION
Replacing the standby GCUa/GCGa board has no adverse impact on the services in the system.
Replacing the GCUa/GCGa board that works independently, however, disrupts services carried
in the BSC6900.
Procedure
Step 1 Display the MPS in the Device Panel on the LMT. Check the configuration of the GCUa/GCGa
board.
If... Then...
Slots 12 and 13 are configured with the GCUa/GCGa boards, Go to Step 2.
Slot 12 or 13 is configured with the GCUa/GCGa board, Go to Step 3.
Step 2 Run the DSP BRD command to query the status of the board.
BSC6900 GU
Site Maintenance Guide 8 Replacing Boards and Modules
Issue 07 (2013-06-28) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
74
If... Then...
CPU status is Active normal,
1. Run the SWP BRD command to switch the board
over to standby status.
2. Go to Step 3.
CAUTION
Run this command when the traffic is light, for instance,
at midnight.
The parameter is of any other values, Go to Step 3.
Step 3 Check whether the labels on the cables connected to the GCUa/GCGa board are legible. If the
labels are illegible, attach a new label to the cables to avoid improper connection after the board
is replaced.
Step 4 Disconnect the cables from the faulty board.
Step 5 Remove the GCUa/GCGa board to be replaced by referring to 8.2.1 Removing a Board.
Step 6 Install the new board into the subrack by referring to 8.2.2 Inserting a Board.
The new board automatically loads program and configuration data, and the RUN LED blinks
every other 0.125s.
Step 7 Install the cables by referring to the labels.
Step 8 If the RUN LED blinks every other second, run DSP BRD to query the status of the new board.
If... Then...
If the CPU status of only one GCUa/GCGa board is Active normal, Go to Step 10.
If the CPU status of two GCUa/GCGa boards is Standby normal, Go to Step 10.
The parameter is of any other values, Go to Step 9.
Step 9 Check whether a board failure alarm is reported on the BSC6900 LMT.
If... Then...
Alarms caused by a faulty board are
reported,
1. Locate and rectify the fault according to the
alarm help information.
2. Go to Step 8.
No alarms caused by the faulty board are
reported,
Go to Step 10.
Step 10 Run the CMP BRDVER command to check whether the software version of the new board is
consistent with the board version matching table.
BSC6900 GU
Site Maintenance Guide 8 Replacing Boards and Modules
Issue 07 (2013-06-28) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
75
If... Then...
The board version is consistent with the
board version matching table,
Go to Step 11.
The board version is inconsistent with the
board version matching table,
1. Ensure that the program files of the board in
the OMU active workspace installation\bin
\fam on the OMU are correct. If the program
files are incorrect, contact Huawei
engineers.
2. Run RST BRD to reset the board.
3. Go to Step 8.
NOTE
You can obtain the correct board version matching table from the version matching documents.
Step 11 Run the DSP CLK command to query the clock status of the SCUa board in the MPS.
If... Then...
If the clock status of the SCUa board is Normal, The replacement is complete.
If the clock status of the SCUa board is Abnormal, Go to Step 8.
----End
Follow-up Procedure
Record the name and the bar code of the replaced board. Check whether there are obvious
physical damages, such as the distorted pin, broken pin, or burnt board. If there is any damage,
fill in BSC6900 Site Maintenance Record Form and pack the replaced board. When packing
a board, pay attention to the following points:
l Wear an ESD wrist strap or a pair of ESD gloves.
l Ensure that each ESD bag or case holds only one board.
l When packing multiple boards, isolate them with ESD materials.
Contact the local Huawei office to dispose of the replaced board.
NOTE
You may obtain the name and the PCB version from the panel or bottom of the faulty board.
8.12 Replacing a GOUa Board
This section describes how to replace a faulty GOUa board. The GOUa board is hot-swappable.
It takes about five minutes to replace the board.
BSC6900 GU
Site Maintenance Guide 8 Replacing Boards and Modules
Issue 07 (2013-06-28) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
76
Prerequisites
l The tools are ready. The tools are the ESD wrist strap, Phillips screwdriver, flat-head
screwdriver, ESD box or bag, dustfree cotton cloth, and fiber cleaner.
l A new GOUa board is ready.
l The LMT is started and communicates with the OMU properly.
Context
CAUTION
l To avoid damage to the boards, ASIC chips, or other electronic components, wear an ESD
wrist strap properly. Ensure that the ESD wrist strap is properly connected to the ESD
connector on the cabinet. If no ESD wrist strap or no proper grounding point is available,
wear ESD gloves.
l It is recommended that you need to use the same board type to replace the old board. To use
a board of the different version to replace the board (for example, use a board of version a
to replace a board of version b), contact Huawei for technical support.
CAUTION
l If the GOUa board is standby and the data over the port on the GOUa board are backed up,
replacing the standby GOUa board has no adverse effect on the system.
l When the GOUa boards work in board backup mode and the ports work in load sharing mode,
replacing the standby GOUa board disrupts part of services if the total traffic over the ports
exceeds the bandwidth of the ports on the active board. When the GOUa boards work in
board backup mode with independent ports, replacing the standby GOUa board disrupts all
the services carried on the standby board.
l Replacing a GOUa board that works independently disrupts the services on that board.
l If the BSC6900 and its peer equipment are connected through only the GOUa board, the
ongoing services between the BSC6900 and its peer equipment are disrupted when you
replace the GOUa board.
Procedure
Step 1 Run the LST SUBRACK command to query the backup status of the GOUa board to be replaced.
If... Then...
Backup type is Backup, Go to Step 2.
Backup type is No backup, Go to Step 4.
BSC6900 GU
Site Maintenance Guide 8 Replacing Boards and Modules
Issue 07 (2013-06-28) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
77
NOTE
If two BSC6900 boards work in backup mode, the boards must be installed in an even-numbered slot and
in the slot numbered with that value plus 1. For example, if the board that is installed in slot 14 does not
work in backup mode, the board that is installed in slot 15 does not work in backup mode either.
Step 2 Run the DSP BRD command to query the status of the GOUa board to be replaced.
If... Then...
CPU status is Active normal,
1. Run the SWP BRD command to switch the board
over to standby status.
2. Go to Step 3.
CAUTION
Run this command when the traffic is light, for instance,
at midnight.
The parameter is of any other values, Go to Step 3.
Step 3 Run the DSP ETHPORT command to query the backup status of all the ports on the GOUa
board to be replaced.
If... Then...
The ports are configured in independent
mode,
Go to Step 4.
The ports are configured in active/standby
mode, and the ports are active,
1. Run the SWP ETHPORT command to
switch the active port to standby status.
2. Go to Step 5.
The ports are configured in active/standby
mode, and the ports are standby,
Go to Step 5.
Step 4 Run the DSP IPPATH command to query the IP Path status carried on the board to be replacing.
The blocked IP path cannot carry new services while the existing services are not affected.
If... Then...
IPPATH status is AVAILABLE
1. Run the BLK IPPATH command to block the IP
path.
2. Go to Step 5.
IPPATH status is UNAVAILABLE Go to Step 5.
Step 5 Check whether the labels on the optical cable connected to the GOUa are legible. If the labels
are illegible, attach a new label to the cable to avoid improper connection after the board is
replaced.
Step 6 Remove the optical cables and cap the connectors. If the connectors are dirty, clean them with
the dustfree cotton cloth or the fiber cleaner.
BSC6900 GU
Site Maintenance Guide 8 Replacing Boards and Modules
Issue 07 (2013-06-28) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
78
Step 7 Remove the board by referring to 8.2.1 Removing a Board and cap the optical ports.
Step 8 Install the new board into the subrack by referring to 8.2.2 Inserting a Board.
The new board automatically loads program and configuration data, and the RUN LED blinks
every other 0.125s.
Step 9 Remove the caps from optical ports and connectors, and reserve them for later use. Then, install
the optical cables by referring to the labels.
Step 10 If the RUN LED blinks every other second, run DSP BRD to query the status of the new board.
If... Then...
CPU status is Active normal or Standby normal, Go to Step 12.
The CPU is in another status, Go to Step 11.
Step 11 Check whether a board failure alarm is reported on the BSC6900 LMT.
If... Then...
Alarms caused by a faulty board are
reported,
1. Locate and rectify the fault according to the
alarm help information.
2. Go to Step 10.
No alarms caused by the faulty board are
reported,
Go to Step 12.
Step 12 Run the CMP BRDVER command to check whether the software version of the new board is
consistent with the board version matching table.
If... Then...
The board version is consistent with the
board version matching table,
Go to Step 13.
The board version is inconsistent with the
board version matching table,
1. Ensure that the program files of the board in
the OMU active workspace installation\bin
\fam on the OMU are correct. If the program
files are incorrect, contact Huawei
engineers.
2. Run RST BRD to reset the board.
3. Go to Step 10.
NOTE
You can obtain the correct board version matching table from the version matching documents.
Step 13 If the IP path is blocked in Step 4, run the UBL IPPATH command to unblock the IP Path.
Otherwise, go to Step 14 directly.
BSC6900 GU
Site Maintenance Guide 8 Replacing Boards and Modules
Issue 07 (2013-06-28) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
79
Step 14 Verify this board is functioning correctly by testing the CS services with dialing and PS services
with web browsing.
----End
Follow-up Procedure
Record the name and the bar code of the replaced board. Check whether there are obvious
physical damages, such as the distorted pin, broken pin, or burnt board. If there is any damage,
fill in BSC6900 Site Maintenance Record Form and pack the replaced board. When packing
a board, pay attention to the following points:
l Wear an ESD wrist strap or a pair of ESD gloves.
l Ensure that each ESD bag or case holds only one board.
l When packing multiple boards, isolate them with ESD materials.
Contact the local Huawei office to dispose of the replaced board.
NOTE
You may obtain the name and the PCB version from the panel or bottom of the faulty board.
8.13 Replacing a GOUc Board
This section describes how to replace a faulty GOUc board. The GOUc board is hot-swappable.
It takes about five minutes to replace the board.
Prerequisites
l The tools are ready. The tools are the ESD wrist strap, Phillips screwdriver, flat-head
screwdriver, ESD box or bag, dustfree cotton cloth, and fiber cleaner.
l A new GOUc board is ready.
l The LMT is started and communicates with the OMU properly.
Context
CAUTION
l To avoid damage to the boards, ASIC chips, or other electronic components, wear an ESD
wrist strap properly. Ensure that the ESD wrist strap is properly connected to the ESD
connector on the cabinet. If no ESD wrist strap or no proper grounding point is available,
wear ESD gloves.
l It is recommended that you need to use the same board type to replace the old board. To use
a board of the different version to replace the board (for example, use a board of version a
to replace a board of version b), contact Huawei for technical support.
BSC6900 GU
Site Maintenance Guide 8 Replacing Boards and Modules
Issue 07 (2013-06-28) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
80
CAUTION
l If the GOUc board is standby and the ports on the GOUc board are backed up, replacing the
standby GOUc board has no adverse effect on the system.
l When the GOUc boards work in backup mode and the ports work in load sharing mode,
replacing the standby GOUc board disrupts part of services if the total traffic over the ports
exceeds the bandwidth of the ports on the active board. When the GOUc boards work in
backup mode with independent ports, replacing the standby GOUc board disrupts all the
services carried on the standby board.
l Replacing a GOUc board that works independently disrupts the services on the board.
l If the BSC6900 and its peer equipment are connected through only the GOUc board, the
ongoing services between the BSC6900 and its peer equipment are disrupted when you
replace the GOUc board.
Procedure
Step 1 Run the LST SUBRACK command to query the backup status of the GOUc board to be replaced.
If... Then...
Backup type is Backup, Go to Step 2.
Backup type is No backup, Go to Step 4.
NOTE
If two BSC6900 boards work in backup mode, the boards must be installed in an even-numbered slot and
in the slot numbered with that value plus 1. For example, if the board that is installed in slot 14 does not
work in backup mode, the board that is installed in slot 15 does not work in backup mode either.
Step 2 Run the DSP BRD command to query the status of the GOUc board to be replaced.
If... Then...
CPU status is Active normal,
1. Run the SWP BRD command to switch the board
to standby status.
2. Go to Step 3.
CAUTION
Run this command in low traffic hours, for instance, at
midnight.
The parameter is of any other values, Go to Step 3.
Step 3 Run the DSP ETHPORT command to query the backup status of all the ports on the GOUc
board to be replaced.
BSC6900 GU
Site Maintenance Guide 8 Replacing Boards and Modules
Issue 07 (2013-06-28) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
81
If... Then...
The ports are configured in independent
mode,
Go to Step 4.
The ports are configured in active/standby
mode, and the ports are active,
1. Run the SWP ETHPORT command to
switch the active port to standby status.
2. Go to Step 5.
The ports are configured in active/standby
mode, and the ports are standby,
Go to Step 5.
Step 4 Run the DSP IPPATH command to query the IP Path status carried on the board to be replacing.
The blocked IP path cannot carry new services while the existing services are not affected.
If... Then...
IPPATH status is AVAILABLE
1. Run the BLK IPPATH command to block the IP
path.
2. Go to Step 5.
IPPATH status is UNAVAILABLE Go to Step 5.
Step 5 Check whether the labels on the optical cables connected to the GOUc board are legible. If the
labels are illegible, attach a new label to the cables to avoid improper connection after the board
is replaced.
Step 6 Remove the optical cables and cap the connectors. If the connectors are dirty, clean them with
dustfree cotton cloth or fiber cleaner.
Step 7 Remove the board by referring to 8.2.1 Removing a Board and cap the optical ports.
Step 8 Install the new board into the subrack by referring to 8.2.2 Inserting a Board.
The new board automatically loads program and configuration data, and the RUN LED blinks
every other 0.125s.
Step 9 Remove the caps from optical ports and connectors, and keep them for later use. Then, install
the optical cables by referring to the labels.
Step 10 If the RUN LED blinks every other second, run the DSP BRD command to query the status of
the new board.
If... Then...
CPU status is Active normal or Standby normal, Go to Step 12.
The parameter is of any other values, Go to Step 11.
Step 11 Check whether a board failure alarm is reported on the LMT.
BSC6900 GU
Site Maintenance Guide 8 Replacing Boards and Modules
Issue 07 (2013-06-28) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
82
If... Then...
Alarms caused by a faulty board are
reported,
1. Locate and rectify the fault according to the
alarm help information.
2. Go to Step 10.
No alarms caused by the faulty board are
reported,
Go to Step 12.
Step 12 Run the CMP BRDVER command to check whether the software version of the new board is
consistent with the board version matching table.
If... Then...
The board version is consistent with the
board version matching table,
Go to Step 13.
The board version is inconsistent with the
board version matching table,
1. Ensure that the program files of the board in
the OMU active workspace installation\bin
\fam on the OMU are correct. If the program
files are incorrect, contact Huawei
engineers.
2. Run the RST BRD command to reset the
board.
3. Go to Step 10.
NOTE
You can obtain the correct board version matching table from the version matching documents.
Step 13 If the IP path is blocked in Step 4, run the UBL IPPATH command to unblock the IP Path.
Otherwise, go to Step 14 directly.
Step 14 Verify this board is functioning correctly by testing the CS services with dialing and PS services
with web browsing.
----End
Follow-up Procedure
Record the name and the bar code of the replaced board. Check whether there are obvious
physical damages, such as the distorted pin, broken pin, or burnt board. If there is any damage,
fill in BSC6900 Site Maintenance Record Form and pack the replaced board. When packing
a board, pay attention to the following points:
l Wear an ESD wrist strap or a pair of ESD gloves.
l Ensure that each ESD bag or case holds only one board.
l When packing multiple boards, isolate them with ESD materials.
Contact the local Huawei office to dispose of the replaced board.
NOTE
You may obtain the name and the PCB version from the panel or bottom of the faulty board.
BSC6900 GU
Site Maintenance Guide 8 Replacing Boards and Modules
Issue 07 (2013-06-28) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
83
8.14 Replacing a GOUd Board
This section describes how to replace a faulty GOUd board. The GOUd board is hot-swappable.
It takes about five minutes to replace the board.
Prerequisites
l The tools are ready. The tools are the ESD wrist strap, Phillips screwdriver, flat-head
screwdriver, ESD box or bag, dustfree cotton cloth, and fiber cleaner.
l A new GOUd board is ready.
l The LMT is started and communicates with the OMU properly.
Context
CAUTION
l To avoid damage to the boards, ASIC chips, or other electronic components, wear an ESD
wrist strap properly. Ensure that the ESD wrist strap is properly connected to the ESD
connector on the cabinet. If no ESD wrist strap or no proper grounding point is available,
wear ESD gloves.
l It is recommended that you need to use the same board type to replace the old board. To use
a board of the different version to replace the board (for example, use a board of version a
to replace a board of version b), contact Huawei for technical support.
CAUTION
l If the GOUd board is standby and the ports on the GOUd board are backed up, replacing the
standby GOUd board has no adverse effect on the system.
l When the GOUd boards work in backup mode and the ports work in load sharing mode,
replacing the standby GOUd board disrupts part of services if the total traffic over the ports
exceeds the bandwidth of the ports on the active board. When the GOUd boards work in
backup mode with independent ports, replacing the standby GOUd board disrupts all the
services carried on the standby board.
l Replacing a GOUd board that works independently disrupts the services on the board.
l If the BSC6900 and its peer equipment are connected through only the GOUd board, the
ongoing services between the BSC6900 and its peer equipment are disrupted when you
replace the GOUd board.
Procedure
Step 1 Run the LST SUBRACK command to query the backup status of the GOUd board to be
replaced.
BSC6900 GU
Site Maintenance Guide 8 Replacing Boards and Modules
Issue 07 (2013-06-28) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
84
If... Then...
Backup type is Backup, Go to Step 2.
Backup type is No backup, Go to Step 4.
NOTE
If two BSC6900 boards work in backup mode, the boards must be installed in an even-numbered slot and
in the slot numbered with that value plus 1. For example, if the board that is installed in slot 14 does not
work in backup mode, the board that is installed in slot 15 does not work in backup mode either.
Step 2 Run the DSP BRD command to query the status of the GOUd board to be replaced.
If... Then...
CPU status is Active normal,
1. Run the SWP BRD command to switch the board
to standby status.
2. Go to Step 3.
CAUTION
Run this command in low traffic hours, for instance, at
midnight.
The parameter is of any other values, Go to Step 3.
Step 3 Run the DSP ETHPORT command to query the backup status of all the ports on the GOUd
board to be replaced.
If... Then...
The ports are configured in independent
mode,
Go to Step 4.
The ports are configured in active/standby
mode, and the ports are active,
1. Run the SWP ETHPORT command to
switch the active port to standby status.
2. Go to Step 5.
The ports are configured in active/standby
mode, and the ports are standby,
Go to Step 5.
Step 4 Run the DSP IPPATH command to query the IP Path status carried on the board to be replacing.
The blocked IP path cannot carry new services while the existing services are not affected.
If... Then...
IPPATH status is AVAILABLE
1. Run the BLK IPPATH command to block the IP
path.
2. Go to Step 5.
BSC6900 GU
Site Maintenance Guide 8 Replacing Boards and Modules
Issue 07 (2013-06-28) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
85
If... Then...
IPPATH status is UNAVAILABLE Go to Step 5.
Step 5 Check whether the labels on the optical cables connected to the GOUd board are legible. If the
labels are illegible, attach a new label to the cables to avoid improper connection after the board
is replaced.
Step 6 Remove the optical cables and cap the connectors. If the connectors are dirty, clean them with
dustfree cotton cloth or fiber cleaner.
Step 7 Remove the board by referring to 8.2.1 Removing a Board and cap the optical ports.
Step 8 Install the new board into the subrack by referring to 8.2.2 Inserting a Board.
The new board automatically loads program and configuration data, and the RUN LED blinks
every other 0.125s.
Step 9 Remove the caps from optical ports and connectors, and keep them for later use. Then, install
the optical cables by referring to the labels.
Step 10 If the RUN LED blinks every other second, run the DSP BRD command to query the status of
the new board.
If... Then...
CPU status is Active normal or Standby normal, Go to Step 12.
The parameter is of any other values, Go to Step 11.
Step 11 Check whether a board failure alarm is reported on the LMT.
If... Then...
Alarms caused by a faulty board are
reported,
1. Locate and rectify the fault according to the
alarm help information.
2. Go to Step 10.
No alarms caused by the faulty board are
reported,
Go to Step 12.
Step 12 Run the CMP BRDVER command to check whether the software version of the new board is
consistent with the board version matching table.
If... Then...
The board version is consistent with the
board version matching table,
Go to Step 14.
BSC6900 GU
Site Maintenance Guide 8 Replacing Boards and Modules
Issue 07 (2013-06-28) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
86
If... Then...
The board version is inconsistent with the
board version matching table,
1. Ensure that the program files of the board in
the OMU active workspace installation\bin
\fam on the OMU are correct. If the program
files are incorrect, contact Huawei
engineers.
2. Run the RST BRD command to reset the
board.
3. Go to Step 10.
NOTE
You can obtain the correct board version matching table from the version matching documents.
Step 13 If the IP path is blocked in Step 4, run the UBL IPPATH command to unblock the IP Path.
Otherwise, go to Step 14 directly.
Step 14 Verify this board is functioning correctly by testing the CS services with dialing and PS services
with web browsing.
----End
Follow-up Procedure
Record the name and the bar code of the replaced board. Check whether there are obvious
physical damages, such as the distorted pin, broken pin, or burnt board. If there is any damage,
fill in BSC6900 Site Maintenance Record Form and pack the replaced board. When packing
a board, pay attention to the following points:
l Wear an ESD wrist strap or a pair of ESD gloves.
l Ensure that each ESD bag or case holds only one board.
l When packing multiple boards, isolate them with ESD materials.
Contact the local Huawei office to dispose of the replaced board.
NOTE
You may obtain the name and the PCB version from the panel or bottom of the faulty board.
8.15 Replacing an MDMC Board
This section describes how to replace a faulty MDMC board. The MDMC board is hot-
swappable. It takes about ten minutes to replace the board.
Prerequisites
l The tools are ready. They are the ESD wrist strap, Phillips screwdriver, and ESD box or
bag.
l A new MDMC board is ready for use.
l The LMT is started, and the connection between the LMT PC and the server is normal.
BSC6900 GU
Site Maintenance Guide 8 Replacing Boards and Modules
Issue 07 (2013-06-28) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
87
Context
CAUTION
l You are required to Wear an ESD Wrist Strap and plug the ESD wrist strap into the ESD
connector of the cabinet before replacing the board. If the ESD wrist strap is unavailable or
if there is no ESD connector for the ESD wrist strap, wear ESD gloves.
l During the replacement of the MDMC board, the power distribution monitor function is
unavailable.
Procedure
Step 1 Record the state of the mute switch on the front panel of the power distribution box.
For the position of the mute switch, see Panel of the MDMC Board.
Step 2 Set all the bits of DIP switch S2 on the new MDMC board to ON, as shown in Figure 8-5.
Figure 8-5 Settings of DIP switch S2 on the MDMC board

Step 3 Remove the captive screw on the MDMC board with a Phillips screwdriver.
Step 4 Hold the handle of the MDMC board and remove the board from the power distribution box.
Then, put the MDMC board into an ESD box or bag.
CAUTION
The MDMC board is twice as long as other boards. To avoid damaging the MDMC board during
the replacement, move the board only after you have completely removed the board from the
cabinet.
Step 5 Insert the new MDMC board into the power distribution box along the guide rails.
Step 6 Secure the captive screw on the MDMC board.
Step 7 Set the mute switch on the new MDMC board according to the recorded settings.
Step 8 When the RUN LED blinks every alternate 0.25s, it indicates that the new board is automatically
loading the data configuration file.
For details about the state of the LEDs on the board, see DIP Switch on the MDMC Board.
BSC6900 GU
Site Maintenance Guide 8 Replacing Boards and Modules
Issue 07 (2013-06-28) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
88
NOTE
When the RUN LED blinks every alternate 0.25s or the ALM LED is on, you must remove the MDMC
board and install the board again to ensure that the MDMC board is fully in contact with the backplane.
Step 9 When the RUN LED blinks every alternate second, it indicates that the board works properly.
Step 10 On the LMT, choose Alarm > Browse Alarm to check whether a board failure alarm is reported.
If such an alarm is reported, identify and rectify the fault according to the alarm information.
----End
Follow-up Procedure
Record the name and the bar code of the replaced board. Check whether there are obvious
physical damages, such as the distorted pin, broken pin, or burnt board. If there is any damage,
fill in BSC6900 Site Maintenance Record Form and pack the replaced board. When packing
a board, pay attention to the following points:
l Wear an ESD wrist strap or a pair of ESD gloves.
l Ensure that each ESD bag or case holds only one board.
l When packing multiple boards, isolate them with ESD materials.
Contact the local Huawei office to dispose of the replaced board.
NOTE
You may obtain the name and the PCB version from the panel or bottom of the faulty board.
8.16 Replacing a NIUa Board
This section describes how to replace a faulty NIUa board. The NIUa board is hot-swappable.
It takes about two minutes to replace the board.
Prerequisites
l The tools are ready. The tools are the ESD wrist strap, Phillips screwdriver, and ESD box
or bag.
l A new NIUa board is ready.
l The LMT is started and communicates with the OMU properly.
Context
CAUTION
l To avoid damage to the boards, ASIC chips, or other electronic components, wear an ESD
wrist strap properly. Ensure that the ESD wrist strap is properly connected to the ESD
connector on the cabinet. If no ESD wrist strap or no proper grounding point is available,
wear ESD gloves.
l It is recommended that you need to use the same board type to replace the old board. To use
a board of the different version to replace the board (for example, use a board of version a
to replace a board of version b), contact Huawei for technical support.
BSC6900 GU
Site Maintenance Guide 8 Replacing Boards and Modules
Issue 07 (2013-06-28) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
89
Procedure
Step 1 Run the LST SUBRACK command to query the inhibited status of the board.
If... Then...
The query result of Logical INH Status or
Physical INH Status includes the NIUa
board to be replaced.
Go to Step 2.
The query result of Logical INH Status
and Physical INH Status does not include
the NIUa board to be replaced.
1. Run the INH BRD command to physically
inhibit the board.
2. Go to Step 2.
Step 2 Remove the NIUa board to be replaced by referring to 8.2.1 Removing a Board.
Step 3 Insert the new board into the subrack by referring to 8.2.2 Inserting a Board.
Step 4 Run the UIN BRD command to unblock the new board.
The new board automatically loads program and configuration data, and the RUN LED blinks
every alternate 0.125s.
Step 5 Run the DSP BRD command to query the status of the new board.
If... Then...
CPU status is Normal, Go to Step 7.
CPU status is not Normal, Go to Step 6.
Step 6 Check whether a board failure alarm is reported on the LMT.
If... Then...
Alarms caused by a faulty board are
reported,
1. Identify and rectify the fault according to the
alarm information.
2. Go to Step 5.
No alarms caused by the faulty board are
reported,
Go to Step 7.
Step 7 Run the CMP BRDVER command to check whether the software version of the new board is
consistent with the board version matching table.
If... Then...
The board version is consistent with the
board version matching table,
Go to Step 8.
BSC6900 GU
Site Maintenance Guide 8 Replacing Boards and Modules
Issue 07 (2013-06-28) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
90
If... Then...
The board version is inconsistent with the
board version matching table,
1. Ensure that the program files of the board in
the OMU active workspace installation\bin
\fam on the OMU are correct. If the program
files are incorrect, contact Huawei
engineers.
2. Run the RST BRD command to reset the
board.
3. Go to Step 5.
NOTE
You can obtain the correct board version matching table from the version matching documents.
Step 8 Test the CS services by dialing and the PS services by browsing web pages to ensure that the
new board is functional.
----End
Follow-up Procedure
Record the name and the bar code of the replaced board. Check whether there are obvious
physical damages, such as the distorted pin, broken pin, or burnt board. If there is any damage,
fill in BSC6900 Site Maintenance Record Form and pack the replaced board. When packing
a board, pay attention to the following points:
l Wear an ESD wrist strap or a pair of ESD gloves.
l Ensure that each ESD bag or case holds only one board.
l When packing multiple boards, isolate them with ESD materials.
Contact the local Huawei office to dispose of the replaced board.
NOTE
You may obtain the name and the PCB version from the panel or bottom of the faulty board.
8.17 Replacing an OIUa Board
This section describes how to replace a faulty OIUa board. The OIUa board is hot-swappable.
It takes about five minutes to replace the board.
Prerequisites
l The tools are ready. The tools are the ESD wrist strap, Phillips screwdriver, flat-head
screwdriver, ESD box or bag, dustfree cotton cloth, and fiber cleaner.
l A new OIUa board is ready.
l The LMT is started and communicates with the OMU properly.
BSC6900 GU
Site Maintenance Guide 8 Replacing Boards and Modules
Issue 07 (2013-06-28) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
91
Context
CAUTION
l To avoid damage to the boards, ASIC chips, or other electronic components, wear an ESD
wrist strap properly. Ensure that the ESD wrist strap is properly connected to the ESD
connector on the cabinet. If no ESD wrist strap or no proper grounding point is available,
wear ESD gloves.
l It is recommended that you need to use the same board type to replace the old board. To use
a board of the different version to replace the board (for example, use a board of version a
to replace a board of version b), contact Huawei for technical support.
CAUTION
l Replacing the standby OIUa board has no adverse impact on the system. When no standby
OIUa board is in position, replacing the board disrupts services carried on this board.
l If the BSC6900 and its peer equipment are connected through only the OIUa board, the
ongoing services between the BSC6900 and its peer equipment are disrupted when you
replace the OIUa board.
Procedure
Step 1 Run the LST SUBRACK command to query the backup status of the OIUa board to be replaced.
If... Then...
Backup type is Backup, Go to Step 2.
Backup type is No backup, Go to Step 4.
NOTE
If two BSC6900 boards work in backup mode, the boards must be installed in an even-numbered slot and
in the slot numbered with that value plus 1. For example, if the board that is installed in slot 14 does not
work in backup mode, the board that is installed in slot 15 does not work in backup mode either.
Step 2 Run the DSP BRD command to query the status of the board to be replaced.
BSC6900 GU
Site Maintenance Guide 8 Replacing Boards and Modules
Issue 07 (2013-06-28) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
92
If... Then...
CPU status is Normal,
1. Run the SWP BRD command to switch the board
over to standby status.
2. Go to Step 3.
CAUTION
Run this command when the traffic is light, for instance,
at midnight.
The parameter is of any other values, Go to Step 3.
Step 3 Run the DSP OPT command to query the backup status of all the optical ports on the OIUa
board to be replaced.
If... Then...
The optical port is standby, Go to Step 4.
The optical port is active,
1. Run the DSP MSP command to query the MSP status.
l If the MSP is not started, run the ACT MSP command
to activate the MSP.
l If the MSP has been started, go to 3.2.
2. Run the SET MSPCMD command to switch the active port
to standby status.
l If the active port is located in a slot with a even number,
set MSPCMD to MS(Manual switchover from
working link to protection link).
l If the active port is located in a slot with an odd number,
setMSPCMD to LOP(Lockout of Protection).
3. Go to Step 4.
CAUTION
Before activating the MSP, ensure that the local end and the peer end
have the same protection mode.
Step 4 Check whether the labels on the optical cable and clock cable (if configured) connected to the
OIUa are legible. If the labels are illegible, attach a new label to the cables to avoid improper
connection after the board is replaced.
Step 5 Remove the clock cable.
Step 6 Remove the optical cable and cap the connectors. If the connectors are dirty, clean them with
the dustfree cotton cloth or the fiber cleaner.
Step 7 Remove the board by referring to 8.2.1 Removing a Board and cap the optical ports.
Step 8 Insert the new board into the subrack by referring to 8.2.2 Inserting a Board.
The new board automatically loads program and configuration data, and the RUN LED blinks
every other 0.125s.
BSC6900 GU
Site Maintenance Guide 8 Replacing Boards and Modules
Issue 07 (2013-06-28) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
93
Step 9 Remove the caps from optical ports and connectors, and reserve them for later use. Then, install
the optical cables by referring to the labels.
Step 10 Install the clock cable (if configured) by referring to the labels.
Step 11 If the RUN LED blinks every other second, run the DSP BRD command to query the status of
the new board.
If... Then...
CPU status is Active normal or Standby normal, Go to Step 13.
The parameter is of any other values, Go to Step 12.
Step 12 Check whether a board failure alarm is reported on the BSC6900 LMT.
If... Then...
Alarms caused by a faulty board are
reported,
1. Locate and rectify the fault according to the
alarm help information.
2. Go to Step 11.
No alarms caused by the faulty board are
reported,
Go to Step 13.
Step 13 Run the CMP BRDVER command to check whether the software version of the new board is
consistent with the board version matching table.
If... Then...
The board version is consistent with the
board version matching table,
Go to Step 15.
The board version is inconsistent with the
board version matching table,
1. Ensure that the program files of the board in
the OMU active workspace installation\bin
\fam on the OMU are correct. If the program
files are incorrect, contact Huawei
engineers.
2. Run RST BRD to reset the board.
3. Go to Step 11.
NOTE
You can obtain the correct board version matching table from the version matching documents.
Step 14 If the status of the active port has been changed to standby in Step 3, run the SET MSPCMD
command withMSP Control Command set to CLEAR(Cleared). If the status of the active
port is not changed, go to Step 15.
BSC6900 GU
Site Maintenance Guide 8 Replacing Boards and Modules
Issue 07 (2013-06-28) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
94
Step 15 Verify this board is functioning correctly by testing the CS services with dialing and PS services
with web browsing.
----End
Follow-up Procedure
Record the name and the bar code of the replaced board. Check whether there are obvious
physical damages, such as the distorted pin, broken pin, or burnt board. If there is any damage,
fill in BSC6900 Site Maintenance Record Form and pack the replaced board. When packing
a board, pay attention to the following points:
l Wear an ESD wrist strap or a pair of ESD gloves.
l Ensure that each ESD bag or case holds only one board.
l When packing multiple boards, isolate them with ESD materials.
Contact the local Huawei office to dispose of the replaced board.
NOTE
You may obtain the name and the PCB version from the panel or bottom of the faulty board.
8.18 Replacing an OMU Board
This section describes how to replace an OMU board. A faulty OMU board needs to be replaced
to prevent data from being lost when OMU operation and maintenance are interrupted due to
disconnection between the OMU and host boards. For details about how to replace an OMU
board for other purposes, also see this section.
Prerequisites
l The tools required for replacing an OMU board are prepared: an ESD wrist strap, a Phillips
screwdriver, a flat-head screwdriver, a wrench, and an ESD box or bag.
l A new OMU board is prepared.
l The following installation information about the OMU board to be replaced is obtained:
FTP server password
Administrator password
Operating system (OS) type of the OMU board
Information about all IP addresses of the OMU board, including external fixed IP
address (external gateway IP address), external virtual IP address, internal fixed IP
address, internal virtual IP address, backup channel IP address of the active and standby
OMUs, and debugging IP address.
l The version software required for installing the new OMU board is obtained. A
Dopra_Linux_U tool, Suse Linux OS installation disk, or Windows 2003 OS installation
disk is prepared for a new OMU board whose OS is Dopra Linux, Suse Linux, and Windows
2003 respectively.
BSC6900 GU
Site Maintenance Guide 8 Replacing Boards and Modules
Issue 07 (2013-06-28) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
95
NOTE
Contact Huawei engineers who can obtain the installation package and tool by performing the
following operation:
l Log in to http://support.huawei.com/support/ and choose Software Center > Version
Software > Wireless Product Line > SingleRAN > MBSC > BSC6900 > BSC6900 Product
Version > BSC6900 Software Version.
l Click Software Version VER to obtain the BSC6900 version installation package.
l Log in to http://support.huawei.com/support/ and choose Software Center > Version
Software > Wireless Product Line > SingleRAN > SRAN O&M tools to obtain the
Dopra_Linux_USB Disks.
Context
Figure 8-6 shows the procedure for replacing an OMU board.
Figure 8-6 Procedure for replacing an OMU board

8.18.1 Checking OMU Status Before Replacing an OMU Board
This section describes how to check OMU status before replacing an OMU board. To ensure
OMU data consistency before and after a replacement, users need to check the status of the OMU
board to be replaced before a replacement. Users need to query and record the OMU board
information, active or standby state, and data synchronization status.
BSC6900 GU
Site Maintenance Guide 8 Replacing Boards and Modules
Issue 07 (2013-06-28) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
96
Prerequisites
l The OMU board to be replaced is not faulty and can perform operation and maintenance
functions.
Context
If the OMU board to be replaced is faulty and cannot perform operation and maintenance
functions, skip the task in this section. Obtain the latest OMU system backup data and replace
the OMU board by referring to 8.18.2 Scenario: Replacing an OMU Board in Single-OMU
Mode, 8.18.3 Scenario: Replacing the Standby OMU in Dual-System Mode, or 8.18.5
Scenario: Replacing Active and Standby OMUs in Dual-System Mode.
Procedure
Step 1 Check and record the OMU routing function status of the OMU board to be replaced.
1. Log in to the OMU.
2. Enter the cd /mbsc/bam/version_a/bin/bam command and press Enter to go to the
directory where the ip_forward.sh script is saved.
3. Enter the chmod +x root_login.sh command and press Enter to make the
ip_forward.sh script executable.
4. Enter the ./ip_forward.sh status command and press Enter to query the status of OMU
route forwarding.
NOTE
Parameter description
l Configuration status indicates the status of OMU route forwarding to be configured.
l Actual status indicates the current status of OMU route forwarding.
l enabled indicates that OMU route forwarding is enabled. disabled indicates that OMU route
forwarding is disabled.
Step 2 Optional: When log in as the user root, skip this step. When the OMU board is an OMUc board,
users need to check and record the Forbid User Root to Log In status of the OMU board to be
replaced.
1. Log in as a common or lgnusr user. For details, see Logging In to the OMU in the BSC6900
GU OMU Administration Guide.
2. Enter the command su and press Enter
3. Enter the root user password and press Enter to switch the user account from common user
or lgnusr user to root user.
4. Enter the cd /mbsc/bam/version_a/bin/bam command and press Enter to switch the
current directory to the directory where the root_login.sh script is saved.
5. Enter the chmod +x root_login.sh command and press Enter to make the root_login.sh
script executable.
6. Enter the ./root_login.sh status command and press Enter to query the status of the root
user login with SSH.
BSC6900 GU
Site Maintenance Guide 8 Replacing Boards and Modules
Issue 07 (2013-06-28) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
97
NOTE
Parameter description:
l Configuration status specifies the status that the user root needs to be set to.
l Actual status means the status of the user root.
l enabled means that the user root is allowed to log in to the OMU. disabled means that the user root is
forbidden to log in to the OMU.
l If the returned result is The script does not support this system!, the operating system of the OMUc board
does not support the Forbid User Root function.
Step 3 Log in to the LMT by referring to Log in to the LMT.
Step 4 Check consistency in the configuration data, version software, and license.
1. Run the MML command ACT CRC to check whether the configuration data of all
BSC6900 host boards and the OMU board is consistent.
Expected result: The returned result shows that the data is consistent.
2. Run the MML command CMP BRDVER to check whether the running versions of all
BSC6900 host boards and the OMU board are consistent.
Expected result: The returned result shows that the versions are consistent.
3. Run the MML command CMP LICENSE to check whether the licenses of all BSC6900
host boards and the OMU board are consistent.
Expected result: The returned result shows that the licenses are consistent.
NOTE
l If the configuration data is inconsistent, resolve it by referring to the handling suggestions in ALM-20736
Data Inconsistency Between OMU and Host.
l If the software versions are inconsistent, resolve it by referring to ALM-20733 Software Version
Inconsistency Between OMU and Host.
l If the licenses are inconsistent, resolve it by referring to ALM-20734 License Inconsistency Between OMU
and Host.
Step 5 Run the MML command LST VER. Query and record the value of OS type.
Step 6 Run the MML command LST TZ. Query and record the time zone and daylight saving
time.
Step 7 Run the MML command LST MBSCMODE. Query and record the OMU mode.
Step 8 Query and record the external gateway IP address of the OMU board to be replaced.
Option Description
If the OMU OS is Dopra Linux or Suse
Linux
1. Log in to the OMU by referring to Logging In
to the OMU.
2. Enter the command route and press Enter.
Query and record the value of Gateway whose
Destination is set to default.
BSC6900 GU
Site Maintenance Guide 8 Replacing Boards and Modules
Issue 07 (2013-06-28) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
98
Option Description
If the OMU OS is Windows
1. Log in to the OMU by referring to Logging In
to the OMU.
2. Choose Start > Run, type cmd, and press
Enter to enter the OMU command mode.
3. Enter the command ipconfig and press Enter.
Query and record the value of Default
Gateway corresponding to External Network
Team.
Step 9 Query the information about the OMU board to be replaced.
l When the board is OMUa/OMUb board, run the MML command DSP OMU, and record the
information in Table 8-2.
Table 8-2 OMU board status information table
Item Setting information example
Computer name OMU_21
Internal network fixed IP 80.168.3.50
External network fixed IP 10.168.172.2
Backup network IP 192.168.3.50
Operational state Active normal
Version XXXXXX
External network virtual IP 10.168.192.5
External network virtual IP mask 255.255.254.0
Internal network virtual IP 80.168.3.40
Internal network virtual IP mask 255.0.0.0
Data-sync state Normal

l When the board is OMUc board, run the DSP OMU and record in Table 8-3. The Backup
network IP is based on the following:
Run the ifconfig bond3 command to query the backup network IP of B_UPDATE0.
Run the ifconfig bond4 command to query the backup network IP of B_UPDATE1.
Table 8-3 OMU board status information table
Item Setting information example
Computer name OMU_21
Internal network fixed IP 80.168.3.50
BSC6900 GU
Site Maintenance Guide 8 Replacing Boards and Modules
Issue 07 (2013-06-28) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
99
Item Setting information example
External network fixed IP 10.168.172.2
Backup network IP of B_UPDATE0 192.168.9.50
Backup network IP of B_UPDATE1 192.168.3.50
Operational state Active normal
Version XXXXXX
External network virtual IP 10.168.192.5
External network virtual IP mask 255.255.254.0
Internal network virtual IP 80.168.3.40
Internal network virtual IP mask 255.0.0.0
Data-sync state Normal

NOTE
l If only one OMU board is configured, Data-sync state is not included in the queried information.
l Query and record the debugging IP address of the OMU board to be replaced.
l If the OMU operating system is Dopra Linux, log in to the OMU and execute ifconfig bond2 to query
the debugging IP address.
l If the OMU operating system is Suse Linux, log in to the OMU and execute ifconfig eth2 to query the
debugging IP address.
l If the OMU operating system is Windows, log in to the OMU and query the debugging IP address
configured in Eth2 properties of Network Connections.
If... Then...
The MPS is configured with two OMU
boards
Perform operations described in Step 10.
The MPS is configured with one OMU
board
Perform operations described in 8.18.2
Scenario: Replacing an OMU Board in
Single-OMU Mode.
Step 10 Run the MML command LST GVNPLOCALIP to query the BSC local IP address, VLAN IDs
for communication between the OMU and VNP, and VLAN IDs for communication between
the OMU and EMS/LMT, VLAN IDs for communication between the OMU and VNP. Then,
record the results.
Step 11 Run the MML command DSP OMUMODULE to query the status of the OMU processes.
BSC6900 GU
Site Maintenance Guide 8 Replacing Boards and Modules
Issue 07 (2013-06-28) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
100
If... Then...
State is Active or Stopped Perform operations described in Step 12.
State is Abnormal Contact Huawei technical support.
Step 12 Check whether the OMU board to be replaced is active or on standby.
If... Then...
The board is in Standby normal state Perform operations described in 8.18.3
Scenario: Replacing the Standby OMU in
Dual-System Mode.
The board is in Active normal state Perform operations described in Step 13.
Step 13 Based on Data-sync state queried in Step 9, do as follows:
If... Then...
Data-sync state is not Data
synchronization is successful
Clear alarms by referring to ALM-20701
OMU Failure Switchover and ALM-20704
OMU Data Synchronization Failure. Go to
Step 14 after the alarms are cleared.
Data-sync state is Data synchronization
is successful
Perform operations described in Step 14.
Step 14 Run the MML command SWP OMU to manually switch over the active and standby OMU
boards. Wait 5 minutes, and run the DSP OMU command to check that the OMU board to be
replaced is in the standby state and Data-sync state is set to Data synchronization is
successful. Replace the OMU board by referring to 8.18.3 Scenario: Replacing the Standby
OMU in Dual-System Mode.
----End
8.18.2 Scenario: Replacing an OMU Board in Single-OMU Mode
This section describes how to replace an OMU board when only one OMU is configured on
BSC6900. In this scenario, OMU operation and maintenance of the host boards are interrupted.
Context
l Replacing an OMU board in single-OMU mode will disconnect the OMU board from the
host boards and interrupt OMU operation and maintenance. System running data during
this period of time will be lost.
Replacing an OMU board in single-OMU mode occurs in one the following scenarios:
BSC6900 GU
Site Maintenance Guide 8 Replacing Boards and Modules
Issue 07 (2013-06-28) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
101
Scenario: Old and New OMU Boards Running the Same OS
This section describes how to replace an OMU board of a BSC6900 configured with only one
OMU board when the OMU board to be replaced and the new OMU board run the same operating
system (OS).
Prerequisites
l You have logged in to the LMT. For detailed operations, see Logging In to and Logging
Out of the LMT.
l A new OMU board is ready, and it is of the same type as the board to be replaced.
NOTE
The OMUc board only runs the Dopra Linux OS.
Context
If the OMU board to be replaced is faulty and cannot undergo operation and maintenance, skip
procedures for backing up and saving the data and obtain the latest backup data for restoring the
data. The following procedures take a functional OMU board as an example.
CAUTION
l To protect the OMU board from the Electrostatic Discharge (ESD), wear an ESD wrist strap
and insert its connector into the ESD socket on the cabinet before replacing the board. For
detailed operations, see Wearing an ESD Wrist Strap. If an ESD wrist strap or ground point
is unavailable, wear a pair of ESD gloves instead.
Procedure
l Back up OMU system data to an OMU hard disk.
1. Run the MML command BKP DB to back up system files to the specified path. In
this step, set Path of Backup File and File Name to appropriate values.
l Save the performance configuration files, SSL certificate files, license files, and OMU
system data to the LMT PC.
1. Start the file manager on the LMT. For detailed operations, seeFile Manager.
2. Select the files to be downloaded in the corresponding directories and click
Download.
NOTE
Run the MML command LST OMUAREA to query the OMU active workspace. Assuming that
the OMU active workspace is version_a:
l Performance configuration files are saved in the directory \bam\version_a\ftp\DefaultMeas.
Only DefaultMeas_Active.xml and DefaultMeas_Standby.xml need to be backed up.
l SSL certificate files are saved in the directory \bam\version_a\ftp\cert.
l License files are saved in the directory \bam\version_a\ftp\license.
3. Remove the OMU board to be replaced and insert a new one. For detailed operations,
see Replacing an OMU board that is configured with new ejector levers or
Replacing an OMU board that is configured with old ejector levers.
BSC6900 GU
Site Maintenance Guide 8 Replacing Boards and Modules
Issue 07 (2013-06-28) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
102
l Optional: Replacing an OMU board that is configured with new ejector levers
1. Unscrew the captive screws on the OMU board counterclockwise, as shown in part A
of Figure 8-7.
Figure 8-7 Removing an OMU board that is configured with new ejector levers

NOTE
The preceding figure takes an OMUa/OMUb board as an example. The procedure for an OMUc
board is similar.
2. Optional: If the board is an OMUc board, gently press the PWRBTN button.
3. Press and hold the two locking buttons, flip outward the ejector levers on the OMU
board panel to unlock them, as shown in part B of Figure 8-7.
4. Remove the Ethernet cable, mouse cable, keyboard cable, and monitor cable (if
configured) from the OMU board after the OFFLINE LED flashes fast and then is
steady blue.
5. Fully rotate the ejector levers outwards of the OMU board to separate it from the
backplane. Remove the OMU board along the guide rails, as shown in part C of Figure
8-7.
BSC6900 GU
Site Maintenance Guide 8 Replacing Boards and Modules
Issue 07 (2013-06-28) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
103
6. Press and hold the two locking buttons of the new board, flip outward the ejector levers
to separate them from the self-locking latch, and rotate them until they cannot be
rotated, as shown in part A of Figure 8-8.
7. Slide the new board along the guide rails into the subrack, as shown in part B of Figure
8-8.
Figure 8-8 Installing an OMU board that is configured with new ejector levers

NOTE
l The preceding figure takes an OMUa/OMUb board as an example. The procedure for an
OMUc board is similar.
l The OMUa/OMUb board can be installed in slots 0 to 3, slots 20 to 23, or slots 24 to 27 in
the MPS at the bottom of the MPR. Slots 20 to 23 are recommended.
l The OMUc boards can be installed in slots 0 to 3, slots 20 to 23, or slots 24 to 27 in the
MPS at the bottom of the MPR. Slots 24 to 25 are recommended.
8. Flip inward the ejector levers of the OMU board until they are in position, as shown
in part C of Figure 8-8.
9. Secure the screws on the OMU board, as shown in part D of Figure 8-8.
The new board automatically loads software and configuration data, and the RUN
LED blinks 0.125 second on and 0.125 second off.
10. Connect the cables by referring to the labels.
BSC6900 GU
Site Maintenance Guide 8 Replacing Boards and Modules
Issue 07 (2013-06-28) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
104
l Optional: Replacing an OMU board that is configured with old ejector levers
1. Unscrew the captive screws on the OMU board counterclockwise, as shown in part A
of Figure 8-9.
Figure 8-9 Removing an OMU board that is configured with old ejector levers

NOTE
The preceding figure takes an OMUa/OMUb board as an example. The procedure for an OMUc
board is similar.
2. Optional: If the board is an OMUc board, gently press the PWRBTN button.
3. Flip outward the ejector levers of the OMU board, as shown in part B of Figure 8-9.
4. Remove the Ethernet cable, mouse cable, keyboard cable, and monitor cable (if
configured) from the OMU board after the OFFLINE LED flashes fast and then is
steady blue.
5. Fully rotate the ejector levers outwards of the OMU board to separate it from the
backplane. Remove the OMU board along the guide rails, as shown in part C of Figure
8-9.
BSC6900 GU
Site Maintenance Guide 8 Replacing Boards and Modules
Issue 07 (2013-06-28) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
105
6. Flip outward the ejector levers of the new OMU board, as shown in part A of Figure
8-10.
7. Slide the new board along the guide rails into the subrack, as shown in part B of Figure
8-10.
Figure 8-10 Installing an OMU board that is configured with old ejector levers

NOTE
l The preceding figure takes an OMUa/OMUb board as an example. The procedure for an
OMUc board is similar.
l The OMUa/OMUb board can be installed in slots 0 to 3, slots 20 to 23, or slots 24 to 27 in
the MPS at the bottom of the MPR. Slots 20 to 23 are recommended.
l The OMUc boards can be installed in slots 0 to 3, slots 20 to 23, or slots 24 to 27 in the
MPS at the bottom of the MPR. Slots 24 to 25 are recommended.
8. Flip inward the ejector levers of the OMU board until they are in position, as shown
in part C of Figure 8-10.
9. Secure the screws on the OMU board, as shown in part D of Figure 8-10.
The new board automatically loads software and configuration data, and the RUN
LED blinks 0.125 second on and 0.125 second off.
10. Connect the cables by referring to the labels.
BSC6900 GU
Site Maintenance Guide 8 Replacing Boards and Modules
Issue 07 (2013-06-28) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
106
l Install OMU applications and change IP addresses of the new OMU.
1. Install OMU applications as instructed in Table 8-4.
Table 8-4 Criteria for operations (1)
If... Then...
The OMU OS is
Dopra Linux or Suse
Linux
1. Optional: Uninstall the OMU applications on the new
OMU board.
NOTE
If the new OMU board is installed with the OMU applications,
perform this step to uninstall the OMU applications of an
earlier version.
If the new OMU board is not installed with the OMU
applicaitons, skip this step and proceed to b.
a. Log in to the OMU using the external network fixed
IP address.
b. Enter the /etc/rc.d/omud stop command and press
Enter to stop the omud.
c. Enter uninstall_bam in any directory of the OMU
and press Enter.
d. The message Uninstall standby area. input Y to
continue; input E to exit. is displayed. Enter Y to
uninstall the OMU applications on the standby
workspace of the standby OMU.
e. Enter the uninstall_bam command and press
Enter.
f. The message Uninstall main area. input Y to
continue; input E to exit. is displayed. Enter Y to
uninstall the OMU applications on the active
workspace of the standby OMU.
2. Install OMU applications as instructed in Install OMU
applications of Scenario: Old OMU Running Suse
Linux and New OMU Running Dopra Linux.
BSC6900 GU
Site Maintenance Guide 8 Replacing Boards and Modules
Issue 07 (2013-06-28) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
107
If... Then...
The OMU OS is
Windows
1. Optional: Uninstall the OMU applications on the new
OMU board.
NOTE
If the new OMU board is installed with the OMU applications,
perform this step to uninstall the OMU applications of an
earlier version.
If the new OMU board is not installed with the OMU
applicaitons, skip this step and proceed to b.
a. Log in to the OMU using the external network fixed
IP address.
b. Type the net stop omud command and press
Enter to stop the omud.
c. Click Start > Run and the Run interface is
displayed.
d. In the Run interface, run the uninstall_bam
command and click OK.
e. Type Y, and press Enter until the Uninstall OMU
succeed! message is displayed.
f. Go to 4 after uninstalling the OMU applications in
the standby workspace. Perform to 5 uninstall the
OMU applications in the active workspace. This
task is completed.
2. Install OMU applications as instructed in Install OMU
applications of Scenario: Old OMU Running
Windows and New OMU Running Dopra Linux.

2. Change IP addresses of the new OMU so that they match those of the replaced OMU
board, as instructed in Table 8-5.
BSC6900 GU
Site Maintenance Guide 8 Replacing Boards and Modules
Issue 07 (2013-06-28) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
108
Table 8-5 Criteria for operations (2)
If... Then...
The OMU OS is
Dopra Linux
1. Type the command cd /mbsc/bam/version_a/bin/
bam and press Enter to navigate to the directory
containing omutool.
2. Change the OMU IP addresses by referring to the IP
addresses of the replaced OMU board.
l The ./omutool innercard IP address command is
used to change the fixed internal IP address.
l The ./omutool innervip IP address command is
used to change the virtual internal IP address.
l The ./omutool extercard IP address mask
(gateway) command is used to change the fixed
external IP address and mask.
l The ./omutool extervip IP address subnet mask
(gateway) command is used to change the virtual
external IP address and subnet mask.
l Use the command ./omutool backupcard IP
address to change the backup channel IP address of
the active and standby OMUs of the ETH3-
UPDATE Ethernet adapter on an OMUa/OMUb
board.
l Use the command ./omutool
backupcard_for_omuc IP address to change the
backup channel IP address of the active and standby
OMUs of the B_UPDATE0 Ethernet adapter on an
OMUc board.
l Use the command ./omutool
backupcard_for_omua IP address to change the
backup channel IP address of the active and standby
OMUs of the B_UPDATE1 Ethernet adapter on an
OMUc board.
l The ./omutool debugcard IP address is used to
change the commissioning IP address.
NOTE
Changing the debugging IP address immediately
disconnects the LMT PC from the OMU board. Use the
new debugging IP address to connect the LMT PC to the
OMU board again.
l Optional: Only when BSC6900 is configured with
the GBFD-511701 Radio Measurement Data
Interface for Navigation feature and the BSC local
IP address is used for communication between the
OMU and VNP, you need to reconfigure the BSC
local IP address, VLAN IDs for communication
between the OMU and VNP, and VLAN IDs for
communication between the OMU and EMS/LMT
based on "OMU Ethernet Adapter Team IP Address
BSC6900 GU
Site Maintenance Guide 8 Replacing Boards and Modules
Issue 07 (2013-06-28) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
109
If... Then...
Installation Information." For details, see
Configuring Radio Measurement Data Interface for
Navigation in GBSS&RAN Feature Activation
Guide.
3. Type the command /etc/rc.d/omud start and press
Enter to start the omud process.
BSC6900 GU
Site Maintenance Guide 8 Replacing Boards and Modules
Issue 07 (2013-06-28) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
110
If... Then...
The OMU OS is Suse
Linux
1. Type the command cd /BSC6000/data/mbsc/bam/
version_a/bin/bam and press Enter to navigate to the
directory containing omutool.
2. Change the OMU IP addresses by referring to the IP
addresses of the replaced OMU board.
l The ./omutool innercard IP address command is
used to change the fixed internal IP address.
l The ./omutool innervip IP address command is
used to change the virtual internal IP address.
l The ./omutool extercard IP address mask
(gateway) command is used to change the fixed
external IP address and mask.
l The ./omutool extervip IP address subnet mask
(gateway) command is used to change the virtual
external IP address and subnet mask.
l Use the command ./omutool backupcard IP
address to change the backup channel IP address of
the active and standby OMUs of the ETH3-
UPDATE Ethernet adapter on an OMUa/OMUb
board.
l The ./omutool debugcard IP address is used to
change the commissioning IP address.
NOTE
Changing the debugging IP address immediately
disconnects the LMT PC from the OMU board. Use the
new debugging IP address to connect the LMT PC to the
OMU board again.
l Optional: Only when BSC6900 is configured with
the GBFD-511701 Radio Measurement Data
Interface for Navigation feature and the BSC local
IP address is used for communication between the
OMU and VNP, you need to reconfigure the BSC
local IP address, VLAN IDs for communication
between the OMU and VNP, and VLAN IDs for
communication between the OMU and EMS/LMT
based on "OMU Ethernet Adapter Team IP Address
Installation Information." For details, see
Configuring Radio Measurement Data Interface for
Navigation in GBSS&RAN Feature Activation
Guide.
3. Type the command /etc/rc.d/omud start and press
Enter to start the omud process.
BSC6900 GU
Site Maintenance Guide 8 Replacing Boards and Modules
Issue 07 (2013-06-28) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
111
If... Then...
The OMU OS is
Windows
1. Choose Start > Run, type cmd, and press Enter to
enter the OMU command mode.
2. Type the command cd /d d:\mbsc\bam\version_a\bin
\bam and press Enter to navigate to the directory
containing omutool.
3. Change the OMU IP addresses by referring to the IP
addresses of the replaced OMU board.
l The omutool innercard IP address command is
used to change the fixed internal IP address.
l The omutool innervip IP address is used to change
the virtual internal IP address.
l The omutool extercard IP address subnet mask
(gateway IP address) command is used to change
the fixed external IP address and subnet mask.
l The ./omutool extervip IP address subnet mask
(gateway IP address) command is used to change
the virtual external IP address and subnet mask.
l Use the command omutool backupcard IP
address to change the backup channel IP address of
the active and standby OMUs of the ETH3-
UPDATE Ethernet adapter on an OMUa/OMUb
board.
l The omutool debugcard IP address command is
used to change the commissioning IP address.
NOTE
Changing the debugging IP address immediately
disconnects the LMT PC from the OMU board. Use the
new debugging IP address to connect the LMT PC to the
OMU board again.
4. Type the command net start omud to start the omud
progress.

3. Remove the debugging Ethernet cable from the OMU board panel.
l Install the operating system patch and upgrade the Ethernet adapter drive as shown in Table
8-6.
BSC6900 GU
Site Maintenance Guide 8 Replacing Boards and Modules
Issue 07 (2013-06-28) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
112
Table 8-6 Criteria for operations (3)
If... Then...
The OMU OS is Suse
Linux
Log in to http://support.huawei.com/support/ and choose
Software Center > Version Software > Wireless Product
Line > SingleRAN > SRAN O&M tools to download the
OMU Driver Upgrade CHS ***.rar and get Upgrade Guide
to OMU Linux Ethernet Adapter Driver and OMU driver
upgrade tool. Please refer to BSC6900 Upgrade Guide to OMU
O&M Panel Adapter Driver to upgrade the OMU adapter
driver.
NOTE
Suse Linux Operating System has no patch.
The OMU OS is
Windows
Download and decpmpress the Upgrade Guide to OMU
Windows Operating System and Ethernet Adapter Driver.
rarfile from the release document. Decompress the package
and obtain the Upgrade Guide to OMU Windows Operating
System and Ethernet Adapter Driver.

l Restore OMU data.
1. Connect the LMT PC to the OMU external network.
2. Log in to the LMT. For detailed operations, see Logging In to and Logging Out of the
LMT. On the LMT, start the file manager. For detailed operations, see File Manager.
3. Select the target file on the LMT PC and click Upload to upload the saved OMU
system data to the active workspace. Ensure that the upload path is the same as the
backup data download path.
4. Perform operations described in Table 8-7 based on the OMU OS type.
BSC6900 GU
Site Maintenance Guide 8 Replacing Boards and Modules
Issue 07 (2013-06-28) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
113
Table 8-7 Criteria for operations (4)
If... Then...
The OMU OS is
Dopra Linux
1. Log in to the OMU using the external network fixed IP
address. For detailed operations, see Logging In to the
OMU.
2. Type the command /etc/rc.d/omud stop and press
Enter to stop the omud process.
3. Type the command cd /mbsc/bam/common/services
and press Enter to navigate to the directory containing
the omu_backup_linker tool.
4. Type the command ./omu_backup_linker and press
Enter to start the omu_backup_linker tool.
5. A message is displayed "Please input a valid
bkp_res_type :." Type restore and press Enter.
6. A message is displayed "Please input a valid
backup file pathname : ." Type the backup
file save path and the file name and press Enter. The
system starts to restore data. A message will be
displayed showing success or failure. For example,
"Restore OMU database succeed!" may be
displayed.
7. Type the command /etc/rc.d/omud start and press
Enter to start the omud process.
The OMU OS is Suse
Linux
1. Log in to the OMU using the external network fixed IP
address. For detailed operations, see Logging In to the
OMU.
2. Type the command /etc/rc.d/omud stop and press
Enter to stop the omud process.
3. Type the command cd /BSC6000/data/mbsc/bam/
common/services and press Enter to navigate to the
directory containing the omu_backup_linker tool.
4. Type the command ./omu_backup_linker and press
Enter to start the omu_backup_linker tool.
5. A message is displayed "Please input a valid
bkp_res_type :." Type restore and press Enter.
6. A message is displayed "Please input a valid
backup file pathname : ." Type the backup
file save path and the file name and press Enter. The
system starts to restore data. A message will be
displayed showing success or failure. For example,
"Restore OMU database succeed!" may be
displayed.
7. Type the command /etc/rc.d/omud start and press
Enter to start the omud process.
BSC6900 GU
Site Maintenance Guide 8 Replacing Boards and Modules
Issue 07 (2013-06-28) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
114
If... Then...
The OMU OS is
Windows
1. Log in to the OMU using the external network fixed IP
address. For detailed operations, see Logging In to the
OMU.
2. Choose Start > Run, type cmd, and press Enter to
enter the OMU command mode.
3. Type the command net stop omud to stop the omud
progress.
4. Type the command cd /d d:\mbsc\bam\common
\services and press Enter to navigate to the directory
containing the omu_backup_linker tool.
5. Type the command omu_backup_linker.exe and press
Enter to start the omu_backup_linker tool.
6. A message is displayed "Please input a valid
bkp_res_type :." Type restore and press Enter.
7. Type the backup file save path and the file name and
press Enter. The system starts to restore data. A
message will be displayed showing success or failure.
For example, "Restore OMU database
succeed!" may be displayed.
8. Type the command net start omud to start the omud
progress.

l Go to 8.18.6 Common Operation for Replacing OMU Board.
----End
Scenario: Old OMU Board Running Dopra Linux and New OMU Board Running
Suse Linux/Windows
This section describes how to replace an OMU board of a BSC6900 configured with only one
OMU board when the OMU board to be replaced runs the Dopra Linux operating system (OS)
and the new OMU board runs the Suse Linux/Windows OS.
Prerequisites
l You have logged in to the LMT. For detailed operations, see Logging In to and Logging
Out of the LMT.
l A new OMU board is ready, and it is of the same type as the board to be replaced.
NOTE
The OMUc board only runs the Dopra Linux OS.
l A USB installation disk has been prepared. For detailed operations, see Preparing a USB
Storage Device. The operation type is set to Install and OMU applications and patches are
installed during the preparation.
Context
When the new OMU board runs a different OS from that of the OMU board to be replaced, it is
recommended that you switch the OS of the new OMU board to that of the old OMU board.
BSC6900 GU
Site Maintenance Guide 8 Replacing Boards and Modules
Issue 07 (2013-06-28) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
115
This takes care of the user operation habit. To meet special requirements, do not switch the OS
but directly install OMU applications on the new OMU board by referring to Install OMU
applications of the new OMU. of Scenario: Old and New OMU Boards Running the Same
OS.
If the OMU board to be replaced is faulty and cannot undergo operation and maintenance, skip
procedures for backing up and saving the data and obtain the latest backup data for restoring the
data. The following procedures take a functional OMU board as an example.
CAUTION
l To protect the OMU board from the Electrostatic Discharge (ESD), wear an ESD wrist strap
and insert its connector into the ESD socket on the cabinet before replacing the board. For
detailed operations, see Wearing an ESD Wrist Strap. If an ESD wrist strap or ground point
is unavailable, wear a pair of ESD gloves instead.
Procedure
l Back up OMU system data to an OMU hard disk.
1. Run the MML command BKP DB to back up system files to the specified path. In
this step, set Path of Backup File and File Name to appropriate values.
l Save the performance configuration files, SSL certificate files, license files, and OMU
system data to the LMT PC.
1. Start the file manager on the LMT. For detailed operations, seeFile Manager.
2. Select the files to be downloaded in the corresponding directories and click
Download.
NOTE
Run the MML command LST OMUAREA to query the OMU active workspace. Assuming that
the OMU active workspace is version_a:
l Performance configuration files are saved in the directory \bam\version_a\ftp\DefaultMeas.
Only DefaultMeas_Active.xml and DefaultMeas_Standby.xml need to be backed up.
l SSL certificate files are saved in the directory \bam\version_a\ftp\cert.
l License files are saved in the directory \bam\version_a\ftp\license.
l Remove the OMU board to be replaced and insert a new one. For detailed operations, see
Replacing an OMU board that is configured with new ejector levers or Replacing an
OMU board that is configured with old ejector levers.
l Use the USB installation disk to switch the OMU OS and install OMU applications.
1. Optional: Ensure that the BIOS boot sequence of the OMU board is set to boot from
the USB disk. For detailed operations, see Setting the First Boot Device of the OMU
to USB.
2. Insert the prepared USB installation disk into any USB port on the OMU panel.
3. Remove and insert the OMU board to reset it.
NOTE
After the OMU board restarts, it automatically installs OS and software.
4. Wait 1 to 2 minutes and then use the USB flash drive to install the OMU operating
system. Check the status of indicators on the OMU board panel to determine whether
the OMU operating system is installed successfully.
BSC6900 GU
Site Maintenance Guide 8 Replacing Boards and Modules
Issue 07 (2013-06-28) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
116
If only the operating system is to be installed on the OMU, check the indicator
status. See Table 8-8.
If the operating system and applications are to be installed on the OMU, check the
indicator status. See Table 8-9.
NOTE
If the status of the indicators differs from this, the OMU cannot identify the USB flash drive. When
this occurs, prepare another USB flash drive. Alternatively, copy the data in the original USB flash
drive to a new USB flash drive, and then reinstall the OMU operating system.
For information about how much time will be consumed during the OMU operating system
installation, see Table 1 in Preparing a USB Storage Device.
Table 8-8 Status of the indicators on the OMU board panel during the OMU operating
system installation
Board Installation
Procedure
Successful
Installation
Failed
Installation
OMUc l The RUN
indicator
blinks.
l The ALM
indicator
blinks.
l The ACT
indicator
blinks.
l The OFFLINE
indicator is off.
l The RUN
indicator
blinks.
l The ALM
indicator is off.
l The ACT
indicator is off.
l The OFFLINE
indicator
blinks.
l The RUN
indicator is off.
l The ALM
indicator
blinks.
l The ACT
indicator is off.
l The OFFLINE
indicator
blinks.

Table 8-9 Status of indicators on the OMU board panel during the OMU operating
system and OMU applications installation
Board Installation
Procedure
Successful
Installation
Failed
Installation
OMUc l The RUN
indicator
blinks.
l The ALM
indicator
blinks.
l The ACT
indicator
blinks.
l The OFFLINE
indicator is off.
l The RUN
indicator
blinks.
l The ALM
indicator is
steady on or
off.
l The ACT
indicator is
steady on or
off.
l The OFFLINE
indicator is off.
l The RUN
indicator
blinks.
l The ALM
indicator
blinks.
l The ACT
indicator is off.
l The OFFLINE
indicator is off.

BSC6900 GU
Site Maintenance Guide 8 Replacing Boards and Modules
Issue 07 (2013-06-28) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
117
NOTE
l When using an USB installation disk with the operation type set to Install, you must restore the
OMU data.
l When using an USB installation disk with the operation type set to Switch, you do not need to
restore the OMU data.
5. Optional: Only when BSC6900 is configured with the GBFD-511701 Radio
Measurement Data Interface for Navigation feature and the BSC local IP address
is used for communication between the OMU and VNP, you need to reconfigure the
BSC local IP address, VLAN IDs for communication between the OMU and VNP,
and VLAN IDs for communication between the OMU and EMS/LMT based on "OMU
Ethernet Adapter Team IP Address Installation Information." For details, see
Configuring Radio Measurement Data Interface for Navigation in GBSS&RAN
Feature Activation Guide.
l Restore OMU data.
1. Log in to the LMT. For detailed operations, see Logging In to and Logging Out of the
LMT. On the LMT, start the file manager. For detailed operations, see File Manager.
2. Select the target file on the LMT PC and click Upload to upload the saved OMU
system data to the active workspace. Ensure that the upload path is the same as the
backup data download path.
3. Log in to the OMU using the external network fixed IP address. For detailed
operations, see Logging In to the OMU.
4. Type the command /etc/rc.d/omud stop and press Enter to stop the omud process.
5. Type the command cd /mbsc/bam/common/services and press Enter to navigate to
the directory containing the omu_backup_linker tool.
6. Type the command ./omu_backup_linker and press Enter to start the
omu_backup_linker tool.
7. A message is displayed "Please input a valid bkp_res_type :." Type
restore and press Enter.
8. A message is displayed "Please input a valid backup file
pathname : ." Type the backup file save path and the file name and press Enter.
The system starts to restore data. A message will be displayed showing success or
failure. For example, "Restore OMU database succeed!" may be displayed.
9. Type the command /etc/rc.d/omud start and press Enter to start the omud process.
l Go to 8.18.6 Common Operation for Replacing OMU Board.
----End
Scenario: Old OMU Running Suse Linux and New OMU Running Dopra Linux
This section describes how to replace the OMU on BSC6900 with a single OMU when the
operating system on the OMU to be replaced is Suse Linux and that on the new OMU is Dopra
Linux.
Prerequisites
l You have logged in to the LMT. For detailed operations, see Logging In to and Logging
Out of the LMT.
l A new OMU board is ready, and it is of the same type as the board to be replaced.
BSC6900 GU
Site Maintenance Guide 8 Replacing Boards and Modules
Issue 07 (2013-06-28) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
118
NOTE
The OMUc board only runs the Dopra Linux OS.
Context
When the new OMU board runs a different OS from that of the OMU board to be replaced, it is
recommended that you switch the OS of the new OMU board to that of the old OMU board.
This takes care of the user operation habit. To meet special requirements, do not switch the OS
but directly install OMU applications on the new OMU board by referring to Install OMU
applications of the new OMU. of Scenario: Old and New OMU Boards Running the Same
OS.
If the OMU board to be replaced is faulty and cannot undergo operation and maintenance, skip
procedures for backing up and saving the data and obtain the latest backup data for restoring the
data. The following procedures take a functional OMU board as an example.
CAUTION
l To protect the OMU board from the Electrostatic Discharge (ESD), wear an ESD wrist strap
and insert its connector into the ESD socket on the cabinet before replacing the board. For
detailed operations, see Wearing an ESD Wrist Strap. If an ESD wrist strap or ground point
is unavailable, wear a pair of ESD gloves instead.
Procedure
l Back up OMU system data to an OMU hard disk.
1. Run the MML command BKP DB to back up system files to the specified path. In
this step, set Path of Backup File and File Name to appropriate values.
l Save the performance configuration files, SSL certificate files, license files, and OMU
system data to the LMT PC.
1. Start the file manager on the LMT. For detailed operations, seeFile Manager.
2. Select the files to be downloaded in the corresponding directories and click
Download.
NOTE
Run the MML command LST OMUAREA to query the OMU active workspace. Assuming that
the OMU active workspace is version_a:
l Performance configuration files are saved in the directory \bam\version_a\ftp\DefaultMeas.
Only DefaultMeas_Active.xml and DefaultMeas_Standby.xml need to be backed up.
l SSL certificate files are saved in the directory \bam\version_a\ftp\cert.
l License files are saved in the directory \bam\version_a\ftp\license.
l Install Suse Linux.
1. On the LMT PC, use EasyInstall to prepare an installation source for Suse Linux. For
details, see Preparations for Reinstalling the OMU Operating System and Creating
the Operating System Installation Source.
2. Connect the local computer to the debugging Ethernet port on each of the new OMUs.
BSC6900 GU
Site Maintenance Guide 8 Replacing Boards and Modules
Issue 07 (2013-06-28) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
119
3. Remove the OMU board to be replaced and insert the new one. For detailed operations,
see Replacing an OMU board that is configured with new ejector levers or
Replacing an OMU board that is configured with old ejector levers.
4. Use EasyInstall to install Suse Linux. For details, see Installing the OMU Operating
System by Using the EasyInstall Software.
l Install OMU applications.
1. Set the IP address of the local computer to the same network segment as the
commissioning IP address of the OMU.
2. Connect to the debugging port of the OMU, and log in to the OMU through the
commissioning IP address. For details, see Uploading the OMU Application
Installation Package to the OMU. (The file upload path is /BSC6000/data/mbsc/
upgrade.)
3. Use the commissioning IP address to switch to the directory where the installation
package is saved. For details, see Logging In to the OMU.
If the operating system is Dopra Linux, assume that OMU applications installation
package install_bam.sh is saved in /mbsc/upgrade/VXXXRXXXCXX/install/
setup. Enter the following command and press Enter.
cd /mbsc/upgrade/VXXXRXXXCXX/install/setup
If the operating system is Suse Linux, assume that OMU applications installation
package install_bam.sh is saved in /BSC6000/data/mbsc/upgrade/
VXXXRXXXCXX/install/setup. Enter the following command and press
Enter.
cd /BSC6000/data/mbsc/upgrade/VXXXRXXXCXX/install/setup
4. Run the chmod +x ./install_bam.sh command to acquire the authority to run the ./
install_bam.sh command.
5. Enter the ./install_bam.sh command and press Enter. The system prompts you to
type the product mode, as shown:
[2011-05-03 10:12:32] software integrality verify begin...
[2011-05-03 10:12:42] software integrality verify end...
# The run mode of the product
# GO:GSM only
# UO:UMTS only
# GU:GSM and UMTS
# Please select one mode to install.
Please input a valid run_mode :
NOTE
The software integrity of the OMU applications is checked before they are automatically installed.
The OMU applications can be installed only if the check passes.
6. Enter the product running mode and press Enter. The system prompts you to type the
office name, as shown:
# The name of office
# The name suggest range from 5 to 32 characters.
# The characters suggest be letters, digits, "-"or "_".
Please input a valid office_name :
7. Enter the office name and press Enter. The system prompts you to type the language,
as shown:
# The OMU language version. eg: eng/chs
Please input a valid version :
8. Enter the language and press Enter. The system prompts you to type the admin
password, as shown:
BSC6900 GU
Site Maintenance Guide 8 Replacing Boards and Modules
Issue 07 (2013-06-28) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
120
# The "admin" user's password of OMU service.
# The password must range from 6 to 32 characters and consist of only
letters and figures.
# Do not forget the password.
# You can change the password later, but this password should be provided
first.
Please input a valid admin_password :
NOTE
The admin password is the initial password for the administrator to log in to the LMT.
9. Enter the admin password and press Enter. The system prompts you to type the FTP
password, as shown:
# The ftp user's password of OMU service
# The password must range from 6 to 32(characters) and consist of only
letters and figures.
# Do not forget the password.
# You can change it later, but this password should be provided first.
Please input a valid ftp_password :
NOTE
The FTP password is customized. After the OMU applications are installed, you can access
the FTP service with the FTP password.
10. Enter the FTP password and press Enter. The system prompts you to type the external
virtual IP address, as shown:
# The extranet IP address, subnet mask, and default gateway.
# example: 192.168.1.9/255.255.255.0;192.168.1.1
Please input a valid virtual_extranet_config :
NOTE
l If a fixed external network IP address has been configured for the OMU to be replaced, the
entered external network virtual IP address must be in the same network segment as the fixed
external network IP address for the OMU to be replaced.
l If a fixed external network IP address has not been configured for the OMU to be replaced, the
entered external network virtual IP address can be set based on the actual plan.
11. Enter the external virtual IP address and press Enter. The system prompts you to type
the OMU system type, as shown:
# The OMU system type. eg: Single/Dual
# Single:Install stand-alone system
# Dual:Install dual-OMU system.
The dual-OMU system can effeciently increase the reliability of the OMU
system.
Please input a valid install_type :
12. Enter the OMU installation type based on the field configuration and press Enter.
Table 1 describes the OMU installation types.
Table 8-10 Description
Parameter Description
Single When the BSC6900 is configured with
one OMU board, install the OMU
applications on the board in single-
OMU mode.
Dual When the BSC6900 is configured with
two OMU boards, install OMU
applications on the board in dual-OMU
mode.
BSC6900 GU
Site Maintenance Guide 8 Replacing Boards and Modules
Issue 07 (2013-06-28) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
121

13. The system asks you whether to continue with the installation, as shown:
Please affirm input information. input Y to continue; input E to exit. ->
14. Enter Y to install the OMU applications. When the messageInstall OMU
succeed! is displayed, the OMU applications are successfully installed.
l Change the IP addresses of the new OMUs to those of the replaced OMUs.
1. Type the command cd /BSC6000/data/mbsc/bam/version_a/bin/bam and press
Enter to navigate to the directory containing omutool.
2. Change the OMU IP addresses by referring to the IP addresses of the replaced OMU
board.
The ./omutool innercard IP address command is used to change the fixed internal
IP address.
The ./omutool innervip IP address command is used to change the virtual internal
IP address.
The ./omutool extercard IP address mask (gateway) command is used to change
the fixed external IP address and mask.
The ./omutool extervip IP address subnet mask (gateway) command is used to
change the virtual external IP address and subnet mask.
Use the command ./omutool backupcard IP address to change the backup channel
IP address of the active and standby OMUs of the ETH3-UPDATE Ethernet
adapter on an OMUa/OMUb board.
The ./omutool debugcard IP address is used to change the commissioning IP
address.
NOTE
Changing the debugging IP address immediately disconnects the LMT PC from the OMU board.
Use the new debugging IP address to connect the LMT PC to the OMU board again.
Optional: Only when BSC6900 is configured with the GBFD-511701 Radio
Measurement Data Interface for Navigation feature and the BSC local IP
address is used for communication between the OMU and VNP, you need to
reconfigure the BSC local IP address, VLAN IDs for communication between the
OMU and VNP, and VLAN IDs for communication between the OMU and EMS/
LMT based on "OMU Ethernet Adapter Team IP Address Installation
Information." For details, see Configuring Radio Measurement Data Interface for
Navigation in GBSS&RAN Feature Activation Guide.
3. Type the command /etc/rc.d/omud start and press Enter to start the omud process.
4. Remove the debugging Ethernet cable from the OMU board panel.
l Install the operating system patch and upgrade the Ethernet adapter drive. Log in to http://
support.huawei.com/support/ and choose Software Center > Version Software >
Wireless Product Line > SingleRAN > SRAN O&M tools to download the OMU Driver
Upgrade CHS ***.rar and get Upgrade Guide to OMU Linux Ethernet Adapter Driver
and OMU driver upgrade tool. Please refer to BSC6900 Upgrade Guide to OMU O&M
Panel Adapter Driver to upgrade the OMU adapter driver.
NOTE
Suse Linux has no operation system patch.
l Recover the OMU data.
1. Connect the LMT PC to the OMU external network.
BSC6900 GU
Site Maintenance Guide 8 Replacing Boards and Modules
Issue 07 (2013-06-28) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
122
2. Log in to the LMT. For detailed operations, see Logging In to and Logging Out of the
LMT. On the LMT, start the file manager. For detailed operations, see File Manager.
3. Select the target file on the LMT PC and click Upload to upload the saved OMU
system data to the active workspace. Ensure that the upload path is the same as the
backup data download path.
4. Log in to the OMU using the external network fixed IP address. For detailed
operations, see Logging In to the OMU.
5. Type the command /etc/rc.d/omud stop and press Enter to stop the omud process.
6. Type the command cd /BSC6000/data/mbsc/bam/common/services and press
Enter to navigate to the directory containing the omu_backup_linker tool.
7. Type the command ./omu_backup_linker and press Enter to start the
omu_backup_linker tool.
8. A message is displayed "Please input a valid bkp_res_type :." Type
restore and press Enter.
9. A message is displayed "Please input a valid backup file
pathname : ." Type the backup file save path and the file name and press Enter.
The system starts to restore data. A message will be displayed showing success or
failure. For example, "Restore OMU database succeed!" may be displayed.
10. Type the command /etc/rc.d/omud start and press Enter to start the omud process.
l Go to 8.18.6 Common Operation for Replacing OMU Board.
----End
Scenario: Old OMU Running Windows and New OMU Running Dopra Linux
This section describes how to replace the OMU on BSC6900 with a single OMU when the
operating system on the OMU to be replaced is Windows and that on the new OMU is Dopra
Linux.
Prerequisites
l You have logged in to the LMT. For detailed operations, see Logging In to and Logging
Out of the LMT.
l A new OMU board is ready, and it is of the same type as the board to be replaced.
NOTE
The OMUc board only runs the Dopra Linux OS.
Context
When the new OMU board runs a different OS from that of the OMU board to be replaced, it is
recommended that you switch the OS of the new OMU board to that of the old OMU board.
This takes care of the user operation habit. To meet special requirements, do not switch the OS
but directly install OMU applications on the new OMU board by referring to Install OMU
applications of the new OMU. of Scenario: Old and New OMU Boards Running the Same
OS.
If the OMU board to be replaced is faulty and cannot undergo operation and maintenance, skip
procedures for backing up and saving the data and obtain the latest backup data for restoring the
data. The following procedures take a functional OMU board as an example.
BSC6900 GU
Site Maintenance Guide 8 Replacing Boards and Modules
Issue 07 (2013-06-28) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
123
CAUTION
l To protect the OMU board from the Electrostatic Discharge (ESD), wear an ESD wrist strap
and insert its connector into the ESD socket on the cabinet before replacing the board. For
detailed operations, see Wearing an ESD Wrist Strap. If an ESD wrist strap or ground point
is unavailable, wear a pair of ESD gloves instead.
Procedure
l Back up OMU system data to an OMU hard disk.
1. Run the MML command BKP DB to back up system files to the specified path. In
this step, set Path of Backup File and File Name to appropriate values.
l Save the performance configuration files, SSL certificate files, license files, and OMU
system data to the LMT PC.
1. Start the file manager on the LMT. For detailed operations, seeFile Manager.
2. Select the files to be downloaded in the corresponding directories and click
Download.
NOTE
Run the MML command LST OMUAREA to query the OMU active workspace. Assuming that
the OMU active workspace is version_a:
l Performance configuration files are saved in the directory \bam\version_a\ftp\DefaultMeas.
Only DefaultMeas_Active.xml and DefaultMeas_Standby.xml need to be backed up.
l SSL certificate files are saved in the directory \bam\version_a\ftp\cert.
l License files are saved in the directory \bam\version_a\ftp\license.
l Install Windows.
1. On the local computer, use EasyInstall to prepare a Windows installation source. For
details, see Preparations for Reinstalling the OMU Operating System, Creating the
Operating System Installation Source, and Creating the Installation Source of the
SetWin Software and OS Patches.
2. Connect the local computer to the debugging Ethernet port on the new OMU.
3. Remove the OMU board to be replaced and insert the new one. For detailed operations,
see Replacing an OMU board that is configured with new ejector levers or
Replacing an OMU board that is configured with old ejector levers.
4. Use EasyInstall to install Windows. For details, see Installing the OMU Operating
System Using the EasyInstall Software.
l Install OMU applications.
1. Set the IP address of the local computer to the same network segment as the
commissioning IP address of the OMU.
2. Upload OMU applications to the OMU.
a. (Optional) If patches are installed during the installation, delete the original patch
files saved in the patch folder for OMU applications, copy the patches (for
example, the V900R01XC0XSPCXXX folder) saved on the local computer to
the patch folder for OMU applications.
Figure 8-11 show the directory structures of the patche installation package.
BSC6900 GU
Site Maintenance Guide 8 Replacing Boards and Modules
Issue 07 (2013-06-28) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
124
Figure 8-11 Directory structure of the patche installation package
b. Connect to the debugging Ethernet port of the OMU, and log in to the OMU
through the commissioning IP address. For details, see Logging In to the OMU.
c. Under drive D on the OMU, create the \mbsc\upgrade folder, right-click it, and
choose Sharing and Security.
d. In the Properties dialog box, select Share this folder, set the read/write property,
and then click OK.
e. On the local computer, choose Start > Run, enter \\OMU commissioning IP
address. In the displayed dialog box, enter the username and password, and click
OK.
f. Copy OMU applications installation package from the local computer to the
\mbsc\upgrade folder on the OMU.
3. Go to the V***R***C**\install\setup directory of the version installation package
and double-click install_bam.bat. The system prompts you to type the product
running mode, as shown in the following:
NOTE
V***R***C** is an example of the version installation package. During installation, see the actual
version.
[2011-05-03 10:12:32] software integrality verify begin...
[2011-05-03 10:12:42] software integrality verify end...
# The run mode of the product
# GO:GSM only
# UO:UMTS only
# GU:GSM and UMTS
# Please select one mode to install.
Please input a valid run_mode :
NOTE
The software integrity of the OMU applications is checked before they are automatically installed.
The OMU applications can be installed only if the check passes.
4. Enter the product running mode and press Enter. The system prompts you to type
the office name, as shown:
# The name of office
# The name must range from 5 to 32 characters.
# The first character must be a letter and the subsequent characters can
be lett
ers, digits, "-"or "_".
Please input a valid office_name :
5. Enter the office name and press Enter. The system prompts you to type the language,
as shown:
# The OMU language version. eg: eng/chs
Please input a valid version :
6. Enter the language and press Enter. The system prompts you to type the admin
password, as shown:
# The "admin" user's password of OMU service.
# The password must range from 6 to 32 characters and consist of only
letters an
BSC6900 GU
Site Maintenance Guide 8 Replacing Boards and Modules
Issue 07 (2013-06-28) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
125
d figures.
# Do not forget the password.
# You can change the password later, but this password should be provided
first.
Please input a valid admin_password :
Please input a valid Confirm password :
7. Enter the admin password and press Enter. The system prompts you to type the FTP
password, as shown:
# The ftp user's password of OMU service
# The password must range from 6 to 32(characters) and consist of only
letters a
nd figures.
# Do not forget the password.
# You can change it later, but this password should be provided first.
Please input a valid ftp_password :
Please input a valid Confirm password :
8. Enter the ftp password and press Enter. The system prompts you to type the external
virtual IP address, as shown:
# The virtual extranet ip.
Please input a valid virtual_extranet_ip :
NOTE
l If a fixed external network IP address has been configured for the OMU to be replaced, the
entered external network virtual IP address must be in the same network segment as the fixed
external network IP address for the OMU to be replaced.
l If a fixed external network IP address has not been configured for the OMU to be replaced, the
entered external network virtual IP address can be set based on the actual plan.
9. Enter the external virtual IP address and press Enter. The system prompts you to
type the OMU system type, as shown:
# The OMU system type. eg: Single/Dual
# Single : Install stand-alone system
# Dual : Install dual system. The dual-OMU system can effeciently
increase the reliability of the OMU system
Please input a valid install_type :
10. Enter the OMU installation type based on the field configuration and press Enter.
Table 1 describes the OMU installation types.
Table 8-11 Description
Parameter Description
Single When the BSC6900 is configured with
one OMU board, install the OMU
applications on the board in single-
OMU mode.
Dual When the BSC6900 is configured with
two OMU boards, install OMU
applications on the board in dual-OMU
mode.

11. The system asks you whether to continue with the installation, as shown:
Please affirm input information. input Y to continue; input E to exit. ->
12. Enter Y to install OMU applications. When the messageInstall OMU
succeed! is displayed, OMU applications are successfully installed.
BSC6900 GU
Site Maintenance Guide 8 Replacing Boards and Modules
Issue 07 (2013-06-28) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
126
l Change the IP addresses of the new OMUs to those of the OMUs to be replaced.
1. Choose Start > Run, type cmd, and press Enter to enter the OMU command mode.
2. Type the command cd /d d:\mbsc\bam\version_a\bin\bam and press Enter to
navigate to the directory containing omutool.
3. Change the OMU IP addresses by referring to the IP addresses of the replaced OMU
board.
The omutool innercard IP address command is used to change the fixed internal
IP address.
The omutool innervip IP address is used to change the virtual internal IP address.
The omutool extercard IP address subnet mask (gateway IP address) command
is used to change the fixed external IP address and subnet mask.
The ./omutool extervip IP address subnet mask (gateway IP address) command
is used to change the virtual external IP address and subnet mask.
Use the command omutool backupcard IP address to change the backup channel
IP address of the active and standby OMUs of the ETH3-UPDATE Ethernet
adapter on an OMUa/OMUb board.
The omutool debugcard IP address command is used to change the
commissioning IP address.
NOTE
Changing the debugging IP address immediately disconnects the LMT PC from the OMU board.
Use the new debugging IP address to connect the LMT PC to the OMU board again.
4. Type the command net start omud to start the omud progress.
5. Remove the debugging Ethernet cable from the OMU board panel.
l Download and decpmpress the Upgrade Guide to OMU Windows Operating System
and Ethernet Adapter Driver.rar file from the release document. Obtain the Upgrade
Guide to OMU Windows Operating System and Ethernet Adapter Driver.
l Recover the OMU data.
1. Connect the LMT PC to the OMU external network.
2. Log in to the LMT. For detailed operations, see Logging In to and Logging Out of the
LMT. On the LMT, start the file manager. For detailed operations, see File Manager.
3. Select the target file on the LMT PC and click Upload to upload the saved OMU
system data to the active workspace. Ensure that the upload path is the same as the
backup data download path.
4. Choose Start > Run, type cmd, and press Enter to enter the OMU command mode.
5. Type the command net stop omud to stop the omud progress.
6. Type the command cd /d d:\mbsc\bam\common\services and press Enter to
navigate to the directory containing the omu_backup_linker tool.
7. Type the command omu_backup_linker.exe and press Enter to start the
omu_backup_linker tool.
8. A message is displayed "Please input a valid bkp_res_type :." Type
restore and press Enter.
9. Type the backup file save path and the file name and press Enter. The system starts
to restore data. A message will be displayed showing success or failure. For example,
"Restore OMU database succeed!" may be displayed.
10. Type the command net start omud to start the omud progress.
BSC6900 GU
Site Maintenance Guide 8 Replacing Boards and Modules
Issue 07 (2013-06-28) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
127
l Go to 8.18.6 Common Operation for Replacing OMU Board.
----End
8.18.3 Scenario: Replacing the Standby OMU in Dual-System Mode
This section describes how to replace the standby OMU board when two OMUs are configured
on BSC6900.
Context
l The new OMUs can use the same operating system as the OMUs to be replaced or use
another operating system, but the active and standby OMUs must use the same operating
system.
l The new OMUs must be of the same type as the OMUs to be replaced.
l In dual-system mode, if the active OMU fails, the system automatically performs a
switchover. Therefore, only the standby OMU needs to be replaced.
Replacing the standby OMU board in dual-system mode occurs in one the following scenarios:
Scenario: Old and New OMUs Running the Same Operating System
This section describes how to replace the standby OMU on BSC6900 configured with two OMUs
when the OMU to be replaced and the new OMU have the same operating system.
Prerequisites
l A new OMU board is ready, and it is of the same type as the board to be replaced.
NOTE
The OMUc board only runs the Dopra Linux OS.
Context
CAUTION
l To protect the OMU board from the Electrostatic Discharge (ESD), wear an ESD wrist strap
and insert its connector into the ESD socket on the cabinet before replacing the board. For
detailed operations, see Wearing an ESD Wrist Strap. If an ESD wrist strap or ground point
is unavailable, wear a pair of ESD gloves instead.
Procedure
Step 1 Run the MML command STP DATASYNC to stop the synchronization between the active
OMU and the standby one.
Step 2 Run the MML command DSP OMU to check the status to make sure the synchronization
between the active OMU and the standby one is stopped.
Step 3 Go to standby OMU, choose Start > Run, type cmd and press Enter to enter the command
mode. Run net stop omud to stop the omud serviece.
BSC6900 GU
Site Maintenance Guide 8 Replacing Boards and Modules
Issue 07 (2013-06-28) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
128
Step 4 Remove the OMU board to be replaced and insert the new one. For detailed operations, see
Replacing an OMU board that is configured with new ejector levers or Replacing an OMU
board that is configured with old ejector levers.
Step 5 Perform operations in Table 8-12 based on the operating system.
BSC6900 GU
Site Maintenance Guide 8 Replacing Boards and Modules
Issue 07 (2013-06-28) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
129
Table 8-12 Criteria for operations (1)
If... Then...
The OMU operating
system is Dopra Linux
or Suse Linux
1. Optional: Uninstall the OMU applications on the new OMU
board.
NOTE
If OMU applications have been installed on the new OMU board,
perform this step to uninstall the OMU applications of an earlier
version.
If no OMU application is installed on the new OMU board, skip this
step and proceed to b.
a. Log in to the standby OMU by using the fixed external IP
address or the commissioning IP address. For details, see
Logging In to the OMU.
b. Enter the /etc/rc.d/omud stop command and press Enter
to stop the omud.
c. Enter uninstall_bam in any directory of the OMU and
press Enter.
d. The message Uninstall standby area. input Y to
continue; input E to exit. is displayed. Enter Y to uninstall
the OMU applications on the standby workspace of the
standby OMU.
e. Enter the uninstall_bam command and press Enter.
f. The message Uninstall main area. input Y to continue;
input E to exit. is displayed. Enter Y to uninstall the OMU
applications on the active workspace of the standby OMU.
2. Install OMU applications. For details, see Install OMU
applications. in Scenario: Old OMU Running Suse Linux
and New OMU Running Dopra Linux.
3. Change the IP addresses of the new OMU.
l The OMU operating system is Suse Linux, refer to Change
the IP addresses of the new OMU to those of the OMU
to be replaced.
l The OMU operating system is Dopra Linux
a. Enter the cd /mbsc/bam/version_a/bin/bam command
and press Enter to go to the directory where the omutool
program is saved.
b. Change the OMU IP addresses by referring to the IP
addresses of the replaced OMU board.
The ./omutool innercard IP address command is
used to change the fixed internal IP address.
The ./omutool innervip IP address command is
used to change the virtual internal IP address.
The ./omutool extercard IP address mask
(gateway) command is used to change the fixed
external IP address and mask.
BSC6900 GU
Site Maintenance Guide 8 Replacing Boards and Modules
Issue 07 (2013-06-28) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
130
If... Then...
The ./omutool extervip IP address subnet mask
(gateway) command is used to change the virtual
external IP address and subnet mask.
Use the command ./omutool backupcard IP
address to change the backup channel IP address of
the active and standby OMUs of the ETH3-
UPDATE Ethernet adapter on an OMUa/OMUb
board.
The ./omutool debugcard IP address is used to
change the commissioning IP address.
NOTE
Changing the debugging IP address immediately
disconnects the LMT PC from the OMU board. Use the
new debugging IP address to connect the LMT PC to the
OMU board again.
Optional: Only when BSC6900 is configured with
the GBFD-511701 Radio Measurement Data
Interface for Navigation feature and the BSC local
IP address is used for communication between the
OMU and VNP, you need to reconfigure the BSC
local IP address, VLAN IDs for communication
between the OMU and VNP, and VLAN IDs for
communication between the OMU and EMS/LMT
based on "OMU Ethernet Adapter Team IP Address
Installation Information." For details, see
Configuring Radio Measurement Data Interface for
Navigation in GBSS&RAN Feature Activation
Guide.
4. Install the operating system patch and upgrade Ethernet adapter
driver when the operating system is Suse Linux. Log in to
http://support.huawei.com/support/ and choose Software
Center > Version Software > Wireless Product Line >
SingleRAN > SRAN O&M tools to download the OMU
Driver Upgrade CHS ***.rar and get Upgrade Guide to
OMU Linux Ethernet Adapter Driver and OMU driver upgrade
tool. Please refer to BSC6900 Upgrade Guide to OMU O&M
Panel Adapter Driver to upgrade the OMU adapter driver.
NOTE
Suse Linux Operating System has no patch.
BSC6900 GU
Site Maintenance Guide 8 Replacing Boards and Modules
Issue 07 (2013-06-28) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
131
If... Then...
The OMU operating
system is Windows
1. Optional: Uninstall the OMU applications on the new OMU
board.
NOTE
If OMU applications have been installed on the new OMU board,
perform this step to uninstall the OMU applications of an earlier
version.
If no OMU application is installed on the new OMU board, skip this
step and proceed to b.
a. Log in to the standby OMU by using the fixed external IP
address or the commissioning IP address. For details, see
Logging In to the OMU.
b. Type the net stop omud command and press Enter to stop
the omud.
c. Click Start > Run and the Run interface is displayed.
d. In the Run interface, run the uninstall_bam command and
click OK.
e. Type Y, and press Enter until the Uninstall OMU
succeed! message is displayed.
f. Go to 4 after uninstalling the OMU applications in the
standby workspace. Perform to 5 to uninstall the OMU
applications in the active workspace. This task is
completed.
2. Install OMU applications. For details, see Install OMU
applications in Scenario: Old OMU Running Windows and
New OMU Running Dopra Linux.
3. Change the IP addresses of the new OMU board. For details,
see Change the IP addresses of the new OMU to those of
the OMU to be replaced in Scenario: Old OMU Running
Windows and New OMU Running Dopra Linux.
4. Download and decpmpress the Upgrade Guide to OMU
Windows Operating System and Ethernet Adapter Driver.
rarfile from the release document. Decompress the package
and obtain the Upgrade Guide to OMU Windows Operating
System and Ethernet Adapter Driver.

Step 6 Go to 8.18.6 Common Operation for Replacing OMU Board.
----End
Scenario: Old OMU Running Dopra Linux and New OMU Running Suse Linux/
Windows
This section describes how to replace the standby OMU on BSC6900 configured with two OMUs
when the operating system on the OMUs to be replaced is Dopra Linux and that on the new
OMUs is Suse Linux/Windows.
BSC6900 GU
Site Maintenance Guide 8 Replacing Boards and Modules
Issue 07 (2013-06-28) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
132
Prerequisites
l A new OMU board is ready, and it is of the same type as the board to be replaced.
NOTE
The OMUc board only runs the Dopra Linux OS.
l A USB installation disk has been prepared. For detailed operations, see Preparing a USB
Storage Device. The operation type is set to Install and OMU applications and patches are
installed during the preparation.
Context
When the new OMU board runs a different OS from that of the OMU board to be replaced, it is
recommended that you switch the OS of the new OMU board to that of the old OMU board.
This takes care of the user operation habit.
CAUTION
l To protect the OMU board from the Electrostatic Discharge (ESD), wear an ESD wrist strap
and insert its connector into the ESD socket on the cabinet before replacing the board. For
detailed operations, see Wearing an ESD Wrist Strap. If an ESD wrist strap or ground point
is unavailable, wear a pair of ESD gloves instead.
Procedure
Step 1 Run the MML command STP DATASYNC to stop the synchronization between the active
OMU and the standby one.
Step 2 Run the MML command DSP OMU to check the status to make sure the synchronization
between the active OMU and the standby one is stopped.
Step 3 Go to standby OMU, choose Start > Run, type cmd and press Enter to enter the command
mode. Run net stop omud to stop the omud serviece.
Step 4 Connect a USB installation disk to a USB port on the new OMU.
Step 5 Remove the OMU board to be replaced and insert the new one. For detailed operations, see
Replacing an OMU board that is configured with new ejector levers or Replacing an OMU
board that is configured with old ejector levers.
Step 6 Wait 1 to 2 minutes and then use the USB flash drive to install the OMU operating system. Check
the status of indicators on the OMU board panel to determine whether the OMU operating system
is installed successfully.
l If only the operating system is to be installed on the OMU, check the indicator status. See
Table 8-13.
l If the operating system and applications are to be installed on the OMU, check the indicator
status. See Table 8-14.
BSC6900 GU
Site Maintenance Guide 8 Replacing Boards and Modules
Issue 07 (2013-06-28) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
133
NOTE
If the status of the indicators differs from this, the OMU cannot identify the USB flash drive. When this occurs,
prepare another USB flash drive. Alternatively, copy the data in the original USB flash drive to a new USB flash
drive, and then reinstall the OMU operating system.
For information about how much time will be consumed during the OMU operating system installation, see
Table 1 in Preparing a USB Storage Device.
Table 8-13 Status of the indicators on the OMU board panel during the OMU operating system
installation
Board Installation
Procedure
Successful
Installation
Failed Installation
OMUc l The RUN
indicator blinks.
l The ALM
indicator blinks.
l The ACT
indicator blinks.
l The OFFLINE
indicator is off.
l The RUN
indicator blinks.
l The ALM
indicator is off.
l The ACT
indicator is off.
l The OFFLINE
indicator blinks.
l The RUN
indicator is off.
l The ALM
indicator blinks.
l The ACT
indicator is off.
l The OFFLINE
indicator blinks.

Table 8-14 Status of indicators on the OMU board panel during the OMU operating system and
OMU applications installation
Board Installation
Procedure
Successful
Installation
Failed Installation
OMUc l The RUN
indicator blinks.
l The ALM
indicator blinks.
l The ACT
indicator blinks.
l The OFFLINE
indicator is off.
l The RUN
indicator blinks.
l The ALM
indicator is
steady on or off.
l The ACT
indicator is
steady on or off.
l The OFFLINE
indicator is off.
l The RUN
indicator blinks.
l The ALM
indicator blinks.
l The ACT
indicator is off.
l The OFFLINE
indicator is off.

Step 7 Optional: Only when BSC6900 is configured with the GBFD-511701 Radio Measurement
Data Interface for Navigation feature and the BSC local IP address is used for communication
between the OMU and VNP, you need to reconfigure the BSC local IP address, VLAN IDs for
communication between the OMU and VNP, and VLAN IDs for communication between the
OMU and EMS/LMT based on "OMU Ethernet Adapter Team IP Address Installation
Information." For details, see Configuring Radio Measurement Data Interface for Navigation in
GBSS&RAN Feature Activation Guide.
Step 8 Go to 8.18.6 Common Operation for Replacing OMU Board.
----End
BSC6900 GU
Site Maintenance Guide 8 Replacing Boards and Modules
Issue 07 (2013-06-28) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
134
Scenario: Old OMU Running Suse Linux and New OMU Running Dopra Linux
This section describes how to replace the standby OMU on BSC6900 configured with two OMUs
when the operating system on the OMUs to be replaced is Suse Linux and that on the new OMUs
is Dopra Linux.
Prerequisites
l A new OMU board is ready, and it is of the same type as the board to be replaced.
NOTE
The OMUc board only runs the Dopra Linux OS.
Context
When the new OMU board runs a different OS from that of the OMU board to be replaced, it is
recommended that you switch the OS of the new OMU board to that of the old OMU board.
This takes care of the user operation habit.
CAUTION
l To protect the OMU board from the Electrostatic Discharge (ESD), wear an ESD wrist strap
and insert its connector into the ESD socket on the cabinet before replacing the board. For
detailed operations, see Wearing an ESD Wrist Strap. If an ESD wrist strap or ground point
is unavailable, wear a pair of ESD gloves instead.
Procedure
l Stop the synchronization between the active OMU and the standby one and the omud
serviece.
1. Run the MML command STP DATASYNC to stop the synchronization between the
active OMU and the standby one.
2. Run the MML command DSP OMU to check the status to make sure the
synchronization between the active OMU and the standby one is stopped.
3. Go to standby OMU, choose Start > Run, type cmd and press Enter to enter the
command mode. Run net stop omud to stop the omud serviece.
l Install Suse Linux.
1. On the LMT PC, use EasyInstall to prepare an installation source for Suse Linux. For
details, see Preparations for Reinstalling the OMU Operating System and Creating
the Operating System Installation Source.
2. Connect the local computer to the debugging Ethernet port on each of the new OMUs.
3. Remove the OMU board to be replaced and insert the new one. For detailed operations,
see Replacing an OMU board that is configured with new ejector levers or
Replacing an OMU board that is configured with old ejector levers.
4. Use EasyInstall to install Suse Linux. For details, see Installing the OMU Operating
System by Using the EasyInstall Software.
l Install OMU applications.
BSC6900 GU
Site Maintenance Guide 8 Replacing Boards and Modules
Issue 07 (2013-06-28) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
135
1. Set the IP address of the local computer to the same network segment as the
commissioning IP address of the OMU.
2. Connect to the debugging port of the OMU, and log in to the OMU through the
commissioning IP address. For details, see Uploading the OMU Application
Installation Package to the OMU. (The file upload path is /BSC6000/data/mbsc/
upgrade.)
3. Use the commissioning IP address to switch to the directory where the installation
package is saved. For details, see Logging In to the OMU.
If the operating system is Dopra Linux, assume that OMU applications installation
package install_bam.sh is saved in /mbsc/upgrade/VXXXRXXXCXX/install/
setup. Enter the following command and press Enter.
cd /mbsc/upgrade/VXXXRXXXCXX/install/setup
If the operating system is Suse Linux, assume that OMU applications installation
package install_bam.sh is saved in /BSC6000/data/mbsc/upgrade/
VXXXRXXXCXX/install/setup. Enter the following command and press
Enter.
cd /BSC6000/data/mbsc/upgrade/VXXXRXXXCXX/install/setup
4. Run the chmod +x ./install_bam.sh command to acquire the authority to run the ./
install_bam.sh command.
5. Enter the ./install_bam.sh command and press Enter. The system prompts you to
type the product mode, as shown:
[2011-05-03 10:12:32] software integrality verify begin...
[2011-05-03 10:12:42] software integrality verify end...
# The run mode of the product
# GO:GSM only
# UO:UMTS only
# GU:GSM and UMTS
# Please select one mode to install.
Please input a valid run_mode :
NOTE
The software integrity of the OMU applications is checked before they are automatically installed.
The OMU applications can be installed only if the check passes.
6. Enter the product running mode and press Enter. The system prompts you to type the
office name, as shown:
# The name of office
# The name suggest range from 5 to 32 characters.
# The characters suggest be letters, digits, "-"or "_".
Please input a valid office_name :
7. Enter the office name and press Enter. The system prompts you to type the language,
as shown:
# The OMU language version. eg: eng/chs
Please input a valid version :
8. Enter the language and press Enter. The system prompts you to type the admin
password, as shown:
# The "admin" user's password of OMU service.
# The password must range from 6 to 32 characters and consist of only
letters and figures.
# Do not forget the password.
# You can change the password later, but this password should be provided
first.
Please input a valid admin_password :
BSC6900 GU
Site Maintenance Guide 8 Replacing Boards and Modules
Issue 07 (2013-06-28) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
136
NOTE
The admin password is the initial password for the administrator to log in to the LMT.
9. Enter the admin password and press Enter. The system prompts you to type the FTP
password, as shown:
# The ftp user's password of OMU service
# The password must range from 6 to 32(characters) and consist of only
letters and figures.
# Do not forget the password.
# You can change it later, but this password should be provided first.
Please input a valid ftp_password :
NOTE
The FTP password is customized. After the OMU applications are installed, you can access
the FTP service with the FTP password.
10. Enter the FTP password and press Enter. The system prompts you to type the external
virtual IP address, as shown:
# The extranet IP address, subnet mask, and default gateway.
# example: 192.168.1.9/255.255.255.0;192.168.1.1
Please input a valid virtual_extranet_config :
NOTE
l If a fixed external network IP address has been configured for the OMU to be replaced, the
entered external network virtual IP address must be in the same network segment as the fixed
external network IP address for the OMU to be replaced.
l If a fixed external network IP address has not been configured for the OMU to be replaced, the
entered external network virtual IP address can be set based on the actual plan.
11. Enter the external virtual IP address and press Enter. The system prompts you to type
the OMU system type, as shown:
# The OMU system type. eg: Single/Dual
# Single:Install stand-alone system
# Dual:Install dual-OMU system.
The dual-OMU system can effeciently increase the reliability of the OMU
system.
Please input a valid install_type :
12. Enter the OMU installation type based on the field configuration and press Enter.
Table 1 describes the OMU installation types.
Table 8-15 Description
Parameter Description
Single When the BSC6900 is configured with
one OMU board, install the OMU
applications on the board in single-
OMU mode.
Dual When the BSC6900 is configured with
two OMU boards, install OMU
applications on the board in dual-OMU
mode.

13. The system asks you whether to continue with the installation, as shown:
Please affirm input information. input Y to continue; input E to exit. ->
BSC6900 GU
Site Maintenance Guide 8 Replacing Boards and Modules
Issue 07 (2013-06-28) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
137
14. Enter Y to install the OMU applications. When the messageInstall OMU
succeed! is displayed, the OMU applications are successfully installed.
l Change the IP addresses of the new OMUs to those of the OMUs to be replaced.
1. Type the command cd /BSC6000/data/mbsc/bam/version_a/bin/bam and press
Enter to navigate to the directory containing omutool.
2. Change the OMU IP addresses by referring to the IP addresses of the replaced OMU
board.
The ./omutool innercard IP address command is used to change the fixed internal
IP address.
The ./omutool innervip IP address command is used to change the virtual internal
IP address.
The ./omutool extercard IP address mask (gateway) command is used to change
the fixed external IP address and mask.
The ./omutool extervip IP address subnet mask (gateway) command is used to
change the virtual external IP address and subnet mask.
Use the command ./omutool backupcard IP address to change the backup channel
IP address of the active and standby OMUs of the ETH3-UPDATE Ethernet
adapter on an OMUa/OMUb board.
The ./omutool debugcard IP address is used to change the commissioning IP
address.
NOTE
Changing the debugging IP address immediately disconnects the LMT PC from the OMU board.
Use the new debugging IP address to connect the LMT PC to the OMU board again.
Optional: Only when BSC6900 is configured with the GBFD-511701 Radio
Measurement Data Interface for Navigation feature and the BSC local IP
address is used for communication between the OMU and VNP, you need to
reconfigure the BSC local IP address, VLAN IDs for communication between the
OMU and VNP, and VLAN IDs for communication between the OMU and EMS/
LMT based on "OMU Ethernet Adapter Team IP Address Installation
Information." For details, see Configuring Radio Measurement Data Interface for
Navigation in GBSS&RAN Feature Activation Guide.
3. Type the command /etc/rc.d/omud start and press Enter to start the omud process.
l Install the operating system patch and upgrade the adapter driver.Log in to http://
support.huawei.com/support/ and choose Software Center > Version Software >
Wireless Product Line > SingleRAN > SRAN O&M tools to download the OMU Driver
Upgrade CHS ***.rar and get Upgrade Guide to OMU Linux Ethernet Adapter Driver
and OMU driver upgrade tool. Please refer to BSC6900 Upgrade Guide to OMU O&M
Panel Adapter Driver to upgrade the OMU adapter driver.
NOTE
Suse Linux has no operating system patch.
l Go to 8.18.6 Common Operation for Replacing OMU Board.
----End
BSC6900 GU
Site Maintenance Guide 8 Replacing Boards and Modules
Issue 07 (2013-06-28) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
138
Scenario: Old OMU Running Windows and New OMU Running Dopra Linux
This section describes how to replace the standby OMU on BSC6900 configured with two OMUs
when the operating system on the OMU to be replaced is Windows and that on the new OMU
is Dopra Linux.
Prerequisites
l A new OMU board is ready, and it is of the same type as the board to be replaced.
NOTE
The OMUc board only runs the Dopra Linux OS.
Context
When the new OMU board runs a different OS from that of the OMU board to be replaced, it is
recommended that you switch the OS of the new OMU board to that of the old OMU board.
This takes care of the user operation habit.
CAUTION
l To protect the OMU board from the Electrostatic Discharge (ESD), wear an ESD wrist strap
and insert its connector into the ESD socket on the cabinet before replacing the board. For
detailed operations, see Wearing an ESD Wrist Strap. If an ESD wrist strap or ground point
is unavailable, wear a pair of ESD gloves instead.
Procedure
l Stop the synchronization between the active OMU and the standby one and the omud
serviece.
1. Run the MML command STP DATASYNC to stop the synchronization between the
active OMU and the standby one.
2. Run the MML command DSP OMU to check the status to make sure the
synchronization between the active OMU and the standby one is stopped.
3. Go to standby OMU, choose Start > Run, type cmd and press Enter to enter the
command mode. Run net stop omud to stop the omud serviece.
l Install Windows.
1. On the local computer, use EasyInstall to prepare a Windows installation source. For
details, see Preparations for Reinstalling the OMU Operating System, Creating the
Operating System Installation Source, and Creating the Installation Source of the
SetWin Software and OS Patches.
2. Connect the local computer to the debugging Ethernet port on the new OMU.
3. Remove the OMU board to be replaced and insert the new one. For detailed operations,
see Replacing an OMU board that is configured with new ejector levers or
Replacing an OMU board that is configured with old ejector levers.
4. Use EasyInstall to install Windows. For details, see Installing the OMU Operating
System Using the EasyInstall Software.
l Install OMU applications.
BSC6900 GU
Site Maintenance Guide 8 Replacing Boards and Modules
Issue 07 (2013-06-28) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
139
1. Set the IP address of the local computer to the same network segment as the
commissioning IP address of the OMU.
2. Upload OMU applications to the OMU.
a. (Optional) If patches are installed during the installation, delete the original patch
files saved in the patch folder for OMU applications, copy the patches (for
example, the V900R01XC0XSPCXXX folder) saved on the local computer to
the patch folder for OMU applications.
Figure 8-12 show the directory structures of the patche installation package.
Figure 8-12 Directory structure of the patche installation package
b. Connect to the debugging Ethernet port of the OMU, and log in to the OMU
through the commissioning IP address. For details, see Logging In to the OMU.
c. Under drive D on the OMU, create the \mbsc\upgrade folder, right-click it, and
choose Sharing and Security.
d. In the Properties dialog box, select Share this folder, set the read/write property,
and then click OK.
e. On the local computer, choose Start > Run, enter \\OMU commissioning IP
address. In the displayed dialog box, enter the username and password, and click
OK.
f. Copy OMU applications installation package from the local computer to the
\mbsc\upgrade folder on the OMU.
3. Go to the V***R***C**\install\setup directory of the version installation package
and double-click install_bam.bat. The system prompts you to type the product
running mode, as shown in the following:
NOTE
V***R***C** is an example of the version installation package. During installation, see the actual
version.
[2011-05-03 10:12:32] software integrality verify begin...
[2011-05-03 10:12:42] software integrality verify end...
# The run mode of the product
# GO:GSM only
# UO:UMTS only
# GU:GSM and UMTS
# Please select one mode to install.
Please input a valid run_mode :
NOTE
The software integrity of the OMU applications is checked before they are automatically installed.
The OMU applications can be installed only if the check passes.
4. Enter the product running mode and press Enter. The system prompts you to type
the office name, as shown:
# The name of office
# The name must range from 5 to 32 characters.
# The first character must be a letter and the subsequent characters can
be lett
BSC6900 GU
Site Maintenance Guide 8 Replacing Boards and Modules
Issue 07 (2013-06-28) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
140
ers, digits, "-"or "_".
Please input a valid office_name :
5. Enter the office name and press Enter. The system prompts you to type the language,
as shown:
# The OMU language version. eg: eng/chs
Please input a valid version :
6. Enter the language and press Enter. The system prompts you to type the admin
password, as shown:
# The "admin" user's password of OMU service.
# The password must range from 6 to 32 characters and consist of only
letters an
d figures.
# Do not forget the password.
# You can change the password later, but this password should be provided
first.
Please input a valid admin_password :
Please input a valid Confirm password :
7. Enter the admin password and press Enter. The system prompts you to type the FTP
password, as shown:
# The ftp user's password of OMU service
# The password must range from 6 to 32(characters) and consist of only
letters a
nd figures.
# Do not forget the password.
# You can change it later, but this password should be provided first.
Please input a valid ftp_password :
Please input a valid Confirm password :
8. Enter the ftp password and press Enter. The system prompts you to type the external
virtual IP address, as shown:
# The virtual extranet ip.
Please input a valid virtual_extranet_ip :
NOTE
l If a fixed external network IP address has been configured for the OMU to be replaced, the
entered external network virtual IP address must be in the same network segment as the fixed
external network IP address for the OMU to be replaced.
l If a fixed external network IP address has not been configured for the OMU to be replaced, the
entered external network virtual IP address can be set based on the actual plan.
9. Enter the external virtual IP address and press Enter. The system prompts you to
type the OMU system type, as shown:
# The OMU system type. eg: Single/Dual
# Single : Install stand-alone system
# Dual : Install dual system. The dual-OMU system can effeciently
increase the reliability of the OMU system
Please input a valid install_type :
10. Enter the OMU installation type based on the field configuration and press Enter.
Table 1 describes the OMU installation types.
Table 8-16 Description
Parameter Description
Single When the BSC6900 is configured with
one OMU board, install the OMU
applications on the board in single-
OMU mode.
BSC6900 GU
Site Maintenance Guide 8 Replacing Boards and Modules
Issue 07 (2013-06-28) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
141
Parameter Description
Dual When the BSC6900 is configured with
two OMU boards, install OMU
applications on the board in dual-OMU
mode.

11. The system asks you whether to continue with the installation, as shown:
Please affirm input information. input Y to continue; input E to exit. ->
12. Enter Y to install OMU applications. When the messageInstall OMU
succeed! is displayed, OMU applications are successfully installed.
l Change the IP addresses of the new OMUs to those of the OMUs to be replaced.
1. Choose Start > Run, type cmd, and press Enter to enter the OMU command mode.
2. Type the command cd /d d:\mbsc\bam\version_a\bin\bam and press Enter to
navigate to the directory containing omutool.
3. Change the OMU IP addresses by referring to the IP addresses of the replaced OMU
board.
The omutool innercard IP address command is used to change the fixed internal
IP address.
The omutool innervip IP address is used to change the virtual internal IP address.
The omutool extercard IP address subnet mask (gateway IP address) command
is used to change the fixed external IP address and subnet mask.
The ./omutool extervip IP address subnet mask (gateway IP address) command
is used to change the virtual external IP address and subnet mask.
Use the command omutool backupcard IP address to change the backup channel
IP address of the active and standby OMUs of the ETH3-UPDATE Ethernet
adapter on an OMUa/OMUb board.
The omutool debugcard IP address command is used to change the
commissioning IP address.
NOTE
Changing the debugging IP address immediately disconnects the LMT PC from the OMU board.
Use the new debugging IP address to connect the LMT PC to the OMU board again.
4. Type the command net start omud to start the omud progress.
l Download and decpmpress the Upgrade Guide to OMU Windows Operating System
and Ethernet Adapter Driver.rar file from the release document. Obtain the Upgrade
Guide to OMU Windows Operating System and Ethernet Adapter Driver.
l Go to 8.18.6 Common Operation for Replacing OMU Board.
----End
8.18.4 Scenario: Replacing OMUa or OMUb Boards with OMUc
Boards
This section describes how to replace an OMUa or OMUb board with an OMUc board.
BSC6900 GU
Site Maintenance Guide 8 Replacing Boards and Modules
Issue 07 (2013-06-28) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
142
Context
l Replacing an OMU board will disconnect the OMU board from the host boards. System
operation data during this period will lose.
l In this scenario, the operating system (OS) of the OMUc board is Dopra Linux OS after
the replacement no matter which OS is used by the board to be replaced because the OMUc
board can only support Dopra Linux OS.
l When an OMUa or OMUb board in single-OMU mode is damaged, two OMUc boards are
recommended to replace the OMUa or OMUb board.
OMUc boards can be used to replace OMUa or OMUb boards. The replacement scenarios are
as follows:
Scenario: Replacing Two OMUa or OMUb Boards with Two OMUc Boards
This section describes how to replace two OMUa or OMUb boards with two OMUc boards.
Prerequisites
l You have logged in to the LMT. For detailed operations, see Logging In to and Logging
Out of the LMT.
l Two new OMUc boards are ready.
Context
Co-Existence of OMU Boards
l Short-term co-existence of OMU boards is supported. When an OMUc board is used to
replace an OMUa or OMUb board, the OMUc board and the OMUa or OMUb board can
be inserted into the slots and co-exist for a short period, so that data can be transferred from
the OMUa or OMUb board to the OMUc board.
l Long-term co-existence of OMU boards in slots is not supported because the active and
standby OMU boards must be of the same type for commercial delivery in existing network.
For example, both active and standby OMU boards must be OMUa boards or OMUc boards.
CAUTION
l To protect the OMU board from the Electrostatic Discharge (ESD), wear an ESD wrist strap
and insert its connector into the ESD socket on the cabinet before replacing the board. For
detailed operations, see Wearing an ESD Wrist Strap. If an ESD wrist strap or ground point
is unavailable, wear a pair of ESD gloves instead.
Procedure
Step 1 Run the DSP OMU command to query information about the OMU and record the queried
information in Records of the OMU Application Installation Information.
Record Sheet of OMU Software Installation Information of the OMU board to be replaced
records the following information:
l Administrator password
BSC6900 GU
Site Maintenance Guide 8 Replacing Boards and Modules
Issue 07 (2013-06-28) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
143
l Password of system administrator admin
l Password of FTP user FtpUsr
l External fixed IP address, external virtual IP address, internal fixed IP address, internal virtual
IP address, debugging IP address, and backup channel IP address of the OMU board
NOTE
This document uses the OMUa board as an example.
Step 2 Stop the omud process on the standby OMU board and shut down the OMU operating system
(OS).
1. Log in to the standby OMU. For detailed operations, see Logging in to the OMU in the
BSC6900 GU OMU Administration Guide.
2. Run the /etc/rc.d/omud stop command to stop the omud process.
3. Run the poweroff command to shut down the OMU OS.
Step 3 Run the RMV BRD command to remove the standby OMUa or OMUb boards.
Step 4 Run the ADD BRD command to add an OMUc board in the slot where the removed standby
OMU board originally resides, that is, the slot marked green in Figure 8-13.
Step 5 Remove the standby OMU board. For detailed operations, see Replacing an OMU board that
is configured with new ejector levers or Replacing an OMU board that is configured with
old ejector levers.
Step 6 Install the first OMUc board in the active and standby slots of the OMUa or OMUb board. These
slots are the green slots shown in Figure 8-13.
The OMUa or OMUb board is twice the thickness of other OMU boards. Two OMUa or
OMUb boards are installed in the slots in blue, yellow, and red frames, as shown in Figure
8-13. Between two adjacent OMUa or OMUb boards, one is active and the other is standby.
The first OMUc board used for replacement must be installed in the green slots in the blue,
yellow, and red frames.
Example 1: Two OMUa boards are installed in the slots 20 through 23 before replacement. Slots
20 and 21 house the active OMUa board. Slot 22 and slot 23 are for the standby OMUa board.
Perform the following operations to replace OMU boards:
1. Remove the OMUa board installed in slots 22 and 23.
2. Install the first OMUc board in slot 23.
Example 2: Two OMUa boards are installed in the slots 20 through 23 before replacement. Slot
20s and 21 house the standby OMUa board. Slots 22 and 23 house the active OMUa board.
Perform the following operations to replace OMU boards:
1. Remove the OMUa board installed in slots 20 and 21.
2. Install the first OMUc board in slot 21.
BSC6900 GU
Site Maintenance Guide 8 Replacing Boards and Modules
Issue 07 (2013-06-28) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
144
Figure 8-13 Slots housing the first OMUc board
Step 7 Connect the PC and the ETH2 port on the OMU board with network cable.
Step 8 Set the IP address of the PC to be on the same network segment with the ETH2 port. The initial
IP address of the ETH2 port is 192.168.6.50 or 192.168.6.60, the subnet mask is 255.255.255.0.
Step 9 Logging in to the OMU.
1. Run the SSH terminal, for example, PuTTY, on the PC, and type the debugging IP address
of the OMU.
2. Logging in to the OMU. For detailed operations, see Logging in to the OMU in the BSC6900
GU OMU Administration Guide.
Step 10 Uploading the OMU application installation package to the OMU. For details, see Uploading
the OMU Application Installation Package to the OMU in the BSC6900 GU OMU
Administration Guide.
Step 11 Installing the OMU applications in the active workspace.
1. Navigate to the directory where the OMU application installation package is saved.
Assume that the OMU application installation package install_bam.sh is saved in /mbsc/
upgrade/V***R***C**/install/setup. Run the following command and press Enter:
cd /mbsc/upgrade/V***R***C**/install/setup
2. Run the chmod +x ./install_bam.sh command to acquire the authority to run the ./
install_bam.sh command.
3. Enter the ./install_bam.sh command and press Enter. The system prompts you to type the
product mode, as shown:
[2011-05-03 10:12:32] software integrality verify begin...
[2011-05-03 10:12:42] software integrality verify end...
# The run mode of the product
# GO:GSM only
# UO:UMTS only
# GU:GSM and UMTS
# Please select one mode to install.
Please input a valid run_mode :
NOTE
The software integrity of the OMU applications is checked before they are automatically installed. The
OMU applications can be installed only if the check passes.
4. Enter the product running mode and press Enter. The system prompts you to type the office
name, as shown:
BSC6900 GU
Site Maintenance Guide 8 Replacing Boards and Modules
Issue 07 (2013-06-28) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
145
# The name of office
# The name suggest range from 5 to 32 characters.
# The characters suggest be letters, digits, "-"or "_".
Please input a valid office_name :
5. Enter the office name and press Enter. The system prompts you to type the language, as
shown:
# The OMU language version. eg: eng/chs
Please input a valid version :
6. Enter the language and press Enter. The system prompts you to type the admin password,
as shown:
# The "admin" user's password of OMU service.
# The password must range from 6 to 32 characters and consist of only letters
and figures.
# Do not forget the password.
# You can change the password later, but this password should be provided
first.
Please input a valid admin_password :
Please input a valid Confirm password :
NOTE
The admin password is the initial password for the administrator to log in to the LMT.
The admin password is that of the former saved standby OMUa board.
7. Enter the admin password and press Enter. The system prompts you to type the FTP
password, as shown:
# The ftp user's password of OMU service
# The password must range from 6 to 32(characters) and consist of only letters
and figures.
# Do not forget the password.
# You can change it later, but this password should be provided first.
Please input a valid ftp_password :
NOTE
The FTP password is customized. After the OMU applications are installed, you can access the FTP
service with the FTP password.
8. Enter the FTP password and press Enter. The system prompts you to type the external
virtual IP address, as shown:
# The extranet IP address, subnet mask, and default gateway.
# example: 192.168.1.9/255.255.255.0;192.168.1.1
Please input a valid virtual_extranet_config :
NOTE
External network virtual IP uses the saved former information of standby OMUa board. After the
OMU applications are installed, you can change the IP addresses and subnet masks of the OMU
Ethernet adapters with omutool.
9. Enter the external virtual IP address and press Enter. The system prompts you to type the
OMU system type, as shown:
# The OMU system type. eg: Single/Dual
# Single:Install stand-alone system
# Dual:Install dual-OMU system.
The dual-OMU system can effeciently increase the reliability of the OMU
system.
Please input a valid install_type :
10. Type Dual, and press Enter.
11. The system asks you whether to continue with the installation, as shown:
Please affirm input information. input Y to continue; input E to exit. ->
12. Enter Y to install the OMU applications. When the messageInstall OMU
succeed! is displayed, the OMU applications are successfully installed.
BSC6900 GU
Site Maintenance Guide 8 Replacing Boards and Modules
Issue 07 (2013-06-28) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
146
Step 12 Change IP addresses of OMU Ethernet adapters and their subnet masks
1. Type the command cd /mbsc/bam/version_a/bin/bam and press Enter to navigate to the
directory containing omutool.
2. Change the OMU IP addresses by referring to the IP addresses of the replaced OMU
board.
l The ./omutool innercard IP address command is used to change the fixed internal IP
address.
l The ./omutool innervip IP address command is used to change the virtual internal IP
address.
l The ./omutool extercard IP address mask (gateway) command is used to change the
fixed external IP address and mask.
l Use the command ./omutool backupcard_for_omuc IP address to change the backup
channel IP address of the active and standby OMUs of the B_UPDATE0 Ethernet
adapter on an OMUc board.
l Use the command ./omutool backupcard_for_omua IP address to change the backup
channel IP address of the active and standby OMUs of the B_UPDATE1 Ethernet
adapter on an OMUc board.
l Record the information about the OMU applications installation in Information Record
Sheet of OMU Software Installation.
It is recommended that the backup channel IP addresses of the active and standby OMUs
on the Ethernet adapter B_UPDATE0 of the OMUc board be set to 192.168.9.60. In
addition, set the backup channel IP addresses of the active and standby OMUs on the
Ethernet adapter B_UPDATE1 to the backup channel IP address of the OMUa board that
has been removed in Records of the OMU Application Installation Information.
Step 13 Record the information about the OMU applications installation in Information Record Sheet
of OMU Software Installation.
Step 14 Only when BSC6900 is configured with the GBFD-511701 Radio Measurement Data
Interface for Navigation feature and the BSC local IP address is used for communication
between the OMU and VNP, you need to reconfigure the BSC local IP address, VLAN IDs for
communication between the OMU and VNP, and VLAN IDs for communication between the
OMU and EMS/LMT based on "OMU Ethernet Adapter Team IP Address Installation
Information." For details, see Configuring Radio Measurement Data Interface for Navigation in
GBSS&RAN Feature Activation Guide.
Step 15 Start the omud on the standby OMU board. Run the /etc/rc.d/omud start command and press
Enter to start the omud.
Step 16 Wait 10 minutes while the data of OMUa or OMUb board and the OMUc board is being
synchronized.
After the OMU OS, OMU applications and patches are installed, the data of the OMUa or
OMUb board and the OMUc board is synchronized automatically.
Step 17 Run the DSP OMU command to check the data synchronization progress. When Data-sync
state is Data synchronization is successful, run the SWP OMU command to swap the OMU
boards.
Step 18 After the active/standby OMU switchover is complete, run the DSP OMU command to check
the data synchronization progress. When Data-sync state is Data synchronization is
BSC6900 GU
Site Maintenance Guide 8 Replacing Boards and Modules
Issue 07 (2013-06-28) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
147
successful, stop the OMUd process on the OMUa board, shut down the OMU OS, referring to
Step 2 .
Step 19 Repeat Step 5 to Step 6 to remove the OMUa board, and install OMUc board.
Step 20 Repeat operations in Step 7 to Step 11 to install OMU applications.
Step 21 Change IP addresses of OMU Ethernet adapters and their subnet masks by referring to operations
in Step 12.
NOTE
It is recommended that the backup channel IP addresses of the active and standby OMUs on the Ethernet adapter
B_UPDATE0 of the OMUc board be set to 192.168.9.50. In addition, set the backup channel IP addresses of
the active and standby OMUs on the Ethernet adapter B_UPDATE1 to the backup channel IP address of the
OMUa board that has been removed in Records of the OMU Application Installation Information.
Step 22 Only when BSC6900 is configured with the GBFD-511701 Radio Measurement Data
Interface for Navigation feature and the BSC local IP address is used for communication
between the OMU and VNP, you need to reconfigure the BSC local IP address, VLAN IDs for
communication between the OMU and VNP, and VLAN IDs for communication between the
OMU and EMS/LMT based on "OMU Ethernet Adapter Team IP Address Installation
Information." For details, see Configuring Radio Measurement Data Interface for Navigation in
GBSS&RAN Feature Activation Guide.
Step 23 Wait 10 minutes while the data of two OMUc boards is being synchronized.
Step 24 Run the RMV BRD command to remove the OMUa or OMUb boards which have put out in
Step 19.
Step 25 Run the ADD BRD command to add the OMUc board which have installed in Step 19.
Step 26 Run the DSP OMU command to check the data synchronization progress. When Data-sync
state is Data synchronization is successful, start 8.18.6 Common Operation for Replacing
OMU Board.
----End
Scenario: Replacing an OMUa or OMUb Board with Two OMUc Boards
This section describes how to replace an OMUa or OMUb board with two OMUc boards.
Prerequisites
l Two new OMUc boards are ready.
l You have logged in to the LMT. For detailed operations, see Logging In to and Logging
Out of the LMT.
l A USB installation disk has been prepared. For detailed operations, see Preparing a USB
Storage Device. The operation type is set to Install and OMU applications and patches are
installed during the preparation.
Context
If the OMU board to be replaced is faulty and cannot undergo operation and maintenance
(O&M), obtain the latest backup data for restoring the data on the new OMU board.
Co-Existence of OMU Boards
BSC6900 GU
Site Maintenance Guide 8 Replacing Boards and Modules
Issue 07 (2013-06-28) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
148
l Short-term co-existence of OMU boards is supported. When an OMUc board is used to
replace an OMUa or OMUb board, the OMUc board and the OMUa or OMUb board can
be inserted into the slots and co-exist for a short period, so that data can be transferred from
the OMUa or OMUb board to the OMUc board.
l Long-term co-existence of OMU boards in slots is not supported because the active and
standby OMU boards must be of the same type for commercial delivery in existing network.
For example, both active and standby OMU boards must be OMUa boards or OMUc boards.
Two solutions can be adopted for the OMU replacement in terms of synchronizing data during
the replacement:
l Solution 1: When slots beside the OMUa or OMUb board in single-OMU mode are empty
and available, the OMUa or OMUb board can be replaced by the OMUc board through
short-term co-existence of OMU boards.
l Solution 2: When slots beside the OMUa or OMUb board in single-OMU mode are not
empty and available, the data of the OMUa or OMUb board can be copied onto the OMUc
board to complete replacement.
CAUTION
l To protect the OMU board from the Electrostatic Discharge (ESD), wear an ESD wrist strap
and insert its connector into the ESD socket on the cabinet before replacing the board. For
detailed operations, see Wearing an ESD Wrist Strap. If an ESD wrist strap or ground point
is unavailable, wear a pair of ESD gloves instead.
Procedure
l Check whether slots beside the OMUa or OMUb board are empty and available for
installing the OMUc board.
The OMUa or OMUb board is twice the thickness of other OMU boards. Two OMUa or
OMUb boards are installed in the slots in blue, yellow, and red frames, as shown in Figure
8-14. Between two adjacent OMUa or OMUb boards, one is active and the other is standby.
The first OMUc board used for replacement must be installed in the green slots in the blue,
yellow, and red frames.
Example 1: An OMUa board is installed in the slots 20 and 21 before replacement.
Replacing operations are as follows:
1. Install the first OMUc board in slot 23.
2. Remove the OMUa board installed in slots 20 and 21.
3. Install the second OMUc board in slot 22.
Example 2: An OMUa board is installed in the slots 22 and 23 before replacement. Perform
the following operations to replace OMU boards:
1. Install the first OMUc board in slot 21.
2. Remove the OMUa board installed in slots 22 and 23.
3. Install the second OMUc board in slot 20.
BSC6900 GU
Site Maintenance Guide 8 Replacing Boards and Modules
Issue 07 (2013-06-28) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
149
Figure 8-14 Slots housing the first OMUc board

If... Then...
Slots beside the OMUa or OMUb board are
empty and available for installing the
OMUc board
Start Replacement Through Co-
Existence of OMU Boards.
Slots beside the OMUa or OMUb are not
available for installing the OMUc board
Start Replacement by Copying Data of
OMU boards.

l Replacement Through Co-Existence of OMU Boards
1. Run the BKP DB command with Path of Backup File and File Name set to
appropriate values to back up data and save it in the specified directory in the OMU
hard disk.
2. Change the OMU working mode to dual-OMU mode.
a. Log in to the active and standby OMU. For detailed operations, see Logging in
to the OMU.
b. Run the /etc/rc.d/omud stop command to stop the omud process.
c. Enter cd /BSC6000/data/mbsc/bam/version_a/bin/bam and press Enter to
navigate to the directory that contains the omutool process.
d. Run the ./omutool dualmode dual command to set the OMU working mode to
dual-OMU.
e. Enter /etc/rc.d/omud start and press Enter to start the omud process.
3. In five minutes after the OMU board operating before replacement is started, run the
DSP OMU command. When the Operational state is Active normal, install the first
OMUc board in the slot shown in Figure 8-14.
4. Insert the prepared USB installation disk into any USB port on the OMU panel.
NOTE
The OMUc board is set to boot from the USB port by default at delivery.
After the OMU board restarts, it automatically installs OS and software.
BSC6900 GU
Site Maintenance Guide 8 Replacing Boards and Modules
Issue 07 (2013-06-28) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
150
5. Wait 1 to 2 minutes and then use the USB flash drive to install the OMU operating
system. Check the status of indicators on the OMU board panel to determine whether
the OMU operating system is installed successfully.
If only the operating system is to be installed on the OMU, check the indicator
status. See Table 8-17.
If the operating system and applications are to be installed on the OMU, check the
indicator status. See Table 8-18.
NOTE
If the status of the indicators differs from this, the OMU cannot identify the USB flash drive. When
this occurs, prepare another USB flash drive. Alternatively, copy the data in the original USB flash
drive to a new USB flash drive, and then reinstall the OMU operating system.
For information about how much time will be consumed during the OMU operating system
installation, see Table 1 in Preparing a USB Storage Device.
Table 8-17 Status of the indicators on the OMU board panel during the OMU
operating system installation
Board Installation
Procedure
Successful
Installation
Failed
Installation
OMUc l The RUN
indicator
blinks.
l The ALM
indicator
blinks.
l The ACT
indicator
blinks.
l The OFFLINE
indicator is off.
l The RUN
indicator
blinks.
l The ALM
indicator is off.
l The ACT
indicator is off.
l The OFFLINE
indicator
blinks.
l The RUN
indicator is off.
l The ALM
indicator
blinks.
l The ACT
indicator is off.
l The OFFLINE
indicator
blinks.

Table 8-18 Status of indicators on the OMU board panel during the OMU operating
system and OMU applications installation
Board Installation
Procedure
Successful
Installation
Failed
Installation
OMUc l The RUN
indicator
blinks.
l The ALM
indicator
blinks.
l The ACT
indicator
blinks.
l The OFFLINE
indicator is off.
l The RUN
indicator
blinks.
l The ALM
indicator is
steady on or
off.
l The ACT
indicator is
steady on or
off.
l The OFFLINE
indicator is off.
l The RUN
indicator
blinks.
l The ALM
indicator
blinks.
l The ACT
indicator is off.
l The OFFLINE
indicator is off.
BSC6900 GU
Site Maintenance Guide 8 Replacing Boards and Modules
Issue 07 (2013-06-28) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
151

6. Optional: Only when BSC6900 is configured with the GBFD-511701 Radio
Measurement Data Interface for Navigation feature and the BSC local IP address
is used for communication between the OMU and VNP, you need to reconfigure the
BSC local IP address, VLAN IDs for communication between the OMU and VNP,
and VLAN IDs for communication between the OMU and EMS/LMT based on "OMU
Ethernet Adapter Team IP Address Installation Information." For details, see
Configuring Radio Measurement Data Interface for Navigation in GBSS&RAN
Feature Activation Guide.
7. Adjust all the IP addresses and masks on the standby OMU board and ensure there is
no conflict between the internal network fixed IP addresses, the external network fixed
IP addresses, and the backup channel IP addresses of the active and standby OMU
boards. All these IP addresses meet the requirements for planning IP addresses. For
details about how to adjust IP addresses, see Changing the IP Addresses and Masks
for the new OMU Boards.
8. Wait 10 minutes while the data of OMUa or OMUb board and the OMUc board is
being synchronized.
After the OMU OS, OMU applications and patches are installed, the data of the OMUa
or OMUb board and the OMUc board is synchronized automatically.
9. Run the DSP OMU command to check the data synchronization progress. When
Data-sync state is Data synchronization is successful, run the SWP OMU command
to swap the OMU boards.
10. Run the DSP OMU command to check the data synchronization progress. When
Data-sync state is Data synchronization is successful, stop the omud process on the
OMUa board according to the OS type of the OMUa or OMUb board, and shut down
the OMU OS by following operations.
If... Then...
The Suse Linux OS or Dopra Linux OS
is used
1. Log in to the active and standby
OMU. For detailed operations, see
Logging in to the OMU.
2. Run the /etc/rc.d/omud stop
command to stop the omud process.
3. Run the poweroff command to shut
down the OMU OS.
The Windows OS is used 1. Log in to the active and standby
OMU. For detailed operations, see
Logging in to the OMU.
2. Choose Start > Run, Enter cmdand
then press Enter. The OMU
command interface is displayed.
3. Run the net stop omud command to
stop the omud process.
4. Choose Start > Shutdown. Select
Shutdown from the drop-down list
box to shut down the OMU OS.

BSC6900 GU
Site Maintenance Guide 8 Replacing Boards and Modules
Issue 07 (2013-06-28) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
152
11. Remove the standby OMUa or OMUb board. For detailed operations, see Replacing
an OMU board that is configured with new ejector levers or Replacing an OMU
board that is configured with old ejector levers.
12. Install the second OMUc board in the active and standby slots of the first OMUc board.
These slots are the green slots shown in Figure 8-15.
The green slots in Figure 8-15 are the slots for housing the second OMUc board.
Figure 8-15 Slots housing the second OMUc board

13. Insert the prepared USB installation disk into any USB port on the OMU panel.
14. Wait 1 to 2 minutes and then use the USB flash drive to install the OMU operating
system. Check the status of indicators on the OMU board panel to determine whether
the OMU operating system is installed successfully.
15. Adjust all the IP addresses and masks on the standby OMU board and ensure there is
no conflict between the internal network fixed IP addresses, the external network fixed
IP addresses, and the backup channel IP addresses of the active and standby OMU
boards. All these IP addresses meet the requirements for planning IP addresses. For
details about how to adjust IP addresses, see Changing the IP Addresses and Masks
for the new OMU Boards.
16. Wait 10 minutes while the data of two OMUc boards is being synchronized.
17. Run the RMV BRD command to remove an OMUa\OMUb board.
18. Run the ADD BRD command to add two OMUc boards.
19. Run the DSP OMU command to check the data synchronization progress. When
Data-sync state is Data synchronization is successful, start 8.18.6 Common
Operation for Replacing OMU Board.
l Replacement by Copying Data of OMU Boards
1. Run the BKP DB command with Path of Backup File and File Name set to
appropriate values to back up data and save it in the specified directory in the OMU
hard disk.
2. Save the performance configuration file, SSL license file, and OMU system data to
the local PC.
a. Start the file manager on the LMT. For detailed operations, see Starting the file
manager on the LMT.
BSC6900 GU
Site Maintenance Guide 8 Replacing Boards and Modules
Issue 07 (2013-06-28) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
153
b. Select the files to be downloaded in the corresponding directories and click
Download.
NOTE
Run the LST OMUAREA command to query the OMU active workspace. Assuming that the OMU
active workspace is version_a:
l Performance configuration files are saved in the \bam\version_a\ftp\DefaultMeas directory.
Only DefaultMeas_Active.xml and DefaultMeas_Standby.xml need to be backed up.
l SSL certificate files are saved in the \bam\version_a\ftp\cert directory.
l License files are saved in the \bam\version_a\ftp\license directory.
3. Stop the omud process on the standby OMU board and shut down the OMU OS.
If... Then...
The Suse Linux OS or Dopra Linux OS
is used
1. Log in to the active and standby
OMU. For detailed operations, see
Logging in to the OMU.
2. Run the /etc/rc.d/omud stop
command to stop the omud process.
3. Run the poweroff command to shut
down the OMU OS.
The Windows OS is used 1. Log in to the active and standby
OMU. For detailed operations, see
Logging in to the OMU.
2. Choose Start > Run, Enter cmdand
then press Enter. The OMU
command interface is displayed.
3. Run the net stop omud command to
stop the omud process.
4. Choose Start > Shutdown. Select
Shutdown from the drop-down list
box to shut down the OMU OS.

4. Run the RMV BRD command to remove an OMUa or OMUb board.
5. Run the ADD BRD command to add an OMUc board.
6. Remove the OMU board to be replaced. For detailed operations, see Replacing an
OMU board that is configured with new ejector levers or Replacing an OMU
board that is configured with old ejector levers.
7. Insert the two prepared USB flash drives into a USB port on two new OMU board
panels, respectively.
8. Install the two new OMU boards in the slots for the active and standby OMUc boards.
NOTE
The OMUc board is set to boot from the USB port by default at delivery.
After the OMU board restarts, it automatically installs OS and software.
9. Wait 1 to 2 minutes and then use the USB flash drive to install the OMU operating
system. Check the status of indicators on the OMU board panel to determine whether
the OMU operating system is installed successfully.
BSC6900 GU
Site Maintenance Guide 8 Replacing Boards and Modules
Issue 07 (2013-06-28) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
154
If only the operating system is to be installed on the OMU, check the indicator
status. See Table 8-17.
If the operating system and applications are to be installed on the OMU, check the
indicator status. See Table 8-18.
NOTE
If the status of the indicators differs from this, the OMU cannot identify the USB flash drive. When
this occurs, prepare another USB flash drive. Alternatively, copy the data in the original USB flash
drive to a new USB flash drive, and then reinstall the OMU operating system.
For information about how much time will be consumed during the OMU operating system
installation, see Table 1 in Preparing a USB Storage Device.
Table 8-19 Status of the indicators on the OMU board panel during the OMU
operating system installation
Board Successful
Installation
Failed Installation
OMUc l The RUN indicator
blinks.
l The ALM indicator is
off.
l The ACT indicator is
off.
l The OFFLINE
indicator blinks.
l The RUN indicator is
off.
l The ALM indicator
blinks.
l The ACT indicator is
off.
l The OFFLINE
indicator blinks.

Table 8-20 Status of indicators on the OMU board panel during the OMU operating
system and OMU applications installation
Board Successful
Installation
Failed Installation
OMUc l The RUN indicator
blinks.
l The ALM indicator is
steady on or off.
l The ACT indicator is
steady on or off.
l The OFFLINE
indicator is off.
l The RUN indicator
blinks.
l The ALM indicator
blinks.
l The ACT indicator is
off.
l The OFFLINE
indicator is off.

10. Optional: Only when BSC6900 is configured with the GBFD-511701 Radio
Measurement Data Interface for Navigation feature and the BSC local IP address
is used for communication between the OMU and VNP, you need to reconfigure the
BSC local IP address, VLAN IDs for communication between the OMU and VNP,
and VLAN IDs for communication between the OMU and EMS/LMT based on "OMU
Ethernet Adapter Team IP Address Installation Information." For details, see
BSC6900 GU
Site Maintenance Guide 8 Replacing Boards and Modules
Issue 07 (2013-06-28) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
155
Configuring Radio Measurement Data Interface for Navigation in GBSS&RAN
Feature Activation Guide.
11. Log in to the LMT and start the file manager.
12. Select the target file on the local PC and click Upload to upload Step 1 or the most
recently saved OMU data to the active workspace on the OMU hard disk. Ensure that
the upload path is the same as the backup download path.
Run the MML command LST OMUAREA to query the active workspace. Assuming
that the active workspace is version_a:
Certificate files are saved in \bam\version_a\ftp\cert.
License files are saved in \bam\version_a\ftp\license.
OMU system data files are saved in \mbsc\bam\version_a\data\backup.
13. Log in to the OMU using the external network fixed IP address. For detailed
operations, see Logging In to the OMU.
14. Type the command /etc/rc.d/omud stop and press Enter to stop the omud process.
15. Type the command cd /mbsc/bam/common/services and press Enter to navigate to
the directory containing the omu_backup_linker tool.
16. Type the command ./omu_backup_linker and press Enter to start the
omu_backup_linker tool.
17. A message is displayed "Please input a valid bkp_res_type :." Type
restore and press Enter.
18. A message is displayed "Please input a valid backup file
pathname : ." Type the backup file save path and the file name and press Enter.
The system starts to restore data. A message will be displayed showing success or
failure. For example, "Restore OMU database succeed!" may be displayed.
19. Enter /etc/rc.d/omud start and press Enter to start the omud process on the standby
OMUc board.
20. Run the DSP OMU command in five minutes after the database is restored and the
OMUc board is started. When Operational state is Active normal, log in to the
second OMUc board, enter /etc/rc.d/omud start, and press Enter to start the omud
process of the second OMUc board.
21. Wait 10 minutes while the data of two OMUc boards is being synchronized.
22. Run the DSP OMU command to check the data synchronization progress. When
Data-sync state is Data synchronization is successful, start 8.18.6 Common
Operation for Replacing OMU Board.
----End
Scenario: Replacing an OMUa or OMUb Board with an OMUc Board
This section describes how to replace an OMUa or OMUb board with an OMUc board.
Prerequisites
l Two new OMUc boards are ready.
l You have logged in to the LMT. For detailed operations, see Logging In to and Logging
Out of the LMT.
BSC6900 GU
Site Maintenance Guide 8 Replacing Boards and Modules
Issue 07 (2013-06-28) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
156
l A USB installation disk has been prepared. For detailed operations, see Preparing a USB
Storage Device. The operation type is set to Install and OMU applications and patches are
installed during the preparation.
Context
If the OMU board to be replaced is faulty and cannot undergo operation and maintenance
(O&M), obtain the latest backup data for restoring the data on the new OMU board.
CAUTION
l To protect the OMU board from the Electrostatic Discharge (ESD), wear an ESD wrist strap
and insert its connector into the ESD socket on the cabinet before replacing the board. For
detailed operations, see Wearing an ESD Wrist Strap. If an ESD wrist strap or ground point
is unavailable, wear a pair of ESD gloves instead.
Procedure
Step 1 Run the BKP DB command with Path of Backup File and File Name set to appropriate values
to back up data and save it in the specified directory in the OMU hard disk.
Step 2 Save the performance configuration file, SSL license file, and OMU system data to the local PC.
1. Start the file manager on the LMT. For detailed operations, see Starting the file manager
on the LMT.
2. Select the files to be downloaded in the corresponding directories and click Download.
NOTE
Run the LST OMUAREA command to query the OMU active workspace. Assuming that the OMU active
workspace is version_a:
l Performance configuration files are saved in the \bam\version_a\ftp\DefaultMeas directory. Only
DefaultMeas_Active.xml and DefaultMeas_Standby.xml need to be backed up.
l SSL certificate files are saved in the \bam\version_a\ftp\cert directory.
l License files are saved in the \bam\version_a\ftp\license directory.
Step 3 Stop the omud process on the standby OMU board and shut down the OMU operating system
(OS).
If... Then...
The Suse Linux OS or Dopra Linux OS is
used
1. Log in to the active and standby OMU. For
detailed operations, see Logging in to the
OMU.
2. Run the /etc/rc.d/omud stop command to
stop the omud process.
3. Run the poweroff command to shut down
the OMU OS.
BSC6900 GU
Site Maintenance Guide 8 Replacing Boards and Modules
Issue 07 (2013-06-28) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
157
If... Then...
The Windows OS is used 1. Log in to the active and standby OMU. For
detailed operations, see Logging in to the
OMU.
2. Choose Start > Run, Enter cmdand then
press Enter. The OMU command
interface is displayed.
3. Run the net stop omud command to stop
the omud process.
4. Choose Start > Shutdown. Select
Shutdown from the drop-down list box to
shut down the OMU OS.

Step 4 Run the RMV BRD command to remove an OMUa or OMUb board.
Step 5 Run the ADD BRD command to add an OMUc board.
Step 6 Remove the OMU board to be replaced. For detailed operations, see Replacing an OMU board
that is configured with new ejector levers or Replacing an OMU board that is configured
with old ejector levers.
Step 7 Insert the prepared USB installation disk into any USB port on the OMU panel.
Step 8 Inset the new OMU board in the slots where the OMUa or OMUb board is installed.
NOTE
The OMUc board is set to boot from the USB port by default at delivery.
After the OMU board restarts, it automatically installs OS and software.
Step 9 Wait 1 to 2 minutes and then use the USB flash drive to install the OMU operating system. Check
the status of indicators on the OMU board panel to determine whether the OMU operating system
is installed successfully.
l If only the operating system is to be installed on the OMU, check the indicator status. See
Table 8-21.
l If the operating system and applications are to be installed on the OMU, check the indicator
status. See Table 8-22.
NOTE
If the status of the indicators differs from this, the OMU cannot identify the USB flash drive. When this occurs,
prepare another USB flash drive. Alternatively, copy the data in the original USB flash drive to a new USB flash
drive, and then reinstall the OMU operating system.
For information about how much time will be consumed during the OMU operating system installation, see
Table 1 in Preparing a USB Storage Device.
BSC6900 GU
Site Maintenance Guide 8 Replacing Boards and Modules
Issue 07 (2013-06-28) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
158
Table 8-21 Status of the indicators on the OMU board panel during the OMU operating system
installation
Board Installation
Procedure
Successful
Installation
Failed Installation
OMUc l The RUN
indicator blinks.
l The ALM
indicator blinks.
l The ACT
indicator blinks.
l The OFFLINE
indicator is off.
l The RUN
indicator blinks.
l The ALM
indicator is off.
l The ACT
indicator is off.
l The OFFLINE
indicator blinks.
l The RUN
indicator is off.
l The ALM
indicator blinks.
l The ACT
indicator is off.
l The OFFLINE
indicator blinks.

Table 8-22 Status of indicators on the OMU board panel during the OMU operating system and
OMU applications installation
Board Installation
Procedure
Successful
Installation
Failed Installation
OMUc l The RUN
indicator blinks.
l The ALM
indicator blinks.
l The ACT
indicator blinks.
l The OFFLINE
indicator is off.
l The RUN
indicator blinks.
l The ALM
indicator is
steady on or off.
l The ACT
indicator is
steady on or off.
l The OFFLINE
indicator is off.
l The RUN
indicator blinks.
l The ALM
indicator blinks.
l The ACT
indicator is off.
l The OFFLINE
indicator is off.

Step 10 Optional: Only when BSC6900 is configured with the GBFD-511701 Radio Measurement
Data Interface for Navigation feature and the BSC local IP address is used for communication
between the OMU and VNP, you need to reconfigure the BSC local IP address, VLAN IDs for
communication between the OMU and VNP, and VLAN IDs for communication between the
OMU and EMS/LMT based on "OMU Ethernet Adapter Team IP Address Installation
Information." For details, see Configuring Radio Measurement Data Interface for Navigation in
GBSS&RAN Feature Activation Guide.
Step 11 Log in to the LMT and start the file manager.
Step 12 Select the target file on the local PC and click Upload to upload Step 2 or the most recently
saved OMU data to the active workspace on the OMU hard disk. Ensure that the upload path is
the same as the backup download path.
Run the MML command LST OMUAREA to query the active workspace. Assuming that the
active workspace is version_a:
l Certificate files are saved in \bam\version_a\ftp\cert.
BSC6900 GU
Site Maintenance Guide 8 Replacing Boards and Modules
Issue 07 (2013-06-28) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
159
l License files are saved in \bam\version_a\ftp\license.
l OMU system data files are saved in \mbsc\bam\version_a\data\backup.
Step 13 Log in to the OMU using the external network fixed IP address. For detailed operations, see
Logging In to the OMU.
Step 14 Type the command /etc/rc.d/omud stop and press Enter to stop the omud process.
Step 15 Type the command cd /mbsc/bam/common/services and press Enter to navigate to the
directory containing the omu_backup_linker tool.
Step 16 Type the command ./omu_backup_linker and press Enter to start the omu_backup_linker tool.
Step 17 A message is displayed "Please input a valid bkp_res_type :." Type restore
and press Enter.
Step 18 A message is displayed "Please input a valid backup file pathname : ."
Type the backup file save path and the file name and press Enter. The system starts to restore
data. A message will be displayed showing success or failure. For example, "Restore OMU
database succeed!" may be displayed.
Step 19 Type the command /etc/rc.d/omud start and press Enter to start the omud process.
Step 20 Start 8.18.6 Common Operation for Replacing OMU Board.
----End
8.18.5 Scenario: Replacing Active and Standby OMUs in Dual-
System Mode
This section describes how to replace the active and standby OMUs when two OMUs are
configured as an active/standby pair on BSC6900. In this scenario, OMU operation and
maintenance of the host boards are interrupted.
Prerequisites
l A new OMU board is ready, and it is of the same type as the board to be replaced.
NOTE
The OMUc board only runs the Dopra Linux OS.
l A USB installation disk has been prepared. For detailed operations, see Preparing a USB
Storage Device. The operation type is set to Install and OMU applications and patches are
installed during the preparation.
Context
l Replace both the active and standby boards only when they are both faulty. Otherwise,
perform the operations described in 8.18.3 Scenario: Replacing the Standby OMU in
Dual-System Mode. If OMUc boards are used instead of OMUa/OMUb boards, see
Scenario: Replacing Two OMUa or OMUb Boards with Two OMUc Boards.
l The new OMUs can use the same operating system as the OMUs to be replaced or another
operating system, but the active and standby OMUs must use the same operating system.
l The new OMUs must be of the same type as the OMUs to be replaced.
BSC6900 GU
Site Maintenance Guide 8 Replacing Boards and Modules
Issue 07 (2013-06-28) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
160
l When the new OMU board runs a different OS from that of the OMU board to be replaced,
it is recommended that you switch the OS of the new OMU board to that of the old OMU
board. This takes care of the user operation habit.
CAUTION
l To protect the OMU board from the Electrostatic Discharge (ESD), wear an ESD wrist strap
and insert its connector into the ESD socket on the cabinet before replacing the board. For
detailed operations, see Wearing an ESD Wrist Strap. If an ESD wrist strap or ground point
is unavailable, wear a pair of ESD gloves instead.
Procedure
Step 1 Remove the active and standby OMUs by referring to Replacing an OMU board that is
configured with new ejector levers or Replacing an OMU board that is configured with old
ejector levers.
Step 2 Perform the following operations based on the operating system:
Option Description
If the OMU operating
system is Dopra Linux
1. Connect a USB installation disk to a USB port on each of the new
OMUs.
2. Install the new OMUs into the slots for the active and standby
OMUs.
3. After one or two minutes, the USB installation disks start
installation. Check the status of the indicators on the OMU panels
to determine whether installation is complete. For details about
indicator status, see Table 1 and Table 2 in Scenario: Old OMU
Board Running Dopra Linux and New OMU Board Running
Suse Linux/Windows
4. Perform the following operations based on the USB installation
disk type:
l If the operation type of the installation disk is Install, perform
Step 5.
l If the installation type of the USB installation disks is
Switch, go to 8.18.6 Common Operation for Replacing
OMU Board without needing to restore OMU data.
BSC6900 GU
Site Maintenance Guide 8 Replacing Boards and Modules
Issue 07 (2013-06-28) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
161
Option Description
If the OMU operating
system is Suse Linux
1. On the local computer, use EasyInstall to prepare an installation
source for Suse Linux. For details, see Preparations for
Reinstalling the OMU Operating System and Creating the
Operating System Installation Source.
2. Connect the local computer to the debugging Ethernet port on
each of the new OMUs.
3. Install a new OMU in the slot for the active OMU. For details, see
Replacing an OMU board that is configured with new ejector
levers or Replacing an OMU board that is configured with old
ejector levers.
4. Use EasyInstall to install Suse Linux. For details, see Installing
the OMU Operating System by Using the EasyInstall Software.
5. Repeat steps a through d to install another OMU into the slot for
the standby OMU and install Suse Linux.
6. Install OMU applicationss on the active and standby OMUs. For
details, see Install OMU applications. in Scenario: Old OMU
Running Suse Linux and New OMU Running Dopra Linux.
If the OMU operating
system is Windows
1. On the local computer, use EasyInstall to prepare an installation
source for Windows. For details, see Preparations for Reinstalling
the OMU Operating System, Creating the Operating System
Installation Source and Creating the Installation Source of the
SetWin Software and OS Patches.
2. Connect the local computer to the debugging Ethernet port on
each of the new OMUs.
3. Install a new OMU in the slot for the active OMU. For details, see
Replacing an OMU board that is configured with new ejector
levers or Replacing an OMU board that is configured with old
ejector levers.
4. Use EasyInstall to install Windows. For details, see Installing the
OMU Operating System Using the EasyInstall Software.
5. Repeat steps a through d to install another OMU into the slot for
the standby OMU and install Suse Linux.
6. Install OMU applicationss on the active and standby OMUs. For
details, see Install OMU applications. in Scenario: Old OMU
Running Windows and New OMU Running Dopra Linux.
Step 3 Change the IP addresses of the new OMUs to those of the OMUs to be replaced.
BSC6900 GU
Site Maintenance Guide 8 Replacing Boards and Modules
Issue 07 (2013-06-28) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
162
Option Description
If the OMU operating
system is Dopra Linux
1. Type the command cd /mbsc/bam/version_a/bin/bam and press
Enter to navigate to the directory containing omutool.
2. Change the OMU IP addresses by referring to the IP addresses
of the replaced OMU board.
l The ./omutool innercard IP address command is used to
change the fixed internal IP address.
l The ./omutool innervip IP address command is used to
change the virtual internal IP address.
l The ./omutool extercard IP address mask (gateway)
command is used to change the fixed external IP address and
mask.
l The ./omutool extervip IP address subnet mask (gateway)
command is used to change the virtual external IP address and
subnet mask.
l Use the command ./omutool backupcard IP address to
change the backup channel IP address of the active and standby
OMUs of the ETH3-UPDATE Ethernet adapter on an OMUa/
OMUb board.
l Use the command ./omutool backupcard_for_omuc IP
address to change the backup channel IP address of the active
and standby OMUs of the B_UPDATE0 Ethernet adapter on
an OMUc board.
l Use the command ./omutool backupcard_for_omua IP
address to change the backup channel IP address of the active
and standby OMUs of the B_UPDATE1 Ethernet adapter on
an OMUc board.
l The ./omutool debugcard IP address is used to change the
commissioning IP address.
NOTE
Changing the debugging IP address immediately disconnects the LMT
PC from the OMU board. Use the new debugging IP address to connect
the LMT PC to the OMU board again.
l Optional: Only when BSC6900 is configured with the
GBFD-511701 Radio Measurement Data Interface for
Navigation feature and the BSC local IP address is used for
communication between the OMU and VNP, you need to
reconfigure the BSC local IP address, VLAN IDs for
communication between the OMU and VNP, and VLAN IDs
for communication between the OMU and EMS/LMT based
on "OMU Ethernet Adapter Team IP Address Installation
Information." For details, see Configuring Radio
Measurement Data Interface for Navigation in GBSS&RAN
Feature Activation Guide.
3. Type the command /etc/rc.d/omud start and press Enter to start
the omud process.
BSC6900 GU
Site Maintenance Guide 8 Replacing Boards and Modules
Issue 07 (2013-06-28) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
163
Option Description
NOTE
After the IP address of the active OMU is set, log in to the standby OMU and
repeat the previous steps.
If the OMU operating
system is Suse Linux
1. Type the command cd /BSC6000/data/mbsc/bam/version_a/
bin/bam and press Enter to navigate to the directory containing
omutool.
2. Change the OMU IP addresses by referring to the IP addresses
of the replaced OMU board.
l The ./omutool innercard IP address command is used to
change the fixed internal IP address.
l The ./omutool innervip IP address command is used to
change the virtual internal IP address.
l The ./omutool extercard IP address mask (gateway)
command is used to change the fixed external IP address and
mask.
l The ./omutool extervip IP address subnet mask (gateway)
command is used to change the virtual external IP address and
subnet mask.
l Use the command ./omutool backupcard IP address to
change the backup channel IP address of the active and standby
OMUs of the ETH3-UPDATE Ethernet adapter on an OMUa/
OMUb board.
l The ./omutool debugcard IP address is used to change the
commissioning IP address.
NOTE
Changing the debugging IP address immediately disconnects the LMT
PC from the OMU board. Use the new debugging IP address to connect
the LMT PC to the OMU board again.
l Optional: Only when BSC6900 is configured with the
GBFD-511701 Radio Measurement Data Interface for
Navigation feature and the BSC local IP address is used for
communication between the OMU and VNP, you need to
reconfigure the BSC local IP address, VLAN IDs for
communication between the OMU and VNP, and VLAN IDs
for communication between the OMU and EMS/LMT based
on "OMU Ethernet Adapter Team IP Address Installation
Information." For details, see Configuring Radio
Measurement Data Interface for Navigation in GBSS&RAN
Feature Activation Guide.
3. Type the command /etc/rc.d/omud start and press Enter to start
the omud process.
NOTE
After the IP address of the active OMU is set, log in to the standby OMU and
repeat the previous steps.
BSC6900 GU
Site Maintenance Guide 8 Replacing Boards and Modules
Issue 07 (2013-06-28) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
164
Option Description
If the OMU operating
system is Windows
1. Choose Start > Run, type cmd, and press Enter to enter the OMU
command mode.
2. Type the command cd /d d:\mbsc\bam\version_a\bin\bam and
press Enter to navigate to the directory containing omutool.
3. Change the OMU IP addresses by referring to the IP addresses
of the replaced OMU board.
l The omutool innercard IP address command is used to
change the fixed internal IP address.
l The omutool innervip IP address is used to change the virtual
internal IP address.
l The omutool extercard IP address subnet mask (gateway IP
address) command is used to change the fixed external IP
address and subnet mask.
l The ./omutool extervip IP address subnet mask (gateway IP
address) command is used to change the virtual external IP
address and subnet mask.
l Use the command omutool backupcard IP address to change
the backup channel IP address of the active and standby OMUs
of the ETH3-UPDATE Ethernet adapter on an OMUa/
OMUb board.
l The omutool debugcard IP address command is used to
change the commissioning IP address.
NOTE
Changing the debugging IP address immediately disconnects the LMT
PC from the OMU board. Use the new debugging IP address to connect
the LMT PC to the OMU board again.
4. Type the command net start omud to start the omud progress.
NOTE
After the IP address of the active OMU is set, log in to the standby OMU and
repeat the previous steps.
Step 4 Install the operating system patch and upgrade the Ethernet adapter drive as shown in Table
8-23.
Table 8-23 Criteria for operations (3)
If... Then...
The OMU OS is Suse
Linux
Log in to http://support.huawei.com/support/ and choose Software
Center > Version Software > Wireless Product Line >
SingleRAN > SRAN O&M tools to download the OMU Driver
Upgrade CHS ***.rar and get Upgrade Guide to OMU Linux
Ethernet Adapter Driver and OMU driver upgrade tool. Please
refer to BSC6900 Upgrade Guide to OMU O&M Panel Adapter
Driver to upgrade the OMU adapter driver.
NOTE
Suse Linux Operating System has no patch.
BSC6900 GU
Site Maintenance Guide 8 Replacing Boards and Modules
Issue 07 (2013-06-28) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
165
If... Then...
The OMU OS is
Windows
Download and decpmpress the Upgrade Guide to OMU
Windows Operating System and Ethernet Adapter Driver.
rarfile from the release document. Decompress the package and
obtain the Upgrade Guide to OMU Windows Operating System
and Ethernet Adapter Driver.

Step 5 Remove the debugging Ethernet cable from the OMU board panel.
Step 6 Connect the LMT PC to the OMU external network.
Step 7 Download the latest backup data from the M2000 to the local computer For details, see Security
Management in M2000 Product Documentation.
Step 8 Log in to the LMT. For detailed operations, see Logging In to and Logging Out of the LMT. On
the LMT, start the file manager. For detailed operations, see File Manager.
Step 9 Select the target file on the local computer and then click Upload file to upload the most recently
saved OMU data to the OMU hard disk. Ensure that the upload path is consistent with the
download path of the backup data and the data is uploaded to the active workspace.
Run the MML command LST OMUAREA to query the active workspace. Assuming that the
active workspace is version_a:
l Certificate files are saved in \bam\version_a\ftp\cert.
l License files are saved in \bam\version_a\ftp\license.
l OMU system data files are saved in \mbsc\bam\version_a\data\backup.
Step 10 Restore OMU data based on the operating system.
BSC6900 GU
Site Maintenance Guide 8 Replacing Boards and Modules
Issue 07 (2013-06-28) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
166
Option Description
The OMU OS is
Dopra Linux
1. Log in to the standby OMU by using the fixed external network
IP address. For details, see Logging In to the OMU.
2. Type the command /etc/rc.d/omud stop and press Enter to stop
the omud process.
3. Refer to Steps a and B to log in to the active OMU and end the
omud process.
4. Type the command cd /mbsc/bam/common/services and press
Enter to navigate to the directory containing the
omu_backup_linker tool.
5. Type the command ./omu_backup_linker and press Enter to
start the omu_backup_linker tool.
6. A message is displayed "Please input a valid
bkp_res_type :." Type restore and press Enter.
7. A message is displayed "Please input a valid backup
file pathname : ." Type the backup file save path and the
file name and press Enter. The system starts to restore data. A
message will be displayed showing success or failure. For
example, "Restore OMU database succeed!" may be
displayed.
8. Type the command /etc/rc.d/omud start to start omud on the
active OMU.
9. Log in to the standby OMU by using the fixed external network
IP address. For details, refer to Logging In to the OMU.
10. Type the command /etc/rc.d/omud start to start omud on the
standby OMU.
BSC6900 GU
Site Maintenance Guide 8 Replacing Boards and Modules
Issue 07 (2013-06-28) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
167
Option Description
The OMU OS is Suse
Linux
1. Log in to the standby OMU by using the fixed external network
IP address. For details, refer to Logging In to the OMU.
2. Type the command /etc/rc.d/omud stop and press Enter to stop
the omud process.
3. Refer to Steps a and B to log in to the active OMU and end the
omud process.
4. Type the command cd /BSC6000/data/mbsc/bam/common/
services and press Enter to navigate to the directory containing
the omu_backup_linker tool.
5. Type the command ./omu_backup_linker and press Enter to
start the omu_backup_linker tool.
6. A message is displayed "Please input a valid
bkp_res_type :." Type restore and press Enter.
7. A message is displayed "Please input a valid backup
file pathname : ." Type the backup file save path and the
file name and press Enter. The system starts to restore data. A
message will be displayed showing success or failure. For
example, "Restore OMU database succeed!" may be
displayed.
8. Type the command /etc/rc.d/omud start to start omud on the
active OMU.
9. Log in to the standby OMU by using the fixed external network
IP address. For details, refer to Logging In to the OMU.
10. Type the command /etc/rc.d/omud start to start omud on the
standby OMU.
BSC6900 GU
Site Maintenance Guide 8 Replacing Boards and Modules
Issue 07 (2013-06-28) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
168
Option Description
The OMU OS is
Windows
1. Log in to the standby OMU by using the fixed external network
IP address. For details, refer to Logging In to the OMU.
2. Choose Start > Run, type cmd, and press Enter to enter the OMU
command mode.
3. Type the command net stop omud to stop the omud progress.
4. Refer to Steps a through c to log in to the active OMU and end
the omud process.
5. Type the command cd /d d:\mbsc\bam\common\services and
press Enter to navigate to the directory containing the
omu_backup_linker tool.
6. Type the command omu_backup_linker.exe and press Enter to
start the omu_backup_linker tool.
7. A message is displayed "Please input a valid
bkp_res_type :." Type restore and press Enter.
8. Type the backup file save path and the file name and press
Enter. The system starts to restore data. A message will be
displayed showing success or failure. For example, "Restore
OMU database succeed!" may be displayed.
9. Run net start omud to start omud on the active OMU.
10. Log in to the standby OMU by using the fixed external network
IP address. For details, refer to Logging In to the OMU.
11. Run net start omud to start omud on the standby OMU.
Step 11 Go to 8.18.6 Common Operation for Replacing OMU Board.
----End
8.18.6 Common Operation for Replacing OMU Board
This section describes the common operation after replacing OMU board, including querying
the OMU working status, modifying the name of the OMU, setting the time information of the
OMU, and setting the mode of the network adapter.
Procedure
Step 1 Optional: When the OMU runs the Dopra Linux operating system, set the OMU status to the
same status as that before the replacement based on the result recorded in Step 1 and Step 2.
For details, see Disabling OMU route forwarding and Disabling root user login with SSH.
Step 2 Log in to the LMT by referring to Log in to the LMT.
Step 3 Run the MML command DSP OMU to query such information as OMU running status, fixed
IP addresses, virtual IP addresses, data synchronization state, internal network connection state,
external network connection state, and backup channel connection state.
BSC6900 GU
Site Maintenance Guide 8 Replacing Boards and Modules
Issue 07 (2013-06-28) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
169
If... Then...
l One OMU board is
configured and its
Operational state is Normal
l Two OMU boards are
configured and their
Operational state is Active
normal and Standby normal
respectively
Perform operations described in Step 4.
Operational state is Fault
Contact Huawei technical support.
Step 4 Based on Data-sync state queried in Step 3, do as follows:
If... Then...
Data-sync state is not Data synchronization
is successful
Clear alarms by referring to
ALM-20701 OMU Failure Switchover
and ALM-20704 OMU Data
Synchronization Failure. Go to Step 5
after the alarms are cleared.
Data-sync state is Data synchronization is
successful
Perform operations described in Step
5.
Step 5 Run the MML commands LST VER and LST PATCHVER to query whether the OMU
software version and patch version are correct.
If... Then...
They are correct Perform operations described in Step 6.
They are incorrect Obtain the OMU version software and patch software
again and install them.
Step 6 Run the MML command DSP OMUMODULE to query the status of the OMU processes.
If... Then...
State is Active or Stopped
l In dual-OMU mode, go to Step 7.
l In single-OMU mode, go to Step 8.
State is Abnormal Contact Huawei technical support.
Step 7 (For OMU boards in dual-OMU mode only) Run the MML command CMP OMUDATA to
compare data about active and standby OMU boards. Check whether alarm data, performance
data, and configuration data are consistent between the active and standby OMU boards.
BSC6900 GU
Site Maintenance Guide 8 Replacing Boards and Modules
Issue 07 (2013-06-28) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
170
If... Then...
The data is inconsistent
1. Run the MML command STR DATASYNC to start
data synchronization.
2. Perform operations described in Step 8.
The data is consistent Perform operations described in Step 8.
Step 8 Run the MML command CMP LICENSE to check whether the running license on host boards
is consistent with that on the OMU board.
If... Then...
The licenses are inconsistent
1. Resolve the problem by referring to ALM-20734
License Inconsistency Between OMU and Host.
2. Perform operations described in Step 9.
The licenses are consistent Perform operations described in Step 9.
Step 9 Run the MML command CMP BRDVER to check whether the running version on host boards
is consistent with that on the OMU board.
If... Then...
The software versions are
inconsistent
1. Resolve the problem by referring to ALM-20733
Software Version Inconsistency Between OMU and
Host.
2. Perform operations described in Step 10.
The software versions are
consistent
Perform operations described in Step 10.
Step 10 Run the MML command ACT CRC to check whether the configuration data on host boards is
consistent with that on the OMU board.
If... Then...
The configuration data is
inconsistent
1. Resolve the problem by referring to ALM-20736 Data
Inconsistency Between OMU and Host.
2. Perform operations described in Step 11.
The configuration data is
consistent
Perform operations described in Step 11.
Step 11 Run the MML command LST BRD to query Slot No. and Board Type of the OMU board.
BSC6900 GU
Site Maintenance Guide 8 Replacing Boards and Modules
Issue 07 (2013-06-28) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
171
If... Then...
The board type is inconsistent
before and after the OMU board
replacement
1. Run the MML command RMV BRD to remove
configurations of the replaced OMU board.
2. Run the MML command ADD BRD to add
configurations of the new OMU board.
3. Perform operations described in Step 12.
The board type is consistent
before and after the OMU board
replacement
Perform operations described in Step 12.
Step 12 Enter the command omutool hostname OMU name to modify the name of the OMU.
Step 13 Run the MML command LST TZ to query time zone and daylight saving time of the OMU
board.
If... Then...
The time zone and daylight
saving time of the OMU is
inconsistent with the local time
1. Run the MML command SET TZ to set the time
information of the OMU.
2. Perform operations described in Step 14.
The time zone and daylight
saving time of the OMU is
consistent with the local time
Perform operations described in Step 14.
Step 14 Run the MML command DSP TIME to query Time of the OMU board.
If... Then...
The time of the OMU is
inconsistent with the local time
1. Run the MML command SET TIME to set the time
information of the OMU.
2. Perform operations described in Step 15.
The time of the OMU is
consistent with the local time
Perform operations described in Step 15.
Step 15 Set the mode of the network adapter according to the router combined with OMU. For the
detailed setting method, please refer to Setting the Link Mode of the External OMU Ethernet
Adapter when the OS is Dopra. Refer to Setting the Link Mode for External OMU Ethernet
Adapters when the OS is Windows.Refer toSetting the Link Mode for External OMU Ethernet
Adapters when the OS is Suse.Normally the default value is self-adaption. Set the OMU port as
100Mb/ Full Duplex only when the switchboard is forced to be 100Mb/full duplex.
Step 16 View the device panel on the LMT and check the status of all devices.
BSC6900 GU
Site Maintenance Guide 8 Replacing Boards and Modules
Issue 07 (2013-06-28) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
172
If... Then...
No abnormal device state is
introduced by the replacement
The replacement is complete.
An abnormal device state is
introduced by the replacement
Contact Huawei technical support.
----End
Follow-up Procedure
Record the name and the bar code of the replaced board. Check whether there are obvious
physical damages, such as the distorted pin, broken pin, or burnt board. If there is any damage,
fill in BSC6900 Site Maintenance Record Form and pack the replaced board. When packing
a board, pay attention to the following points:
l Wear an ESD wrist strap or a pair of ESD gloves.
l Ensure that each ESD bag or case holds only one board.
l When packing multiple boards, isolate them with ESD materials.
Contact the local Huawei office to dispose of the replaced board.
NOTE
You may obtain the name and the PCB version from the panel or bottom of the faulty board.
8.19 Replacing a PAMU Board
This section describes how to replace a faulty PAMU board. The PAMU board is hot-swappable.
It takes about ten minutes to replace the board.
Prerequisites
l The tools are ready. The tools are the ESD wrist strap, Phillips screwdriver, and ESD box
or bag.
l A new PAMU board is ready.
l The LMT is started and communicates with the OMU properly.
BSC6900 GU
Site Maintenance Guide 8 Replacing Boards and Modules
Issue 07 (2013-06-28) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
173
Context
CAUTION
l To avoid damage to the boards, ASIC chips, or other electronic components, wear an ESD
wrist strap properly. Ensure that the ESD wrist strap is properly connected to the ESD
connector on the cabinet. If no ESD wrist strap or no proper grounding point is available,
wear ESD gloves.
l It is recommended that you need to use the same board type to replace the old board. To use
a board of the different version to replace the board (for example, use a board of version a
to replace a board of version b), contact Huawei for technical support.
Procedure
Step 1 Record the status of the mute switch of the PAMU to be replaced.
For the position of the mute switch, see Panel of the PAMU Board.
Step 2 Set all bits of the DIP switch SW1 on the new PAMU to ON, as shown in Figure 8-16.
Figure 8-16 Setting of the DIP switch on the PAMU

Step 3 Loosen the screws on the monitoring board panel of the power distribution box with a Phillips
screwdriver, as shown in Figure 8-17.
BSC6900 GU
Site Maintenance Guide 8 Replacing Boards and Modules
Issue 07 (2013-06-28) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
174
Figure 8-17 Removing the monitoring board panel of the power distribution box
1 Monitoring board panel of the power distribution box 2 Pan head screw M3 3 PAMU board

Step 4 Hold the monitoring board panel and remove the board from the power distribution box.
Step 5 Loosen the screws fixing the monitoring board panel to the PAMU board with a Phillips
screwdriver and remove the PAMU. as shown in Figure 8-18.
Figure 8-18 Removing the PAMU board
1 Monitoring board panel of the power distribution box 2 Pan head screw M3 3 PAMU board

Step 6 Put the PAMU board in the ESD box or bag.
Step 7 Fix the panel to the PAMU board and fasten the screws.
Step 8 Insert the new PAMU board along the guide rails.
Step 9 Fasten the screws fixing the monitoring board panel to the power distribution box.
Step 10 The new board automatically loads program and configuration data, and the RUN LED blinks
every other 0.125s.
For details about the state of the LEDs on the board, see LEDs on the PAMU Board.
BSC6900 GU
Site Maintenance Guide 8 Replacing Boards and Modules
Issue 07 (2013-06-28) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
175
NOTE
If the RUN LED blinks every other 0.25s or the ALM LED is ON, remove the PAMU and install it again
to ensure that the PAMU is in full contact with the backplane.
Step 11 When the RUN LED blinks every other second, you can infer that the board works properly.
Step 12 Set the mute switch on the new PAMU according to the recorded settings.
Step 13 Check whether a board failure alarm is reported on the LMT.
If an alarm is reported, locate and rectify the fault according to the alarm information.
----End
Follow-up Procedure
Record the name and the bar code of the replaced board. Check whether there are obvious
physical damages, such as the distorted pin, broken pin, or burnt board. If there is any damage,
fill in BSC6900 Site Maintenance Record Form and pack the replaced board. When packing
a board, pay attention to the following points:
l Wear an ESD wrist strap or a pair of ESD gloves.
l Ensure that each ESD bag or case holds only one board.
l When packing multiple boards, isolate them with ESD materials.
Contact the local Huawei office to dispose of the replaced board.
NOTE
You can obtain the bar code of the board on the PCB plate of the faulty board.
8.20 Replacing a PEUa Board
This section describes how to replace a faulty PEUa board. The PEUa board is hot-swappable.
It takes about eight minutes to replace a PEUa board.
Prerequisites
l The tools are ready. The tools are the ESD wrist strap, Phillips screwdriver, flat-head
screwdriver, and ESD box or bag.
l A new PEUa board is ready.
l The LMT is started and communicates with the OMU properly.
BSC6900 GU
Site Maintenance Guide 8 Replacing Boards and Modules
Issue 07 (2013-06-28) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
176
Context
CAUTION
l To avoid damage to the boards, ASIC chips, or other electronic components, wear an ESD
wrist strap properly. Ensure that the ESD wrist strap is properly connected to the ESD
connector on the cabinet. If no ESD wrist strap or no proper grounding point is available,
wear ESD gloves.
l It is recommended that you need to use the same board type to replace the old board. To use
a board of the different version to replace the board (for example, use a board of version a
to replace a board of version b), contact Huawei for technical support.
CAUTION
l Replacing the standby PEUa has no adverse effect on the system. Replacing the PEUa board
that works independently, however, disrupts services carried on this board.
l If the BSC6900 and its peer equipment are connected through only the PEUa board, the
ongoing services between the BSC6900 and its peer equipment are disrupted when you
replace the PEUa board.
Procedure
Step 1 Run the LST SUBRACK command to query the backup status of the PEUa board to be replaced.
If... Then...
Backup type is Backup, Go to Step 2.
Backup type is No backup, Go to Step 3.
NOTE
If two BSC6900 boards work in backup mode, the boards must be installed in an even-numbered slot and
in the slot numbered with that value plus 1. For example, if the board that is installed in slot 14 does not
work in backup mode, the board that is installed in slot 15 does not work in backup mode either.
Step 2 Run the DSP BRD command to query the status of the board to be replaced.
BSC6900 GU
Site Maintenance Guide 8 Replacing Boards and Modules
Issue 07 (2013-06-28) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
177
If... Then...
CPU status is Active normal,
1. Run the SWP BRD command to switch the board
over to standby status.
2. Go to Step 4.
CAUTION
Run this command when the traffic is light, for instance,
at midnight.
The parameter is of any other values, Go to Step 4.
Step 3 Run the DSP IPPATH command to query the status of board to be replaced.
If... Then...
IPPATH status is AVAILABLE
1. Run the BLK IPPATH command to block the IP
path.
2. Go to Step 4.
IPPATH status is UNAVAILABLE Go to Step 4.
Step 4 Check whether the labels on the E1/T1 cable and clock cable (if configured) connected to the
PEUa are legible. If the labels are illegible, attach a new label to the cables to avoid improper
connection after the board is replaced.
Step 5 Disconnect the clock cable. Loosen the captive screws from the E1/T1 cable connector with a
flat-head screwdriver and disconnect the E1/T1 cable.
Step 6 Remove the PEUa board to be replaced by referring to 8.2.1 Removing a Board.
Step 7 Check whether the settings of the DIP switches on the new board are correct by referring to DIP
Switches on the PEUa Board.
If... Then...
The settings are correct, Go to Step 8.
The settings are incorrect,
1. Set the DIP switches correctly.
2. Go to Step 8.
Step 8 Install the new board into the subrack by referring to 8.2.2 Inserting a Board.
The new board automatically loads program and configuration data, and the RUN LED blinks
every other 0.125s.
Step 9 Connect the E1/T1 cable and clock cable by referring to the labels.
Step 10 If the RUN LED blinks every other second, run DSP BRD to query the status of the new board.
BSC6900 GU
Site Maintenance Guide 8 Replacing Boards and Modules
Issue 07 (2013-06-28) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
178
If... Then...
CPU status is Active normal or Standby normal, Go to Step 12.
The parameter is of any other values, Go to Step 11.
Step 11 Check whether a board failure alarm is reported on the BSC6900 LMT.
If... Then...
Alarms caused by a faulty board are
reported,
1. Locate and rectify the fault according to the
alarm help information.
2. Go to Step 10.
No alarms caused by the faulty board are
reported,
Go to Step 12.
Step 12 Run the CMP BRDVER command to check whether the software version of the new board is
consistent with the board version matching table.
If... Then...
The board version is consistent with the
board version matching table,
Go to Step 13.
The board version is inconsistent with the
board version matching table,
1. Ensure that the program files of the board in
the OMU active workspace installation\bin
\fam on the OMU are correct. If the program
files are incorrect, contact Huawei
engineers.
2. Run RST BRD to reset the board.
3. Go to Step 10.
NOTE
You can obtain the correct board version matching table from the version matching documents.
Step 13 If the IP path is blocked in Step 3, run the UBL IPPATH command to unblock the IP Path.
Otherwise, go to Step 14 directly.
Step 14 Verify this board is functioning correctly by testing the CS services with dialing and PS services
with web browsing.
----End
Follow-up Procedure
Record the name and the bar code of the replaced board. Check whether there are obvious
physical damages, such as the distorted pin, broken pin, or burnt board. If there is any damage,
fill in BSC6900 Site Maintenance Record Form and pack the replaced board. When packing
a board, pay attention to the following points:
BSC6900 GU
Site Maintenance Guide 8 Replacing Boards and Modules
Issue 07 (2013-06-28) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
179
l Wear an ESD wrist strap or a pair of ESD gloves.
l Ensure that each ESD bag or case holds only one board.
l When packing multiple boards, isolate them with ESD materials.
Contact the local Huawei office to dispose of the replaced board.
NOTE
You may obtain the name and the PCB version from the panel or bottom of the faulty board.
8.21 Replacing a POUa Board
This section describes how to replace a faulty POUa board. The POUa board is hot-swappable.
It takes about five minutes to replace the board.
Prerequisites
l The tools are ready. The tools are the ESD wrist strap, Phillips screwdriver, flat-head
screwdriver, ESD box or bag, dustfree cotton cloth, and fiber cleaner.
l A new POUa board is ready.
l The LMT is started and communicates with the OMU properly.
Context
CAUTION
l To avoid damage to the boards, ASIC chips, or other electronic components, wear an ESD
wrist strap properly. Ensure that the ESD wrist strap is properly connected to the ESD
connector on the cabinet. If no ESD wrist strap or no proper grounding point is available,
wear ESD gloves.
l It is recommended that you need to use the same board type to replace the old board. To use
a board of the different version to replace the board (for example, use a board of version a
to replace a board of version b), contact Huawei for technical support.
CAUTION
l Replacing the standby POUa has no adverse effect on the system. Replacing the POUa board
that works independently, however, disrupts services carried by the subrack that houses the
board.
l If the BSC6900 and its peer equipment are connected through only the POUa board, the
ongoing services between the BSC6900 and its peer equipment are disrupted when you
replace the POUa board.
Procedure
Step 1 Run the LST SUBRACK command to query the backup status of the POUa board to be replaced.
BSC6900 GU
Site Maintenance Guide 8 Replacing Boards and Modules
Issue 07 (2013-06-28) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
180
If... Then...
Backup type is Backup, Go to Step 2.
Backup type is No backup, Go to Step 4.
NOTE
If two BSC6900 boards work in backup mode, the boards must be installed in an even-numbered slot and
in the slot numbered with that value plus 1. For example, if the board that is installed in slot 14 does not
work in backup mode, the board that is installed in slot 15 does not work in backup mode either.
Step 2 Run the DSP BRD command to query the status of the POUa board to be replaced.
If... Then...
CPU status is Active normal,
1. Run the SWP BRD command to switch the board
over to standby status.
2. Go to Step 3.
CAUTION
Run this command when the traffic is light, for instance,
at midnight.
The parameter is of any other values, Go to Step 3.
Step 3 Run the DSP OPT command to query the backup status of all the ports on the POUa board to
be replaced.
If... Then...
The ports are configured in independent
mode,
Go to Step 4.
BSC6900 GU
Site Maintenance Guide 8 Replacing Boards and Modules
Issue 07 (2013-06-28) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
181
If... Then...
The ports are configured in active/
standby mode, and the ports are active,
1. Run the DSP MSP command to query the
MSP status.
l If the MSP is not started, run the ACT
MSP command to activate the MSP.
l If the MSP has been started, go to 3.2.
2. Run the SET MSPCMD command to switch
the active port to standby status.
l If the active port is located in a slot with a
even number, set MSPCMD to MS
(Manual switchover from working link
to protection link).
l If the active port is located in a slot with
an odd number, setMSPCMD to LOP
(Lockout of Protection).
3. Go to Step 5.
CAUTION
Before activating the MSP, ensure that the local end
and the peer end have the same protection mode.
The ports are configured in active/
standby mode, and the ports are standby,
Go to Step 5.
Step 4 Run the DSP IPPATH command to query the IP Path status carried on the board to be replacing.
The blocked IP path cannot carry new services while the existing services are not affected.
If... Then...
IPPATH status is AVAILABLE
1. Run the BLK IPPATH command to block the IP
path.
2. Go to Step 5.
IPPATH status is UNAVAILABLE Go to Step 5.
Step 5 Check whether the labels on the optical cable and clock cable (if configured) connected to the
POUa are legible. If the labels are illegible, attach a new label to the cables to avoid improper
connection after the board is replaced.
Step 6 Remove the optical cables and cap the connectors. If the connectors are dirty, clean them with
the dustfree cotton cloth or the fiber cleaner.
Step 7 Remove the board by referring to 8.2.1 Removing a Board and cap the optical ports.
Step 8 Check whether the settings of the DIP Switches on the POUa Board of the standby board are
correct.
BSC6900 GU
Site Maintenance Guide 8 Replacing Boards and Modules
Issue 07 (2013-06-28) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
182
If... Then...
The settings are correct, Go to Step 9.
The settings are incorrect,
1. Set the DIP switches correctly.
2. Go to Step 9.
Step 9 Install the new board into the subrack by referring to 8.2.2 Inserting a Board.
The new board automatically loads program and configuration data, and the RUN LED blinks
every other 0.125s.
Step 10 Remove the caps from optical ports and connectors, and reserve them for later use. Then, install
the optical cables by referring to the labels.
Step 11 Install the clock cable (if configured) by referring to the labels.
Step 12 If the RUN LED blinks every other second, run the DSP BRD command to query the status of
the new board.
If... Then...
CPU status is Active normal or Standby normal, Go to Step 14.
The parameter is of any other values, Go to Step 13.
Step 13 Check whether a board failure alarm is reported on the BSC6900 LMT.
If... Then...
Alarms caused by a faulty board are
reported,
1. Locate and rectify the fault according to the
alarm help information.
2. Go to Step 12.
No alarms caused by the faulty board are
reported,
Go to Step 14.
Step 14 Run the CMP BRDVER command to check whether the software version of the new board is
consistent with the board version matching table.
If... Then...
The board version is consistent with the
board version matching table,
Go to Step 15.
BSC6900 GU
Site Maintenance Guide 8 Replacing Boards and Modules
Issue 07 (2013-06-28) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
183
If... Then...
The board version is inconsistent with the
board version matching table,
1. Ensure that the program files of the board in
the OMU active workspace installation\bin
\fam on the OMU are correct. If the program
files are incorrect, contact Huawei
engineers.
2. Run RST BRD to reset the board.
3. Go to Step 12.
NOTE
You can obtain the correct board version matching table from the version matching documents.
Step 15 If the IP path is blocked in Step 4, run the UBL IPPATH command to unblock the IP Path.
Otherwise, go to Step 17 directly.
Step 16 If the status of the active port has been changed to standby in Step 3, run the SET MSPCMD
command withMSP Control Command set to CLEAR(Cleared). If the status of the active
port is not changed, go to Step 17.
Step 17 Verify this board is functioning correctly by testing the CS services with dialing and PS services
with web browsing.
----End
Follow-up Procedure
Record the name and the bar code of the replaced board. Check whether there are obvious
physical damages, such as the distorted pin, broken pin, or burnt board. If there is any damage,
fill in BSC6900 Site Maintenance Record Form and pack the replaced board. When packing
a board, pay attention to the following points:
l Wear an ESD wrist strap or a pair of ESD gloves.
l Ensure that each ESD bag or case holds only one board.
l When packing multiple boards, isolate them with ESD materials.
Contact the local Huawei office to dispose of the replaced board.
NOTE
You may obtain the name and the PCB version from the panel or bottom of the faulty board.
8.22 Replacing a POUc Board
This section describes how to replace a faulty POUc board. The POUc board is hot-swappable.
It takes about five minutes to replace the board.
Prerequisites
l The tools are ready. The tools are the ESD wrist strap, Phillips screwdriver, flat-head
screwdriver, ESD box or bag, dustfree cotton cloth, and fiber cleaner.
l A new POUc board is ready.
BSC6900 GU
Site Maintenance Guide 8 Replacing Boards and Modules
Issue 07 (2013-06-28) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
184
l The LMT is started and communicates with the OMU properly.
Context
CAUTION
l To avoid damage to the boards, ASIC chips, or other electronic components, wear an ESD
wrist strap properly. Ensure that the ESD wrist strap is properly connected to the ESD
connector on the cabinet. If no ESD wrist strap or no proper grounding point is available,
wear ESD gloves.
l It is recommended that you need to use the same board type to replace the old board. To use
a board of the different version to replace the board (for example, use a board of version a
to replace a board of version b), contact Huawei for technical support.
CAUTION
l Replacing the standby POUc board has no adverse effect on the system. Replacing the POUc
board that works independently, however, disrupts services carried by the subrack that houses
the board.
l If the BSC6900 and its peer equipment are connected through only the POUc board, the
ongoing services between the BSC6900 and its peer equipment are disrupted when you
replace the POUc board.
Procedure
Step 1 Run the LST SUBRACK command to query the backup status of the POUc board to be replaced.
If... Then...
Backup type is Backup, Go to Step 2.
Backup type is No backup, Go to Step 4.
NOTE
If two BSC6900 boards work in backup mode, the boards must be installed in an even-numbered slot and
in the slot numbered with that value plus 1. For example, if the board that is installed in slot 14 does not
work in backup mode, the board that is installed in slot 15 does not work in backup mode either.
Step 2 Run the DSP BRD command to query the status of the POUc board to be replaced.
BSC6900 GU
Site Maintenance Guide 8 Replacing Boards and Modules
Issue 07 (2013-06-28) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
185
If... Then...
CPU status is Active normal,
1. Run the SWP BRD command to switch the board
to standby status.
2. Go to Step 3.
CAUTION
Run this command during off-peak hours, for instance, at
midnight.
The parameter is of any other values, Go to Step 3.
Step 3 Run the DSP OPT command to query the backup status of all the ports on the POUc board to
be replaced.
If... Then...
The ports are configured in independent
mode,
Go to Step 4.
The ports are configured in active/
standby mode, and the ports are active,
1. Run the DSP MSP command to query the
MSP status.
l If the MSP is not started, run the ACT
MSP command to activate the MSP.
l If the MSP has been started, go to 3.2.
2. Run the SET MSPCMD command to switch
the active port to standby status.
l If the active port is located in a slot with a
even number, set MSPCMD to MS
(Manual switchover from working link
to protection link).
l If the active port is located in a slot with
an odd number, setMSPCMD to LOP
(Lockout of Protection).
3. Go to Step 5.
CAUTION
Before activating the MSP, ensure that the local end
and the peer end have the same protection mode.
The ports are configured in active/
standby mode, and the ports are standby,
Go to Step 5.
Step 4 Run the DSP IPPATH command to query the IP Path status carried on the board to be replacing.
The blocked IP path cannot carry new services while the existing services are not affected.
BSC6900 GU
Site Maintenance Guide 8 Replacing Boards and Modules
Issue 07 (2013-06-28) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
186
If... Then...
IPPATH status is AVAILABLE
1. Run the BLK IPPATH command to block the IP
path.
2. Go to Step 5.
IPPATH status is UNAVAILABLE Go to Step 5.
Step 5 Check whether the labels on the optical cable and clock cable (if configured) connected to the
POUc are legible. If the labels are illegible, attach a new label to the cables to avoid improper
connection after the board is replaced.
Step 6 Remove the optical cables and cap the connectors. If the connectors are dirty, clean them with
dustfree cotton cloth or fiber cleaner.
Step 7 Remove the board by referring to 8.2.1 Removing a Board and cap the optical ports.
Step 8 Install the new board into the subrack by referring to 8.2.2 Inserting a Board.
The new board automatically loads program and configuration data, and the RUN LED blinks
every other 0.125s.
Step 9 Remove the caps from optical ports and connectors, and keep them for later use. Then, install
the optical cables by referring to the labels.
Step 10 Install the clock cable (if configured) by referring to the labels.
Step 11 If the RUN LED blinks every other second, run the DSP BRD command to query the status of
the new board.
If... Then...
CPU status is Active normal or Standby normal, Go to Step 13.
The parameter is of any other values, Go to Step 12.
Step 12 Check whether a board failure alarm is reported on the LMT.
If... Then...
Alarms caused by a faulty board are
reported,
1. Locate and rectify the fault according to the
alarm help information.
2. Go to Step 11.
No alarms caused by the faulty board are
reported,
Go to Step 13.
Step 13 Run the CMP BRDVER command to check whether the software version of the new board is
consistent with the board version matching table.
BSC6900 GU
Site Maintenance Guide 8 Replacing Boards and Modules
Issue 07 (2013-06-28) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
187
If... Then...
The board version is consistent with the
board version matching table,
Go to Step 14.
The board version is inconsistent with the
board version matching table,
1. Ensure that the program files of the board in
the OMU active workspace installation\bin
\fam on the OMU are correct. If the program
files are incorrect, contact Huawei
engineers.
2. Run the RST BRD command to reset the
board.
3. Go to Step 11.
NOTE
You can obtain the correct board version matching table from the version matching documents.
Step 14 If the IP path is blocked in Step 4, run the UBL IPPATH command to unblock the IP Path.
Otherwise, go to Step 16 directly.
Step 15 If the status of the active port has been changed to standby in Step 3, run the SET MSPCMD
command withMSP Control Command set to CLEAR(Cleared). If the status of the active
port is not changed, go to Step 16.
Step 16 Verify this board is functioning correctly by testing the CS services with dialing and PS services
with web browsing.
----End
Follow-up Procedure
Record the name and the bar code of the replaced board. Check whether there are obvious
physical damages, such as the distorted pin, broken pin, or burnt board. If there is any damage,
fill in BSC6900 Site Maintenance Record Form and pack the replaced board. When packing
a board, pay attention to the following points:
l Wear an ESD wrist strap or a pair of ESD gloves.
l Ensure that each ESD bag or case holds only one board.
l When packing multiple boards, isolate them with ESD materials.
Contact the local Huawei office to dispose of the replaced board.
NOTE
You may obtain the name and the PCB version from the panel or bottom of the faulty board.
8.23 Replace an SAUa/SAUc Board
This section describes how to replace a faulty SAUa/SAUc board. The SAUa/SAUc board is
hot-swappable. It takes about 16 minutes to replace the SAUa/SAUc board.
BSC6900 GU
Site Maintenance Guide 8 Replacing Boards and Modules
Issue 07 (2013-06-28) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
188
Prerequisites
l The tools used for replacing the SAUa/SAUc board are ready. The required tools are as
follows: ESD wrist strap, Phillips screwdriver, and ESD box/bag.
l You have prepared a new SAUa or SAUc board.
l The SAUa/SAUc board to be replaced is disabled.
Context
The following items of the new SAUa/SAUc board must be consistent with those of the SAUa/
SAUc board to be replaced:
l Password of the administrator of the operating system
l Internal and external fixed IP addresses of the new SAUa/SAUc board
l PC name of the new SAUa/SAUc board
CAUTION
Replacing the SAUa/SAUc board that works independently will disrupt the communication
between the host boards and the SAUa/SAUc, which results in system data loss.
Procedure
Step 1 Wear the ESD wrist strap and connect the ground core of the wrist strap to the ESD jack on the
cabinet.
Step 2 Remove the SAUa/SAUc board to be replaced.
1. Loosen the captive screw on the SAUa/SAUc board counterclockwise with a screwdriver,
as shown in A of Figure 8-19.
BSC6900 GU
Site Maintenance Guide 8 Replacing Boards and Modules
Issue 07 (2013-06-28) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
189
Figure 8-19 Uninstalling the SAUa/SAUc board

NOTE
The preceding figure takes an SAUa board as an example. The procedure for an SAUc board is
similar.
2. Press and hold the two locking buttons, flip outward the ejector levers on the SAUa/SAUc
board panel to unlock them, and rotate them outward. The SAUa/SAUc board is separated
from the backplane, as shown in part B of Figure 8-19.
NOTE
Turning outwards the ejector levers on the SAUa/SAUc board gives a power-off sign to the SAUa/
SAUc board. The SAUa/SAUc board automatically shuts down the operating system and stops the
read/write operations on the hard disk. Then, the OFFLINE/OFL LED on the SAUa/SAUc board is
on steady. In indicates that the SAUa/SAUc board is powered off.
3. Remove the Ethernet cable, mouse cable, keyboard cable, and monitor cable (if configured)
from the SAUa/SAUc board after the OFFLINE/OFL LED flashes fast and then is steady
blue.
4. Remove the SAUa/SAUc board to be replaced along the guide rail of the subrack, as shown
in C of Figure 8-19.
BSC6900 GU
Site Maintenance Guide 8 Replacing Boards and Modules
Issue 07 (2013-06-28) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
190
Step 3 Install the new SAUa/SAUc board.
1. Press and hold the two locking buttons of the new board, flip outward the ejector levers to
separate them from the self-locking latch, and rotate them until they cannot be rotated, as
shown in part A of Figure 8-20.
2. Slide the new SAUa/SAUc board along the guide rails into the subrack, as shown in B of
Figure 8-20.
Figure 8-20 Installing the SAUa/SAUc board

NOTE
l The preceding figure takes an SAUa board as an example. The procedure for an SAUc board is
similar.
l The SAUa/SAUc is preferentially inserted into slots that meet the requirements. For details, see
SAUa Board or SAUc Board.
3. Turn the ejector levers on the SAUa/SAUc board inwards until they are in position, as
shown in C of Figure 8-20.
4. Tighten the captive screw clockwise with a screwdriver, as shown in D of Figure 8-20.
The new SAUa/SAUc board loads automatically and the RUN LED blinks (0.125s on and
0.125s off).
5. Install the cables by referring to the labels.
BSC6900 GU
Site Maintenance Guide 8 Replacing Boards and Modules
Issue 07 (2013-06-28) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
191
Step 4 Install the SAU Software. Configure the PC name and IP addresses of the new SAUa/SAUc
board to ensure that they are the same as those of the replaced SAUa/SAUc board.
For details, see the SAU User Guide of Nastar documents.
Step 5 Confirm that the SAUa/SAUc board works properly.
1. Run the DSP SAU command to query the status of the new SAUa/SAUc board when the
RUN indicator is blinking (1s on and 1s off).
If ... Then ...
Operating Status is Active
Normal
Go to Step 5.3.
Other execution results are
displayed
Go to Step 5.2.

2. Check whether the alarms related board faults are displayed on the LMT.
If ... Then ...
Alarms related to board faults are
reported
a. Analyze the alarms according to the alarm
information, and then clear the alarms.
b. Go to Step 5.1.
Alarms related to board faults are
not displayed
Go to Step 5.3.

3. Run the DSP SAUMODULE command to query the status of the SAU services.
If ... Then ...
Status is Startup Type The replacing is complete.
Status is Stopped Restart the abnormal process. If the fault persists,
contact the Huawei technical support engineers.
Status is Abnormal Contact Huawei technical support engineers.

----End
Follow-up Procedure
1. Record the name of the site, slot, and board where the faulty board is located and the version
of the board.
2. Check whether there is obvious physical damage to the board. For example, check whether
there are any deformed mechanical parts, burned components, distorted connectors, and
bent or broken-off pins.
3. Record the fault cause, fault symptom, alarm name, status of indicators on the panel of the
board, and details of the procedures for locating and processing the faults on site.
4. Put the board into the ESD bag and then put the bag together with the onsite fault record
into the board box. Keep the box properly.
BSC6900 GU
Site Maintenance Guide 8 Replacing Boards and Modules
Issue 07 (2013-06-28) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
192
5. Contact the local Huawei office to handle the faulty board. .
8.24 Replacing an SCUa/SCUb Board
This section describes how to replace a faulty SCUa/SCUb board. The SCUa/SCUb board is
hot-swappable. It takes about four minutes to replace the board.
Prerequisites
l The tools are ready. The tools are the ESD wrist strap, Phillips screwdriver, ESD box or
bag, dustfree cotton cloth, and fiber cleaner.
l A new SCUa/SCUb board is ready.
l The LMT is started and communicates with the OMU properly.
Context
CAUTION
l To avoid damage to the boards, ASIC chips, or other electronic components, wear an ESD
wrist strap properly. Ensure that the ESD wrist strap is properly connected to the ESD
connector on the cabinet. If no ESD wrist strap or no proper grounding point is available,
wear ESD gloves.
l It is recommended that you need to use the same board type to replace the old board. To use
a board of the different version to replace the board (for example, use a board of version a
to replace a board of version b), contact Huawei for technical support.
CAUTION
l Replacing the standby SCUa/SCUb board decreases the internal switching capacity and has
no effect on the services in the system.
l When no standby board is in position, replacing the SCUa/SCUb board in the MPS resets all
the other boards in the MPS and disrupts all the ongoing services in the subrack.
l When no standby board is in position, replacing the SCUa/SCUb board in the EPS/TCS resets
all the other boards in the EPS/TCS and disrupts all the ongoing services in the subrack. In
addition, the communication between the EPS/TCS and the MPS is disrupted.
Procedure
Step 1 Display the subrack that houses the SCUa/SCUb board in the Device Panel on the LMT. Check
the configuration of the SCUa/SCUb board.
BSC6900 GU
Site Maintenance Guide 8 Replacing Boards and Modules
Issue 07 (2013-06-28) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
193
If... Then...
Slots 6 and 7 are configured with the SCUa/SCUb boards, Go to Step 2.
Slot 6 or 7 is configured with the SCUa/SCUb board, Go to Step 3.
Step 2 Run the DSP BRD command to query the status of the board to be replaced.
If... Then...
CPU status is Active normal,
1. Run SWP BRD to switch the board over to
standby.
2. Go to Step 3.
CAUTION
A forced active/standby switchover will affect the running
of the system. Therefore, run this command when the
traffic is light, for instance, at midnight.
The parameter is of any other values, Go to Step 3.
Step 3 Check whether the labels on the cables connected to the SCUa/SCUb are legible. If the labels
are illegible, re-label the cables to avoid faulty connections after replacing the board.
Step 4 Disconnect the cables from the faulty board.
Step 5 Remove the board to be replaced by referring to 8.2.1 Removing a Board.
Step 6 Insert the new board into the subrack by referring to 8.2.2 Inserting a Board.
The new board automatically loads program and configuration data, and the RUN LED blinks
every other 0.125s.
Step 7 Install the cables by referring to the labels.
Step 8 If the RUN LED blinks every other second, run DSP BRD to query the status of the new board.
If... Then...
Only one SCUa/SCUb board is configured and the CPU status is Active
normal,
Go to Step 10.
Two SCUa/SCUb boards are configured and the CPU status is Standby
normal,
Go to Step 10.
The parameter is of any other values, Go to Step 9.
Step 9 Check whether a board failure alarm is reported on the BSC6900 LMT.
BSC6900 GU
Site Maintenance Guide 8 Replacing Boards and Modules
Issue 07 (2013-06-28) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
194
If... Then...
Alarms caused by a faulty board are
reported,
1. Locate and rectify the fault according to the
alarm help information.
2. Go to Step 8.
No alarms caused by the faulty board are
reported,
Go to Step 10.
Step 10 Run the CMP BRDVER command to check whether the software version of the new board is
consistent with the board version matching table.
If... Then...
The board version is consistent with the
board version matching table,
Go to Step 11.
The board version is inconsistent with the
board version matching table,
1. Ensure that the program files of the board in
the OMU active workspace installation\bin
\fam on the OMU are correct. If the program
files are incorrect, contact Huawei
engineers.
2. Run RST BRD to reset the board.
3. Go to Step 8.
NOTE
You can obtain the correct board version matching table from the version matching documents.
Step 11 Verify this board is functioning correctly by testing the CS services with dialing and PS services
with web browsing.
----End
Follow-up Procedure
Record the name and the bar code of the replaced board. Check whether there are obvious
physical damages, such as the distorted pin, broken pin, or burnt board. If there is any damage,
fill in BSC6900 Site Maintenance Record Form and pack the replaced board. When packing
a board, pay attention to the following points:
l Wear an ESD wrist strap or a pair of ESD gloves.
l Ensure that each ESD bag or case holds only one board.
l When packing multiple boards, isolate them with ESD materials.
Contact the local Huawei office to dispose of the replaced board.
NOTE
You may obtain the name and the PCB version from the panel or bottom of the faulty board.
BSC6900 GU
Site Maintenance Guide 8 Replacing Boards and Modules
Issue 07 (2013-06-28) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
195
8.25 Replacing a TNUa Board
This section describes how to replace a faulty TNUa board. The TNUa board is hot-swappable.
It takes about four minutes to replace the board.
Prerequisites
l The tools are ready. The tools are the ESD wrist strap, Phillips screwdriver, ESD box or
bag, dustfree cotton cloth, and fiber cleaner.
l A new TNUa board is ready.
l The LMT is started and communicates with the OMU properly.
Context
CAUTION
l To avoid damage to the boards, ASIC chips, or other electronic components, wear an ESD
wrist strap properly. Ensure that the ESD wrist strap is properly connected to the ESD
connector on the cabinet. If no ESD wrist strap or no proper grounding point is available,
wear ESD gloves.
l It is recommended that you need to use the same board type to replace the old board. To use
a board of the different version to replace the board (for example, use a board of version a
to replace a board of version b), contact Huawei for technical support.
CAUTION
l Replacing the standby TNUa board decreases the internal switching capacity and has no
impact on the ongoing services.
l When no standby board is in position, replacing the TNUa board in the MPS resets all the
other boards in the MPS and disrupts all the ongoing services in the subrack.
l When no standby board is in position, replacing the TNUa board in the EPS/TCS resets all
the other boards in the EPS/TCS and disrupts all the ongoing services in the subrack. In
addition, the communication between the EPS/TCS and the MPS is disrupted.
Procedure
Step 1 Display the subrack that houses the TNUa board in the Device Panel on the LMT. Check the
configuration of the TNUa board.
If... Then...
Slots 4 and 5 are configured with the TNUa boards, Go to Step 2.
BSC6900 GU
Site Maintenance Guide 8 Replacing Boards and Modules
Issue 07 (2013-06-28) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
196
If... Then...
Slot 4 or 5 is configured with the TNUa board, Go to Step 3.
Step 2 Run the DSP BRD command to query the status of the board to be replaced.
If... Then...
CPU status is Active normal,
1. Run the SWP BRD command to switch the board
over to standby status.
2. Go to Step 3.
CAUTION
Run this command when the traffic is light, for instance,
at midnight.
The parameter is of any other values, Go to Step 3.
Step 3 Check whether the labels on the cables connected to the TNUa board are legible. If the labels
are illegible, attach a new label to the cables to avoid improper connection after the board is
replaced.
Step 4 Disconnect the cables from the faulty board.
Step 5 Remove the board to be replaced by referring to 8.2.1 Removing a Board.
Step 6 Insert the new board into the subrack by referring to 8.2.2 Inserting a Board.
The new board automatically loads program and configuration data, and the RUN LED blinks
every other 0.125s.
Step 7 Install the cables by referring to the labels.
Step 8 If the RUN LED blinks every other second, run DSP BRD to query the status of the new board.
If... Then...
Only one TNUa board is configured, and the CPU status is Active
normal,
Go to Step 10.
Two SCUa boards are configured and the CPU status is Standby
normal,
Go to Step 10.
The parameter is of any other values, Go to Step 9.
Step 9 Check whether a board failure alarm is reported on the BSC6900 LMT.
BSC6900 GU
Site Maintenance Guide 8 Replacing Boards and Modules
Issue 07 (2013-06-28) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
197
If... Then...
Alarms caused by a faulty board are
reported,
1. Locate and rectify the fault according to the
alarm help information.
2. Go to Step 8.
No alarms caused by the faulty board are
reported,
Go to Step 10.
Step 10 Run the CMP BRDVER command to check whether the software version of the new board is
consistent with the board version matching table.
If... Then...
The board version is consistent with the
board version matching table,
Go to Step 11.
The board version is inconsistent with the
board version matching table,
1. Ensure that the program files of the board in
the OMU active workspace installation\bin
\fam on the OMU are correct. If the program
files are incorrect, contact Huawei
engineers.
2. Run RST BRD to reset the board.
3. Go to Step 8.
NOTE
You can obtain the correct board version matching table from the version matching documents.
Step 11 Verify this board is functioning correctly by testing the CS services with dialing and PS services
with web browsing.
----End
Follow-up Procedure
Record the name and the bar code of the replaced board. Check whether there are obvious
physical damages, such as the distorted pin, broken pin, or burnt board. If there is any damage,
fill in BSC6900 Site Maintenance Record Form and pack the replaced board. When packing
a board, pay attention to the following points:
l Wear an ESD wrist strap or a pair of ESD gloves.
l Ensure that each ESD bag or case holds only one board.
l When packing multiple boards, isolate them with ESD materials.
Contact the local Huawei office to dispose of the replaced board.
NOTE
You may obtain the name and the PCB version from the panel or bottom of the faulty board.
BSC6900 GU
Site Maintenance Guide 8 Replacing Boards and Modules
Issue 07 (2013-06-28) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
198
8.26 Replacing a UOIa Board
This section describes how to replace a faulty UOIa board. The UOIa board is hot swappable.
It takes about five minutes to replace the board.
Prerequisites
l The tools are ready. The tools are the ESD wrist strap, Phillips screwdriver, ESD box or
bag, dustfree cotton cloth, and fiber cleaner.
l A new UOIa board is ready.
l The LMT is started and communicates with the OMU properly.
Context
CAUTION
l To avoid damage to the boards, ASIC chips, or other electronic components, wear an ESD
wrist strap properly. Ensure that the ESD wrist strap is properly connected to the ESD
connector on the cabinet. If no ESD wrist strap or no proper grounding point is available,
wear ESD gloves.
l It is recommended that you need to use the same board type to replace the old board. To use
a board of the different version to replace the board (for example, use a board of version a
to replace a board of version b), contact Huawei for technical support.
CAUTION
l Replacing the standby UOIa board has no adverse effect on the system. When no standby
UOIa board is in position, replacing the board disrupts services carried on this board.
l If the BSC6900 and its peer equipment are connected through only the UOIa board, the
ongoing services between the BSC6900 and its peer equipment are disrupted when you
replace the UOIa board.
Procedure
Step 1 Run the LST SUBRACK command to query the backup status of the UOIa board to be replaced.
If... Then...
Backup type is Backup, Go to Step 2.
Backup type is No backup, Go to Step 4.
BSC6900 GU
Site Maintenance Guide 8 Replacing Boards and Modules
Issue 07 (2013-06-28) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
199
NOTE
If two BSC6900 boards work in backup mode, the boards must be installed in an even-numbered slot and
in the slot numbered with that value plus 1. For example, if the board that is installed in slot 14 does not
work in backup mode, the board that is installed in slot 15 does not work in backup mode either.
Step 2 Run the DSP BRD command to query the status of the board to be replaced.
If... Then...
CPU status is Active normal,
1. Run the SWP BRD command to switch the board over
to standby status.
2. Go to Step 3.
CAUTION
Run this command when the traffic is light, for instance, at
midnight.
The CPU is in another status, Go to Step 3.
Step 3 Run the DSP OPT command to query the backup status of all the optical ports on the UOIa
board to be replaced.
If... Then...
The optical port is standby, Go to Step 4.
The optical port is active,
1. Run the SET MSPCMD command to switch the active port
over to standby status. Set MSP Control Command to MS
(Manual Switchover from working link to protection
link).
2. Go to Step 4.
Step 4 Check whether the labels on the optical cable and clock cable (if configured) connected to the
UOIa board are legible. If the labels are illegible, attach a new label to the cables to avoid
improper connection after the board is replaced.
Step 5 Remove the clock cable.
Step 6 Remove the optical cable and cap the connectors. If the connectors are dirty, clean them with
the dustfree cotton cloth or the fiber cleaner.
Step 7 Remove the board by referring to 8.2.1 Removing a Board and cap the optical ports.
Step 8 Install the new board into the subrack by referring to 8.2.2 Inserting a Board.
The new board automatically loads program and configuration data, and the RUN LED blinks
every other 0.125s.
Step 9 Remove the caps from optical ports and connectors, and reserve them for later use. Then, connect
the optical cable by referring to the labels.
Step 10 Install the clock cable (if configured) by referring to the labels.
Step 11 If the RUN LED blinks every other second, run the DSP BRD command to query the status of
the new board.
BSC6900 GU
Site Maintenance Guide 8 Replacing Boards and Modules
Issue 07 (2013-06-28) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
200
If... Then...
CPU status is Active normal or Standby normal, Go to Step 13.
The CPU is in another status, Go to Step 12.
Step 12 Check whether a board failure alarm is reported on the BSC6900 LMT.
If... Then...
Alarms caused by a faulty board are
reported,
1. Locate and rectify the fault according to the
alarm help information.
2. Go to Step 11.
No alarms caused by the faulty board are
reported,
Go to Step 13.
Step 13 Run the CMP BRDVER command to check whether the software version of the new board is
consistent with the board version matching table.
If... Then...
The board version is consistent with the
board version matching table,
Go to Step 14.
The board version is inconsistent with the
board version matching table,
1. Ensure that the program files of the board in
the OMU active workspace installation\bin
\fam on the OMU are correct. If the program
files are incorrect, contact Huawei
engineers.
2. Run RST BRD to reset the board.
3. Go to Step 11.
NOTE
You can obtain the correct board version matching table from the version matching documents.
Step 14 Verify this board is functioning correctly by testing the CS services with dialing and PS services
with web browsing.
----End
Follow-up Procedure
Record the name and the bar code of the replaced board. Check whether there are obvious
physical damages, such as the distorted pin, broken pin, or burnt board. If there is any damage,
fill in BSC6900 Site Maintenance Record Form and pack the replaced board. When packing
a board, pay attention to the following points:
l Wear an ESD wrist strap or a pair of ESD gloves.
BSC6900 GU
Site Maintenance Guide 8 Replacing Boards and Modules
Issue 07 (2013-06-28) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
201
l Ensure that each ESD bag or case holds only one board.
l When packing multiple boards, isolate them with ESD materials.
Contact the local Huawei office to dispose of the replaced board.
NOTE
You may obtain the name and the PCB version from the panel or bottom of the faulty board.
8.27 Replacing a UOIc Board
This section describes how to replace a faulty UOIc board. The UOIc board is hot-swappable.
It takes about five minutes to replace the board.
Prerequisites
l The tools are ready. The tools are the ESD wrist strap, Phillips screwdriver, ESD box or
bag, dustfree cotton cloth, and fiber cleaner.
l A new UOIc board is ready.
l The LMT is started and communicates with the OMU properly.
Context
CAUTION
l To avoid damage to the boards, ASIC chips, or other electronic components, wear an ESD
wrist strap properly. Ensure that the ESD wrist strap is properly connected to the ESD
connector on the cabinet. If no ESD wrist strap or no proper grounding point is available,
wear ESD gloves.
l It is recommended that you need to use the same board type to replace the old board. To use
a board of the different version to replace the board (for example, use a board of version a
to replace a board of version b), contact Huawei for technical support.
CAUTION
l Replacing the standby UOIc board has no adverse effect on the system. Replacing the UOIc
board that works independently, however, disrupts services carried on the board.
l If the BSC6900 and its peer equipment are connected through only the UOIc board, the
ongoing services between the BSC6900 and its peer equipment are disrupted when you
replace the UOIc board.
Procedure
Step 1 Run the LST SUBRACK command to query the backup status of the UOIc board to be replaced.
BSC6900 GU
Site Maintenance Guide 8 Replacing Boards and Modules
Issue 07 (2013-06-28) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
202
If... Then...
Backup type is Backup, Go to Step 2.
Backup type is No backup, Go to Step 4.
NOTE
If two BSC6900 boards work in backup mode, the boards must be installed in an even-numbered slot and
in the slot numbered with that value plus 1. For example, if the board that is installed in slot 14 does not
work in backup mode, the board that is installed in slot 15 does not work in backup mode either.
Step 2 Run the DSP BRD command to query the status of the board to be replaced.
If... Then...
CPU status is Active normal,
1. Run the SWP BRD command to switch the board
to standby status.
2. Go to Step 3.
CAUTION
Run this command in low traffic hours, for instance, at
midnight.
The parameter is of any other values, Go to Step 3.
Step 3 Run the DSP OPT command to query the backup status of all the optical ports on the UOIc
board to be replaced.
If... Then...
The optical port is standby, Go to Step 4.
The optical port is active,
1. Run the SET MSPCMD command to switch the active port
to standby status. Set MSP Control Command to MS
(Manual Switchover from working link to protection
link).
2. Go to Step 4.
Step 4 Check whether the labels on the optical cable and clock cable (if configured) connected to the
UOIc board are legible. If the labels are illegible, attach a new label to the cables to avoid
improper connection after the board is replaced.
Step 5 Remove the clock cable.
Step 6 Remove the optical cable and cap the connectors. If the connectors are dirty, clean them with
dustfree cotton cloth or fiber cleaner.
Step 7 Remove the board by referring to 8.2.1 Removing a Board and cap the optical ports.
Step 8 Install the new board into the subrack by referring to 8.2.2 Inserting a Board.
BSC6900 GU
Site Maintenance Guide 8 Replacing Boards and Modules
Issue 07 (2013-06-28) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
203
The new board automatically loads program and configuration data, and the RUN LED blinks
every other 0.125s.
Step 9 Remove the caps from optical ports and connectors, and reserve them for later use. Then, connect
the optical cable by referring to the labels.
Step 10 Install the clock cable (if configured) by referring to the labels.
Step 11 If the RUN LED blinks every other second, run the DSP BRD command to query the status of
the new board.
If... Then...
CPU status is Active normal or Standby normal, Go to Step 13.
The parameter is of any other values, Go to Step 12.
Step 12 Check whether a board failure alarm is reported on the LMT.
If... Then...
Alarms caused by a faulty board are
reported,
1. Locate and rectify the fault according to the
alarm help information.
2. Go to Step 11.
No alarms caused by the faulty board are
reported,
Go to Step 13.
Step 13 Run the CMP BRDVER command to check whether the software version of the new board is
consistent with the board version matching table.
If... Then...
The board version is consistent with the
board version matching table,
Go to Step 14.
The board version is inconsistent with the
board version matching table,
1. Ensure that the program files of the board in
the OMU active workspace installation\bin
\fam on the OMU are correct. If the program
files are incorrect, contact Huawei
engineers.
2. Run the RST BRD command to reset the
board.
3. Go to Step 11.
NOTE
You can obtain the correct board version matching table from the version matching documents.
BSC6900 GU
Site Maintenance Guide 8 Replacing Boards and Modules
Issue 07 (2013-06-28) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
204
Step 14 Verify this board is functioning correctly by testing the CS services with dialing and PS services
with web browsing.
----End
Follow-up Procedure
Record the name and the bar code of the replaced board. Check whether there are obvious
physical damages, such as the distorted pin, broken pin, or burnt board. If there is any damage,
fill in BSC6900 Site Maintenance Record Form and pack the replaced board. When packing
a board, pay attention to the following points:
l Wear an ESD wrist strap or a pair of ESD gloves.
l Ensure that each ESD bag or case holds only one board.
l When packing multiple boards, isolate them with ESD materials.
Contact the local Huawei office to dispose of the replaced board.
NOTE
You may obtain the name and the PCB version from the panel or bottom of the faulty board.
8.28 Replacing an XPUa/SPUa Board
This section describes how to replace a faulty XPUa/SPUa board. The XPUa/SPUa board is hot-
swappable. It takes about six minutes to replace and load a board.
Prerequisites
l The tools are ready. The tools are the ESD wrist strap, Phillips screwdriver, ESD box or
bag, and dustfree cotton cloth.
l A new XPUa/SPUa board is ready.
l The LMT is started and communicates with the OMU properly.
Context
CAUTION
l To avoid damage to the boards, ASIC chips, or other electronic components, wear an ESD
wrist strap properly. Ensure that the ESD wrist strap is properly connected to the ESD
connector on the cabinet. If no ESD wrist strap or no proper grounding point is available,
wear ESD gloves.
l It is recommended that you need to use the same board type to replace the old board. To use
a board of the different version to replace the board (for example, use a board of version a
to replace a board of version b), contact Huawei for technical support.
BSC6900 GU
Site Maintenance Guide 8 Replacing Boards and Modules
Issue 07 (2013-06-28) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
205
CAUTION
l Replacing the standby main control XPUa/SPUa board has no adverse impact on the services
in the system. Replacing the main control XPUa/SPUa board that works independently,
however, disrupts services carried in the subrack.
l Replacing the standby non main control XPUa/SPUa board has no adverse impact on the
services in the system. Replacing the non main control XPUa/SPUa board that works
independently, however, disrupts services carried in the board.
Procedure
Step 1 Display the subrack that houses the XPUa/SPUa board in the Device Panel on the LMT. Check
the configuration of the XPUa/SPUa board.
If... Then...
The XPUa/SPUa board to be replaced works in the active/standby mode, Go to Step 2.
The XPUa/SPUa board to be replaced does not work in the active/standby
mode,
Go to Step 3.
NOTE
If two BSC6900 boards work in backup mode, the boards must be installed in an even-numbered slot and
in the slot numbered with that value plus 1. For example, if the board that is installed in slot 2 does not
work in backup mode, the board that is installed in slot 3 does not work in backup mode either.
Step 2 Run the DSP BRD command to query the status of the XPUa/SPUa board to be replaced.
If... Then...
CPU status is Active normal,
1. Run SWP BRD to switch the board over to standby.
2. Go to Step 3.
CAUTION
Run this command when the traffic is light, for instance, at
midnight.
The CPU is in another status, Go to Step 3.
Step 3 Remove the XPUa/SPUa board to be replaced by referring to 8.2.1 Removing a Board.
Step 4 Insert the new XPUa/SPUa board into the subrack by referring to 8.2.2 Inserting a Board.
The new board automatically loads program and configuration data, and the RUN LED blinks
every other 0.125s.
Step 5 If the RUN LED blinks every other second, run DSP BRD to query the status of the new board.
BSC6900 GU
Site Maintenance Guide 8 Replacing Boards and Modules
Issue 07 (2013-06-28) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
206
If... Then...
The XPUa/SPUa board to be replaced does not work in the active/standby
mode, CPU status is Active normal,
Go to Step 7.
The XPUa/SPUa board to be replaced works in the active/standby mode,
CPU status is Standby normal,
Go to Step 7.
The CPU is in another status, Go to Step 6.
Step 6 Check whether a board failure alarm is reported on the BSC6900 LMT.
If... Then...
Alarms caused by a faulty board are
reported,
1. Locate and rectify the fault according to the
alarm help information.
2. Go to Step 5.
No alarms caused by the faulty board are
reported,
Go to Step 7.
Step 7 Run the CMP BRDVER command to check whether the software version of the new board is
consistent with the board version matching table.
If... Then...
The board version is consistent with the
board version matching table,
Go to Step 8.
The board version is inconsistent with the
board version matching table,
1. Ensure that the program files of the board in
the OMU active workspace installation\bin
\fam on the OMU are correct. If the program
files are incorrect, contact Huawei
engineers.
2. Run RST BRD to reset the board.
3. Go to Step 5.
NOTE
You can obtain the correct board version matching table from the version matching documents.
Step 8 Verify this board is functioning correctly by testing the CS services with dialing and PS services
with web browsing.
----End
Follow-up Procedure
Record the name and the bar code of the replaced board. Check whether there are obvious
physical damages, such as the distorted pin, broken pin, or burnt board. If there is any damage,
BSC6900 GU
Site Maintenance Guide 8 Replacing Boards and Modules
Issue 07 (2013-06-28) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
207
fill in BSC6900 Site Maintenance Record Form and pack the replaced board. When packing
a board, pay attention to the following points:
l Wear an ESD wrist strap or a pair of ESD gloves.
l Ensure that each ESD bag or case holds only one board.
l When packing multiple boards, isolate them with ESD materials.
Contact the local Huawei office to dispose of the replaced board.
NOTE
You may obtain the name and the PCB version from the panel or bottom of the faulty board.
8.29 Replacing an XPUb/SPUb Board
This section describes how to replace a faulty XPUb/SPUb board. The XPUb/SPUb board is
hot-swappable. It takes about six minutes to replace and load a board.
Prerequisites
l The tools are ready. The tools are the ESD wrist strap, Phillips screwdriver, ESD box or
bag, and dustfree cotton cloth.
l A new XPUb/SPUb board is ready.
l The LMT is started and communicates with the OMU properly.
Context
CAUTION
l To avoid damage to the boards, ASIC chips, or other electronic components, wear an ESD
wrist strap properly. Ensure that the ESD wrist strap is properly connected to the ESD
connector on the cabinet. If no ESD wrist strap or no proper grounding point is available,
wear ESD gloves.
l It is recommended that you need to use the same board type to replace the old board. To use
a board of the different version to replace the board (for example, use a board of version a
to replace a board of version b), contact Huawei for technical support.
CAUTION
l Replacing the standby main control XPUb/SPUb board has no adverse impact on the system.
Replacing the main control XPUb/SPUb board that works independently, however, disrupts
services carried in the subrack.
l Replacing the standby non-main control XPUb/SPUb board has no adverse impact on the
system. Replacing the non-main control XPUb/SPUb board that works independently,
however, disrupts services carried on the board.
BSC6900 GU
Site Maintenance Guide 8 Replacing Boards and Modules
Issue 07 (2013-06-28) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
208
Procedure
Step 1 Display the subrack that houses the XPUb/SPUb board in the Device Panel on the LMT. Check
the configuration of the XPUb/SPUb board.
If... Then...
The XPUb/SPUb board to be replaced works in active/standby mode, Go to Step 2.
The XPUb/SPUb board to be replaced does not work in active/standby
mode,
Go to Step 3.
NOTE
If two BSC6900 boards work in backup mode, the boards must be installed in an even-numbered slot and
in the slot numbered with that value plus 1. For example, if the board that is installed in slot 2 does not
work in backup mode, the board that is installed in slot 3 does not work in backup mode either.
Step 2 Run the DSP BRD command to query the status of the XPUb/SPUb board to be replaced.
If... Then...
CPU status is Active normal,
1. Run the SWP BRD command to switch the board
to standby status.
2. Go to Step 3.
CAUTION
Run this command in low traffic hours, for instance, at
midnight.
The parameter is of any other values, Go to Step 3.
Step 3 Remove the XPUb/SPUb board to be replaced by referring to 8.2.1 Removing a Board.
Step 4 Install the new XPUb/SPUb board into the subrack by referring to 8.2.2 Inserting a Board.
The new board automatically loads program and configuration data, and the RUN LED blinks
every other 0.125s.
Step 5 If the RUN LED blinks every other second, run the DSP BRD command to query the status of
the new board.
If... Then...
The XPUb/SPUb board to be replaced does not work in active/standby
mode, CPU status is Active normal,
Go to Step 7.
The XPUb/SPUb board to be replaced works in active/standby mode, CPU
status is Standby normal,
Go to Step 7.
The parameter is of any other values, Go to Step 6.
BSC6900 GU
Site Maintenance Guide 8 Replacing Boards and Modules
Issue 07 (2013-06-28) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
209
Step 6 Check whether a board failure alarm is reported on the LMT.
If... Then...
Alarms caused by a faulty board are
reported,
1. Locate and rectify the fault according to the
alarm help information.
2. Go to Step 5.
No alarms caused by the faulty board are
reported,
Go to Step 7.
Step 7 Run the CMP BRDVER command to check whether the software version of the new board is
consistent with the board version matching table.
If... Then...
The board version is consistent with the
board version matching table,
Go to Step 8.
The board version is inconsistent with the
board version matching table,
1. Ensure that the program files of the board in
the OMU active workspace installation\bin
\fam on the OMU are correct. If the program
files are incorrect, contact Huawei
engineers.
2. Run the RST BRD command to reset the
board.
3. Go to Step 5.
NOTE
You can obtain the correct board version matching table from the version matching documents.
Step 8 Verify this board is functioning correctly by testing the CS services with dialing and PS services
with web browsing.
----End
Follow-up Procedure
Record the name and the bar code of the replaced board. Check whether there are obvious
physical damages, such as the distorted pin, broken pin, or burnt board. If there is any damage,
fill in BSC6900 Site Maintenance Record Form and pack the replaced board. When packing
a board, pay attention to the following points:
l Wear an ESD wrist strap or a pair of ESD gloves.
l Ensure that each ESD bag or case holds only one board.
l When packing multiple boards, isolate them with ESD materials.
Contact the local Huawei office to dispose of the replaced board.
NOTE
You may obtain the name and the PCB version from the panel or bottom of the faulty board.
BSC6900 GU
Site Maintenance Guide 8 Replacing Boards and Modules
Issue 07 (2013-06-28) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
210
8.30 Replacing a WOPB Board
This section describes how to replace a faulty WOPB board. The WOPB board is hot-swappable.
It takes about ten minutes to replace the board.
Prerequisites
l The tools are ready. They are the ESD wrist strap, Phillips screwdriver, and ESD box or
bag.
l A new WOPB board is ready according to field requirements.
l The LMT is started, and the connection between the LMT PC and the server is normal.
Context
CAUTION
l You are required to Wear an ESD Wrist Strap and plug the ESD wrist strap into the ESD
connector of the cabinet before replacing the board. If the ESD wrist strap is unavailable or
if there is no ESD connector for the ESD wrist strap, wear ESD gloves.
l During the replacement of the WOPB board, the overvoltage protection function is
unavailable.
Procedure
Step 1 Remove the captive screw on the WOPB board with a Phillips screwdriver, as shown in Figure
8-21.
Figure 8-21 Replacing a WOPB board
Screw
WOPB
Handle
BSC6900 GU
Site Maintenance Guide 8 Replacing Boards and Modules
Issue 07 (2013-06-28) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
211

Step 2 Hold the handle of the WOPB board and remove the board from the power distribution box.
Then, put the board into an ESD box or bag.
CAUTION
The WOPB board is twice as long as other boards. To avoid damaging the WOPB board during
the replacement, move the board only after you have completely removed the board from the
cabinet.
Step 3 Insert the new WOPB board along the guide rails.
Step 4 Secure the captive screw on the WOPB board.
Step 5 Check whether a board failure alarm is reported on the LMT. If such an alarm is reported, identify
and rectify the fault according to the alarm information.
----End
Follow-up Procedure
Record the name and the bar code of the replaced board. Check whether there are obvious
physical damages, such as the distorted pin, broken pin, or burnt board. If there is any damage,
fill in BSC6900 Site Maintenance Record Form and pack the replaced board. When packing
a board, pay attention to the following points:
l Wear an ESD wrist strap or a pair of ESD gloves.
l Ensure that each ESD bag or case holds only one board.
l When packing multiple boards, isolate them with ESD materials.
Contact the local Huawei office to dispose of the replaced board.
NOTE
You may obtain the name and the PCB version from the panel or bottom of the faulty board.
8.31 Replacing a Subrack
This section describes how to replace a faulty BSC6900 subrack with a new BSC6900 subrack.
After 60 minutes from cutting off the power supply of a faulty subrack, a new subrack will start
working properly.
Prerequisites
l Tools required for adding subracks are available. The tools include an ESD wrist strap, a
socket wrench, a Phillips screwdriver, a flat-head screwdriver, diagonal pliers, a dustfree
cloth, and a fiber cleaner.
l Standby subracks are ready.
BSC6900 GU
Site Maintenance Guide 8 Replacing Boards and Modules
Issue 07 (2013-06-28) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
212
Context
CAUTION
To protect the components from electrostatic discharge, wear an ESD wrist strap properly.
Ensure that the ESD wrist strap is properly connected to the ESD connector on the cabinet. If
no ESD wrist strap or no proper grounding point is available, wear ESD gloves.
CAUTION
l Replacing the MPS disrupts all the services carried in the BSC6900.
l Replacing the EPS/TCS disrupts all the services carried in this subrack.
l You should quickly replace a subrack with caution when the traffic is light, for instance, at
midnight.
l For safety reason, three persons are required to replace a subrack due to the heavy weight.
Procedure
Step 1 Check whether the labels on the cables are legible. If the labels are illegible, relabel the cables
to avoid incorrect connections after replacing the subrack.
Step 2 Record the installation positions of the boards in the subrack.
Step 3 Check the types of subracks to be replaced. Perform the following operations accordingly:
If... Then...
EPS/TCS Turn off the power switch for the subrack to be replaced.
MPS
1. Raise the ejector levers of the OMUa/OMUc board, as shown in part B of
Removing the OMUa/OMUc board. Repeat this step if two OMUa boards
are in the subrack.
2. Turn off the power switch for the subrack to be replaced after the OFFLINE
LED on the OMUa/OMUc board is steady on.
NOTE
Assign switches for BSC6900 cabinets by referring to labels on the front panel of the power distribution
box. For details, see 5.2 Distribution of Power Switches on the High-Power PDB, and 5.1 Distribution
of Power Switches on the Common Power Distribution Box.
Step 4 Disconnect the cables connected to the subrack.
Step 5 Remove the boards from the subrack in order by referring to 8.2.1 Removing a Board. Then,
put them in the ESD boxes or bags.
BSC6900 GU
Site Maintenance Guide 8 Replacing Boards and Modules
Issue 07 (2013-06-28) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
213
Step 6 Remove the eight captive screws fixing the subrack on the cabinet from the front of the cabinet
by a Phillips screwdriver and reserve them for future use. Four captive screws are at the left side
and the other are at the right side.
Step 7 One person pushes the subrack along the guide rails from the back of the cabinet. The other two
persons hold the subrack by the mounting ears with hands supporting the base of the subrack
and remove the subrack from the cabinet.
Step 8 Two people hold the mounting ears and support the base of the subrack. Slide the subrack along
the guiding rail into the cabinet, and then fasten the screws to fix the subrack.
Step 9 Set the DIP switches of the new subrack by referring to the DIP switch setting of the subrack to
be replaced. For details about BSC6900 Checking and Setting DIP Switches on Subracks, see
DIP Switch on the Subrack.
Step 10 Install the power cables for the new subrack:
1. Take off the cover of the power cable connection box and unscrew the power ports, as
shown in Figure 8-22.
Figure 8-22 Power cable connection box

2. Connect the power cables to the power ports in the subrack, as shown in Figure 8-23.
BSC6900 GU
Site Maintenance Guide 8 Replacing Boards and Modules
Issue 07 (2013-06-28) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
214
Figure 8-23 Connecting the power cable to the power port

3. Install the cover of the power cable connection box, as shown Figure 8-24.
Figure 8-24 Installing the cover of the power cable connection box

Step 11 Insert the boards into the subrack by referring to the records in Step 2 and 8.2.2 Inserting a
Board.
BSC6900 GU
Site Maintenance Guide 8 Replacing Boards and Modules
Issue 07 (2013-06-28) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
215
Step 12 Install an inter-SCUa or inter-SCUb cable:
l If the new subrack is to be configured with SCUa boards, install the inter-SCUa cables
between different subracks according to instructions in Installing the Inter-SCUa Cables
Between Different Subracks.
l If the new subrack is to be configured with SCUb boards, install inter-SCUb SFP+ high-
speed cables between different subracks according to instructions in Installing the Inter-
SCUb SFP+ High-Speed Cables Between Different Subracks.
Step 13 Install the Ethernet cables and fiber optics for connecting the interface boards.
Step 14 Turn on the power switch on the new subrack.
Step 15 Carry out load commissioning and service commissioning.
For detailed procedures for commissioning, see the BSC6900 GU Commissioning Guide.
Step 16 After replacing a BSC6900 subrack, check whether alarms related to faults in subracks are
cleared, such as a Cell Setup Failure alarm. If the alarms are not cleared, clear them by referring
to the alarm online help on the LMT. If the alarms persist, contact Huawei for technical support.
----End
Follow-up Procedure
Contact the local Huawei office to handle the faulty subrack.
8.32 Replacing the Independent Fan Subrack
When an independent fan subrack in the BSC6900 is faulty, the independent fan subrack must
be replaced. It takes about 15 minutes to replace an independent fan subrack.
Prerequisites
l The tools are ready. They are the ESD wrist strap, Phillips screwdriver, flat-head
screwdriver, diagonal pliers, dustfree cotton cloth, and fiber cleaner.
l A new independent fan subrack is ready.
Context
CAUTION
To protect the components from electrostatic discharge, wear an ESD wrist strap properly.
Ensure that the ESD wrist strap is properly connected to the ESD connector on the cabinet. If
no ESD wrist strap or no proper grounding point is available, wear ESD gloves.
Procedure
Step 1 View the label for each port at the rear of the fan subrack, as shown in Figure 8-25. If a label is
not legible, attach a new label to avoid wrong connection after replacing the fan subrack.
BSC6900 GU
Site Maintenance Guide 8 Replacing Boards and Modules
Issue 07 (2013-06-28) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
216
Figure 8-25 Rear view of the fan subrack
1 Monitor 1 port for the connection to the power
distribution box
2 Power input port 3 Monitor 2 port (reserved)
4 Monitor 0 port for the connection to the BSC6900
subrack
5 Monitor 3 port (reserved)
Step 2 Turn off the power switch that control the independent fan subrack to be replaced.
NOTE
For distribution of the BSC6900 power switches, see the labels on the front panel of the power distribution
box. For details, see 5.2 Distribution of Power Switches on the High-Power PDB.
Step 3 Remove the four screws that fix the independent fan subrack from the front of the cabinet and
reserve them for future use.
Step 4 Hold the mounting ears and support the bottom of the fan subrack, and then pull the fan subrack
for a short distance so that the cables connected to the independent fan subrack can be removed.
Step 5 Remove the cables connected to the independent fan subrack by referring to 9 Replacing the
Cables.
Step 6 Hold the mounting ears and support the bottom of the fan subrack, and then remove the
independent fan subrack from the cabinet.
Step 7 Connect monitoring signal cables and PGND cable to the new independent fan subrack.
Step 8 Hold the mounting ears and support the bottom of the new independent fan subrack, and then
push the independent fan subrack slowly into the cabinet along the guide rails.
CAUTION
l Do not push the independent fan subrack completely into the cabinet, that is, certain space
should be reserved for installing cables.
l Pay attention to the mounting bar and guide rails when installing cables.
Step 9 Connect the monitoring signal cable of the power distribution box and power cables to the new
independent fan subrack.
Step 10 Connect the monitoring signal cable to the monitor 0 port on the new independent fan subrack.
Step 11 Connect the PGND cable to the mounting bar.
Step 12 Push the independent fan subrack completely into the subrack.
BSC6900 GU
Site Maintenance Guide 8 Replacing Boards and Modules
Issue 07 (2013-06-28) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
217
Step 13 Fix the screws on the panel of the independent fan subrack.
Step 14 Turn on the power switch that control the independent fan subrack on the power distribution
box.
Step 15 Perform service commissioning.
For detailed procedures, see the BSC6900 GU Commissioning Guide.
Step 16 After replacing the independent fan subrack in the BSC6900 cabinet, check whether the alarms
related to the independent fan subrack are cleared. If these alarms persist, clear them by referring
to the alarm online help on the LMT. If these alarms still persist, contact Huawei for technical
support.
----End
Follow-up Procedure
Contact the local Huawei office to dispose of the replaced independent fan subrack.
8.33 Replacing the Power Distribution Box
This section describes how to replace a faulty power distribution box. It takes about 25 minutes
to replace a power distribution box.
Prerequisites
l The tools are ready. They are ESD wrist strap, Phillips screwdriver, cable ties, diagonal
pliers, insulation tapes, and sticky label papers.
l The new power distribution box is configured according to actual requirements on site.
Context
CAUTION
l To avoid damage to the boards, ASIC chips, or other electronic components, wear an ESD
wrist strap properly. Ensure that the ESD wrist strap is properly connected to the ESD
connector on the cabinet. If no ESD wrist strap or no proper grounding point is available,
wear ESD gloves.
l It is recommended that you need to use the same board type to replace the old board. To use
a board of the different version to replace the board (for example, use a board of version a
to replace a board of version b), contact Huawei for technical support.
CAUTION
l Replacing the power distribution box in the EPR/TCR disrupts all the services carried by the
EPR/TCR.
l Replacing the power distribution box in the MPR disrupts all the services carried by the entire
BSC6900.
BSC6900 GU
Site Maintenance Guide 8 Replacing Boards and Modules
Issue 07 (2013-06-28) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
218
There are two types of power distribution boxes for the BSC6900, and they are different in terms
of the rear panel.
Figure 8-26 shows the rear panel of the common power distribution box.
Figure 8-26 Rear panel of the common power distribution box
1 Power input terminals 2 Power output terminals 3 COM3: Port connecting the power distribution box and a
service subrack
The installation positions for the -48 V power cable and RTN power cable are labeled -48V and
RTN on the power input terminal block and power output terminal block.

Figure 8-27 shows the rear panel of the high-power distribution box.
Figure 8-27 Rear panel of the high-power distribution box
1 Power input terminals 2 Power output terminals
3 Port connecting the power distribution box and a service subrack 4 2-hole ground screw

BSC6900 GU
Site Maintenance Guide 8 Replacing Boards and Modules
Issue 07 (2013-06-28) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
219
l On the power input terminal, the installation positions for the -48 V power cables are labeled
3(-), 2(-), and 1(-), and the installation positions for the RTN power cables are labeled 3
(+), 2(+), and 1(+).
l The installation positions for the -48 V power cables and RTN power cables are labeled
NEG(-) and RTN(+) on the power output terminal of the power distribution box.
Procedure
l Replace a common power distribution box.
1. Record the state of each power switch on the power distribution box. Set all the
switches to OFF.
2. Set the power switches that control the BSC power supply on the DC PDF to OFF.
CAUTION
After powering off the cabinet, wait for five minutes, and then replace the power
distribution box.
3. Remove the cables from the common power distribution box. Figure 8-26 shows the
cables connected to the panel of the common power distribution box.
Check the engineering labels on the power input cables, as shown in 1 of Figure
8-26. If the label is not legible, attach a temporary label and fill in the position of
the cable. Then, remove the power cables.
Check the engineering labels on the power output cables, as shown in 2 of Figure
8-26. If the label is not legible, attach a temporary label and fill in the position of
the cable. Then, remove the power cables.
Remove the signal monitoring cable that is connected to the port shown in 3 of
Figure 8-26.
Remove the PGND cable that is connected to the busbar of the cabinet from the
power distribution box.
4. Remove the four screws from the front hanger of the power distribution box. Keep
the screws properly for future use.
5. Remove the screws on the front panel of the power distribution box by using the M3
Phillips screwdriver.
6. Hold the handle of the power distribution box and take it out of the cabinet.
7. Insert the new box into the cabinet.
8. Fasten the four screws to the front hanger of the power distribution box. Fasten the
screws to the front panel of the power distribution box.
9. Connect the cables to the power distribution box.
Connect the PGND cable to the power distribution box.
Connect the power input cable by referring to the engineering label or temporary
label. Then, attach a new engineering label to the cable.
Connect the power output cable by referring to the engineering label or temporary
label. Then, attach a new engineering label to the cable.
Connect the signal monitoring cable to the power distribution box.
10. Ensure that all the power cables are correctly connected.
BSC6900 GU
Site Maintenance Guide 8 Replacing Boards and Modules
Issue 07 (2013-06-28) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
220
11. Set the power switch that controls the power supply of the power distribution box on
the PDF to ON.
12. Set the switches on the power distribution box to ON by referring to the records in
Step 1.
13. After replacing the power distribution box, check the items in Table 8-24.
Table 8-24 Checklist for the new power distribution box
Item Result Action
LEDs on the panel
show the normal status
of the power
distribution box. For
details about the LEDs,
refer to LEDs on the
MDMC Panel.
Yes Check the next item.
No 1. Check whether the power
input cables are correctly
connected. If the power
input cables are incorrectly
connected, reconnect the
cables.
2. If faults persist, contact
Huawei for technical
support.
Alarms related to the
power distribution box
failure are cleared.
Yes Check the next item.
No 1. Clear the alarms by
referring to the alarm
online help on the LMT.
2. If the alarms persist,
contact Huawei for
technical support.
The power distribution
box supplies power to
all the components in
the cabinet.
Yes End the check.
No 1. Check whether the power
output cables are correctly
connected. If the power
output cables are
incorrectly connected, turn
off all the power switches
on the power distribution
box and the power
switches that control
power supply of the
cabinet on the PDF. Then
reconnect the cables.
2. If faults persist, contact
Huawei for technical
support.

BSC6900 GU
Site Maintenance Guide 8 Replacing Boards and Modules
Issue 07 (2013-06-28) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
221
NOTE
After powering on the cabinet, check the power supply to the internal components and handle
problems accordingly.
l Replace a high-power distribution box.
1. Record the state of each power switch on the power distribution box. Set all the power
switches to OFF.
2. Set the power switches that control the BSC power supply on the DC PDF to OFF.
CAUTION
After powering off the cabinet, wait for five minutes, and then replace the power
distribution box.
3. Loosen the screws on the rear transparent plastic filler panel of the power distribution
box by using the M3 Phillips screwdriver. Then, remove the plastic filler panel.
4. Remove the cables from the power distribution box. Figure 8-27 shows the cables
connected to the panel of the high-power distribution box.
Check the engineering labels on the power input cables, as shown in 1 of Figure
8-27. If the label is not legible, attach a temporary label and fill in the position of
the cable. Then, remove the power cables.
Check the engineering labels on the power output cables, as shown in 2 of Figure
8-27. If the label is not legible, attach a temporary label and fill in the position of
the cable. Then, remove the power cables.
Remove the signal monitoring cable that is connected to the port shown in 3 of
Figure 8-27.
Remove the PGND cable that is connected to the busbar of the cabinet from the
power distribution box.
5. Remove the four screws from the hanger of the power distribution box. Keep the
screws properly for future use.
6. Remove the screws on the front panel of the power distribution box by using the M3
Phillips screwdriver. Then, remove the MCBs and filler panels from the power
distribution box. Keep the components for future use.
7. Hold the handle of the power distribution box and take it out of the cabinet.
8. Loosen the six screws on the front plastic panel of the new power distribution box by
using the M3 Phillips screwdriver. Then, remove the plastic panel.
9. Install the MCBs in the new power distribution box. Note the installation positions.
10. Install the filler panels at the positions where MCBs are not installed in the new power
distribution box.
11. Install the plastic panel of the new power distribution box, install the power
distribution box on the top of the cabinet, and then fasten the four screws on the front
hanger of the power distribution box.
12. Connect the cables to the power distribution box.
Connect the PGND cable to the power distribution box.
Connect the power input cable by referring to the engineering label or temporary
label. Then, attach a new engineering label to the cable.
BSC6900 GU
Site Maintenance Guide 8 Replacing Boards and Modules
Issue 07 (2013-06-28) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
222
Connect the power output cable by referring to the engineering label or temporary
label. Then, attach a new engineering label to the cable.
Connect the signal monitoring cable to the power distribution box.
13. Ensure that all the power cables are correctly connected.
14. Set the power switch that controls the power supply of the power distribution box on
the PDF to ON
15. Set the power switches on the power distribution box to ON by referring to the records
in Step 1.
16. Install the transparent plastic filler panel at the rear of the power distribution box.
17. After replacing the power distribution box, check the items in Table 8-25.
Table 8-25 Checklist for the new power distribution box
Item Result Action
LEDs on the panel
show the normal status
of the power
distribution box. For
details about the LEDs,
refer to LEDs on the
PAMU Board.
Yes Check the next item.
No 1. Check whether the power
input cables are correctly
connected. If the power
input cables are incorrectly
connected, reconnect the
cables.
2. If faults persist, contact
Huawei for technical
support.
Alarms related to the
power distribution box
failure are cleared.
Yes Check the next item.
No 1. Clear the alarms by
referring to the alarm
online help on the LMT.
2. If the alarms persist,
contact Huawei for
technical support.
The power distribution
box supplies power to
all the components in
the cabinet.
Yes End the check.
BSC6900 GU
Site Maintenance Guide 8 Replacing Boards and Modules
Issue 07 (2013-06-28) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
223
Item Result Action
No 1. Check whether the power
output cables are correctly
connected. If the power
output cables are
incorrectly connected, turn
off all the power switches
on the power distribution
box and the power
switches that control
power supply of the
cabinet on the PDF. Then
reconnect the cables.
2. If the faults persist, contact
Huawei for technical
support.

NOTE
After powering on the cabinet, check the power supply to the internal components and handle
problems accordingly.
----End
Follow-up Procedure
Contact the local Huawei office to handle the faulty power distribution box.
8.34 Replacing the Fan Box
When a fan box in the service subrack or in the independent fan subrack is faulty, the fan box
must be replaced. You should finish the replacement of the fan box in less than one minute.
Prerequisites
l The tools are ready. The tools are the ESD wrist strap, Phillips screwdriver, and flat-head
screwdriver.
l The backup fan box is clean.
Context
CAUTION
To protect the components from electrostatic discharge, wear an ESD wrist strap properly.
Ensure that the ESD wrist strap is properly connected to the ESD connector on the cabinet. If
no ESD wrist strap or no proper grounding point is available, wear ESD gloves.
BSC6900 GU
Site Maintenance Guide 8 Replacing Boards and Modules
Issue 07 (2013-06-28) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
224
CAUTION
Replacing the fan box severely affects the heat dissipation; therefore, you are advised to replace
the fan box within one minute. Otherwise, the boards will be damaged due to high temperature.
Procedure
Step 1 Set the DIP switch on the PFCU according to the installation position and actual configuration
of the fan box.
l If the fan box is located in the service subrack and the PFCU board is configured, set the DIP
switch on the PFCU board (as shown in Figure 8-28) in the new fan box according to Table
8-26.
Figure 8-28 DIP switch on the PFCU

Table 8-26 Setting of the DIP switch on the PFCU
DIP Switch DIP Bit Switch Status Description
SW1 1 (the least significant
bit)
OFF 1
2 ON 0
3 ON 0
4 (the most significant
bit)
ON 0

l If the fan box is located in the independent fan subrack and the PFCU board is configured,
set the DIP switch on the PFCU board (as shown in Figure 8-29) in the new fan box according
to Table 8-27.
Figure 8-29 DIP switch on the PFCU

BSC6900 GU
Site Maintenance Guide 8 Replacing Boards and Modules
Issue 07 (2013-06-28) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
225
Table 8-27 Setting of the DIP switch on the PFCU
DIP Switch DIP Bit Switch Status Description
SW1 1 (the least significant
bit)
ON 0
2 ON 0
3 OFF 1
4 (the most significant
bit)
ON 0

Step 2 Loosen the captive screws from the panel of the fan box.
Step 3 Remove the fan box along the guide rails, as shown in Figure 8-30. When the fan box is almost
out of the cabinet, hold the bottom of the fan box with one hand and the handle with the other
until the fan box is removed from the cabinet.
CAUTION
When replacing the fan box, do not put your hand inside the fan box. Otherwise, the revolving
blade will injure your fingers.
Figure 8-30 Removing the fan box
1 Handle 2 Screw 3 LED

BSC6900 GU
Site Maintenance Guide 8 Replacing Boards and Modules
Issue 07 (2013-06-28) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
226
Step 4 Reserve the replaced fan box for later handling.
Step 5 Insert the fan box into the subrack along the guide rails by holding the bottom of the fan box
with one hand and the handle with the other hand. Then, push the fan box by holding two handles
on the fan box along the guide rails until the fan starts to work.
Step 6 Secure the captive screws on the panel.
Step 7 After replacing the fan box, check the items in Table 8-28.
Table 8-28 Checklist for replacing the fan box
Item Result Action
Whether the LEDs on the panel
show that the fan box is in normal
state. For details on the LEDs,
refer to the following section:
Fan Box (Configured with the
PFCU Board) if PFCU is
configured.
Yes Check the next item.
No 1. Pull out the fan box
slightly. Then, adjust
the fan box position and
push the fan box back in
position.
2. If the alarm box is still
abnormal, contact
Huawei Customer
Service Center.
Whether the alarms caused by
the faulty fan box are cleared.
Yes End the check.
No 1. Clear the alarms by
referring to the alarm
online help on the LMT.
2. If the alarms persist,
contact Huawei
Customer Service
Center.

Step 8 Clean the replaced fan box, and then put it in an ESD box or bag.
----End
Follow-up Procedure
Contact the local Huawei office to handle the replaced fan box.
8.35 Replacing the Pluggable Optical Module
This section describes how to replace a pluggable optical module when the module is faulty.
Prerequisites
l The tools are ready. The tools are the ESD wrist strap, the ESD box or bag, and the diagonal
pliers.
l A new optical module is ready.
BSC6900 GU
Site Maintenance Guide 8 Replacing Boards and Modules
Issue 07 (2013-06-28) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
227
Context
CAUTION
To protect the components from electrostatic discharge, wear an ESD wrist strap properly.
Ensure that the ESD wrist strap is properly connected to the ESD connector on the cabinet. If
no ESD wrist strap or no proper grounding point is available, wear ESD gloves.
In short-distance transmission, the multi-mode optical module is used with the multi-mode
fibers. The effective transmission distance is 2 km. In long-distance transmission, the single-
mode optical module is used with the single-mode fibers. The effective transmission distance
can be 15 km, 40 km, or 80 km. Generally, the single-mode optical module with the effective
transmission distance of 15 km is used. The BSC6900 and its peer equipment must use the same
type of the optical module, which mainly features the mode and wavelength.
Table 8-29 lists the related parameters of the optical modules.
Table 8-29 Parameters of optical modules
Optic
al
Modu
le
Type
Pr
oto
col
Ty
pe
Optical
Connecto
r Type
Oper
ating
Wav
eleng
th
Ra
te
Trans
missi
on
Dista
nce
Max./Min.
Output
Optical
Power
Satura
tion
Optica
l
Power
Receiv
er
Sensiti
vity
Multi-
mode
optical
modul
e
ST
M
1
LC/PC 1310
nm
15
5
Mb
it/s
2 km -14/-19 dBm -14
dBm
-30
dBm
Single
-mode
optical
modul
e
ST
M
1
LC/PC 1310
nm
15
5
Mb
it/s
15 km -8/-15 dBm -8 dBm -31
dBm
Multi-
mode
optical
modul
e
GE LC/PC 850
nm
1.2
5
Gb
it/s
0.5 km -2.5/-9.5 dBm 0 dBm -17
dBm
Single
-mode
optical
modul
e
GE LC/PC 1310
nm
1.2
5
Gb
it/s
10 km -3/-9 dBm -3 dBm -20
dBm
BSC6900 GU
Site Maintenance Guide 8 Replacing Boards and Modules
Issue 07 (2013-06-28) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
228
Optic
al
Modu
le
Type
Pr
oto
col
Ty
pe
Optical
Connecto
r Type
Oper
ating
Wav
eleng
th
Ra
te
Trans
missi
on
Dista
nce
Max./Min.
Output
Optical
Power
Satura
tion
Optica
l
Power
Receiv
er
Sensiti
vity
Multi-
mode
optical
modul
e
10
GE
LC/PC 850n
m
10.
31
25
Gb
it/s
0.3 km -1/-7.3 dBm -1 dBm -11.1
dBm
Single
-mode
optical
modul
e
10
GE
LC/PC 1310
nm
10.
31
25
Gb
it/s
10 km 0.5/-8.2 dBm 0.5
dBm
-12.6
dBm

NOTE
l Replacing the hot-swappable optical module on the standby optical interface board does not have a
negative effect on the system.
l If there is no standby board in position, replacing the hot-swappable optical module on the active optical
interface board disrupts all the services carried on the board.
Procedure
Step 1 Remove the optical cable from the optical port.
Step 2 After removing the optical cable, use a protective cap to cover the optical connector.
Step 3 Unlock the bayonet, as shown in part 1 of Figure 8-31. Remove the optical module, as shown
in part 2 of Figure 8-31.
Figure 8-31 Replacing an optical module
BSC6900 GU
Site Maintenance Guide 8 Replacing Boards and Modules
Issue 07 (2013-06-28) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
229

Step 4 Put the removed optical module into an ESD bag.
Step 5 Insert the new optical module into the socket on the optical interface board. Ensure that the
bayonet lock is secure.
Step 6 Connect the optical cable to the optical port. Ensure that the TX and RX ends of the optical cable
are connected correctly. You can hear a click sound when the optical cable is securely connected.
Step 7 Check whether the alarm related to the optical module is cleared.
NOTE
An alarm is generated when the optical module is removed. The alarm is cleared when the optical module
is reinstalled.
----End
Follow-up Procedure
Contact the local Huawei office to handle the replaced optical module.
8.36 Replacing an Optical Splitter/Combiner
This section describes how to replace an optical splitter/combiner. The BSC6900 optical
splitters/combiners are LC/LC-LC single-mode optical splitter/combiner and LC/LC-LC multi-
mode optical splitter/combiner. It takes about five minutes to replace an optical splitter/
combiner.
Prerequisites
l The following tools are ready: the ESD wrist strap, dustfree cotton cloth, fiber cleaner, and
diagonal pliers.
l The following materials are ready: cable ties and permanent labels.
l A new optical splitter/combiner is ready.
l The number and type of optical splitters/combiners to be replaced are clear.
Context
CAUTION
To protect the components from electrostatic discharge, wear an ESD wrist strap properly.
Ensure that the ESD wrist strap is properly connected to the ESD connector on the cabinet. If
no ESD wrist strap or no proper grounding point is available, wear ESD gloves.
BSC6900 GU
Site Maintenance Guide 8 Replacing Boards and Modules
Issue 07 (2013-06-28) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
230
CAUTION
l When replacing the optical splitter/combiner, do not look into the optical port without eye
protection.
l Replacing an optical splitter/combiner disrupts ongoing services on the corresponding
interface boards. Therefore, replace it in low traffic hours, for example, at midnight.
Procedure
Step 1 Attach temporary labels to the new optical splitter/combiner for easy identification. It is
recommended that content of the temporary labels be identical with the labels on the old optical
splitter/combiner.
Step 2 Put the new optical splitter/combiner aside the old optical splitter/combiner.
Step 3 Disconnect the optical fiber by pressing the tab on the optical connector. Then, remove the optical
splitter/combiner to be replaced.
Step 4 Install the new optical splitter/combiner by referring to Installing the Optical Splitter/Combiner.
CAUTION
The TX end and RX end of the new optical splitter/combiner must be correctly connected.
Otherwise, optical signals cannot be received or transmitted.
Step 5 Replace the temporary labels on the new optical splitter/combiner with the engineering labels.
The content of the engineering labels must be identical with that of the temporary labels. For
details, see Attaching an Engineering Label to a Signal Cable.
Step 6 Bind the optical splitters/combiners.
Step 7 Check the items listed in Table 8-30.
Table 8-30 Checklist for monitoring optical splitter/combiner replacement
Item Result Action
Connection of the
optical fiber is
correct.
Yes Check the next item.
No Remove the optical fiber and reconnect it.
Optical connectors
are properly inserted
into the related
ports.
Yes Check the next item.
No Secure the optical connectors.
Alarms related to the
transmission cable
are cleared.
Yes No further action is required.
No
Clear the alarms by referring to the alarm online
help on the LMT. If the alarms persist, contact
Huawei for technical support.
BSC6900 GU
Site Maintenance Guide 8 Replacing Boards and Modules
Issue 07 (2013-06-28) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
231

----End
Follow-up Procedure
Dispose of the replaced optical splitter/combiner to prevent environmental pollution.
8.37 Replacing the KVM
This section describes how to replace a faulty KVM. It takes about 10 minutes to replace a KVM.
Prerequisites
l The tools are ready. They are the ESD wrist strap, Phillips screwdriver, and flat-head
screwdriver.
l The new KVM is configured according to actual requirements on site.
Context
CAUTION
l You are required to Wear an ESD Wrist Strap and plug the ESD wrist strap into the ESD
connector of the cabinet before replacing a KVM. Wear a pair of ESD gloves instead if there
is no ESD wrist strap or there is no ESD connector for the ESD wrist strap.
l When replacing the KVM, one cannot operate the GBAM through the GUI.
Procedure
Step 1 Check whether the labels on the cables connected to the KVM are legible. If the labels are not
legible, attach new labels to the cables to avoid improper connection after the KVM is replaced.
Step 2 Turn off the power switch on the rear panel of the KVM.
Step 3 Turn off the power switch that controls power supply to the KVM. Figure 8-32 shows the power
switches on the power distribution box in the MPR.
BSC6900 GU
Site Maintenance Guide 8 Replacing Boards and Modules
Issue 07 (2013-06-28) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
232
Figure 8-32 Distribution of the power switches in the MPR

Step 4 Remove the cables that are connected to the KVM to be replaced.
Step 5 Remove the rear hangers from the KVM.
Step 6 Remove the screws that fix the front hangers of the KVM to the rack. Then, remove the KVM
from the cabinet along the guide rails.
Step 7 Place the new KVM in the original position. Then, secure the screws.
Step 8 Install the rear hangers on the new KVM, and then secure the screws that fix the rear hangers to
the rack.
Step 9 Connect the cables to the new KVM.
Step 10 Turn on the power switch that controls power supply to the KVM.
Figure 8-32 shows the power switches on the power distribution box in the MPR.
Step 11 Turn on the power switch on the rear panel of the KVM.
Step 12 Check whether the KVM works normally. If the KVM does not work normally, clear the alarms
by referring to the alarm online help on the LMT. If the alarms persist, contact Huawei for
technical support.
----End
Follow-up Procedure
Contact the local Huawei office to handle the faulty KVM.
BSC6900 GU
Site Maintenance Guide 8 Replacing Boards and Modules
Issue 07 (2013-06-28) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
233
8.38 Replacing the LAN Switch
This section describes how to replace a faulty LAN switch. It takes about 10 minutes to replace
a LAN switch.
Prerequisites
l The tools are ready. They are the ESD wrist strap, Phillips screwdriver, and flat-head
screwdriver.
l The new LAN switch is configured according to actual requirements on site.
Context
CAUTION
l You are required to Wear an ESD Wrist Strap and plug the ESD wrist strap into the ESD
connector of the cabinet before replacing a LAN switch. Wear a pair of ESD gloves instead
if there is no ESD wrist strap or there is no ESD connector for the ESD wrist strap.
l Replacing the LAN switch disrupts the communication between the LMT/M2000 and the
GBAM.
Procedure
Step 1 Check whether the labels on the Ethernet cables connected to the LAN switch are legible. If the
labels are not legible, attach new labels to the cables to avoid improper connection after the LAN
switch is replaced.
Step 2 Turn off power switch SW3 that controls the power supply to the LAN switch to be replaced.
For details on power switches on the power distribution box, see 5.1 Distribution of Power
Switches on the Common Power Distribution Box.
Step 3 Remove the PGND cable and Ethernet cables that are connected to the LAN switch to be
replaced.
Step 4 Remove the screws fixing the LAN switch to the rack.
Step 5 Remove the LAN switch from the cabinet along the guide rails. Remove the power cable that is
connected to the rear of the LAN switch.
Step 6 Connect the power cable to the rear of the new LAN switch.
Step 7 Place the new LAN switch in the original position. Then, secure the screws.
Step 8 Connect the PGND cable and Ethernet cables to the LAN switch.
Step 9 Turn on power switch that controls the power supply to the LAN switch. For details on power
switches on the power distribution box, see 5.1 Distribution of Power Switches on the
Common Power Distribution Box.
Step 10 Check the items in Table 8-31.
BSC6900 GU
Site Maintenance Guide 8 Replacing Boards and Modules
Issue 07 (2013-06-28) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
234
Table 8-31 Checklist for LAN switch replacement
Item Result Action
Whether the LEDs on the panel of the LAN
switch show that the LAN switch is in
normal state. For details on the LEDs, see
LAN Switch.
Yes Check the next item.
No Rectify the fault by
referring to the user
manual of the LAN
switch.
Whether the alarms caused by the faulty
LAN switch are cleared.
Yes Check the next item.
No 1. Clear the alarms by
referring to the
alarm online help
on the LMT.
2. If the alarms
persist, contact
Huawei for
technical support.
Whether the communication between the
LAN switch and other computers on the
same network segment is normal Whether
the communication between the LAN
switch and other computers on the same
network segment is normal by running the
Ping command.
Yes End the check.
No Check whether the
setting of the LAN
switch is correct.
l If the setting of the
LAN switch is
incorrect, modify
the setting.
l If the setting of the
LAN switch is
correct, check the
connection of the
Ethernet cables.

----End
Follow-up Procedure
Contact the local Huawei office to handle the faulty LAN switch.
8.39 Replacing the GBAM
This section describes how to replace a faulty GBAM. It takes about 40 minutes to replace a
GBAM. There are three models of GBAM, namely, IBM X3650T, C5210, and HP CC3310.
Prerequisites
l The tools are ready. They are the ESD wrist strap, Phillips screwdriver, flat-head
screwdriver, and ESD boxes or bags.
BSC6900 GU
Site Maintenance Guide 8 Replacing Boards and Modules
Issue 07 (2013-06-28) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
235
l A new GBAM is ready.
CAUTION
l When configuring the new GBAM or OMU board, ensure that the following parameter
settings are consistent with those of the GBAM to be replaced: server name or computer
name, OS administrator password, admin password, and IP address.
l If you change the IP address of the GBAM, you need to reset the alarm box manually.
Context
CAUTION
l To avoid damage to the boards, ASIC chips, or other electronic components, wear an ESD
wrist strap properly. Ensure that the ESD wrist strap is properly connected to the ESD
connector on the cabinet. If no ESD wrist strap or no proper grounding point is available,
wear ESD gloves.
l It is recommended that you need to use the same board type to replace the old board. To use
a board of the different version to replace the board (for example, use a board of version a
to replace a board of version b), contact Huawei for technical support.
CAUTION
l Replacing the GBAM disrupts the communication between the GBAM and the host boards.
l Replacing the GBAM disrupts the communication between the LMT/M2000 and the
BSC6900. In this case, you cannot maintain the BSC6900 or collect the alarm information.
The BSC6900 host boards, however, work normally during the replacement of the GBAM.
Procedure
l Replace the GBAM with a new GBAM.
1. Log in to the GBAM as user root, and then run the Linux OS command /etc/rc.d/
omud stop to stop all applications on the GBAM to be replaced.
2. Run the Linux OS command poweroff to shut down the GBAM to be replaced.
3. Turn off SW3 and SW6 on the power distribution box that control the power supply
to the GBAM to be replaced. Figure 8-33 shows the labels for the power switches on
the front panel of the power distribution box.
BSC6900 GU
Site Maintenance Guide 8 Replacing Boards and Modules
Issue 07 (2013-06-28) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
236
Figure 8-33 Front panel of the power distribution box
1 Panel of the MDMC 2 RUN LED 3 ALM LED 4 Mute switch
5 Labels of power switches 6 Power switches 7 Panel of the WOPB board

4. Check whether the labels on the cables that are connected to the GBAM to be replaced
are legible. If the labels are not legible, attach a new label to the cables to avoid
improper connection after replacing the GBAM.
5. Remove the power cable, PGND cable, and Ethernet cables from the GBAM to be
replaced.
6. Remove the screws fixing the GBAM to the rack.
7. Remove the hangers from the GBAM to be replaced, and then install the hangers on
the new GBAM.
8. Remove the GBAM from the cabinet along the guide rails.
9. Place the new GBAM in the original position. Then, secure the screws.
10. Connect the power cable, PGND cable, and Ethernet cables to the new GBAM.
11. Turn on the power switch controlling the power supply to the GBAM on the power
distribution box. For distribution of the power switches, see labels on the front panel
of the power distribution box, as shown in Figure 8-33.
12. Turn on the power switch on the front panel of the new GBAM.
13. Check the items in Table 8-32.
Table 8-32 Checklist for GBAM replacement
Item Result Action
Whether the LEDs on the
panel show that the GBAM is
in normal state. For details on
the LEDs, see Front Panel of
the GBAM (IBM X3650T),
Front Panel of the GBAM
(HUAWEI C5210), and Front
Panel of the GBAM (HP
CC3310).
Yes Check the next item.
No Rectify the fault by
referring to the user
manual of the GBAM.
Alarms related to the failure of
the GBAM are cleared.
Yes Check the next item.
BSC6900 GU
Site Maintenance Guide 8 Replacing Boards and Modules
Issue 07 (2013-06-28) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
237
Item Result Action
No 1. Clear the alarms by
referring to the
alarm online help on
the LMT.
2. If the alarms persist,
contact Huawei for
technical support.
Run the Ping command to
check whether the
communication between the
GBAM and other computers
on the same network segment
is normal.
Yes Check the next item.
No 1. Check whether the
route setting is
correct. If the route
setting is incorrect,
modify the route
setting.
2. If the route setting is
correct, check the
connection of the
Ethernet cables.
Check whether the processes
are normal.
Yes End the check.
No Restart the abnormal
processes. If the
problem persists,
contact Huawei for
technical support.

l Replace the GBAM with an OMU board.
CAUTION
l Do not perform any operations that will modify the configuration data or the attributes
when replacing the GBAM.
l Get a PC ready for file backup during the GBAM replacement.
1. The OMU board can be installed in slots 0 to 3, 20 to 23, or 24 to 27 in the MPS. When
replacing the GBAM with the OMU board, first log in the OMU and run the LST
BRD command to check whether there is a vacant slot for the OMU board. If there is
no vacant slot for the OMU board, first modify the configuration data.
2. Collect the required information.
a. Run the DSP OMU command to obtain the computer name and external fixed
IP address of the GBAM.
BSC6900 GU
Site Maintenance Guide 8 Replacing Boards and Modules
Issue 07 (2013-06-28) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
238
NOTE
If the external fixed IP address is not configured, its value is displayed as null. In this case,
one must apply for an IP address that is in the same network segment as the external virtual
IP address and use it as the external fixed IP address.
b. Run the LST VER command to obtain the version information about the GBAM.
c. Run the Linux OS command route to obtain the external mask and gateway IP
address of the GBAM.
d. Run the Linux OS command ps -afx to obtain the common directory and active
workspace directory of the OMU.
3. Obtain the version software based on the version information obtained in step 2.2.
4. Back up the data on the GBAM.
a. Create a backup directory on the hard disk that has at least 1 GB free space on
the PC. The backup directory is used to back up the data on the GBAM. Then,
create subdirectories common, data, license, DefaultMeas, cert, and bin under
the backup directory.
b. Back up the reg.ini file in the common directory of the OMU to the backup/
common directory of the PC.
c. Run the BKP DB command to back up the OMU databases. The backup
databases are stored in /data/backup of the OMU active workspace directory.
Then, back up the files in /data/backup of the OMU active workspace directory
to the backup/data directory of the PC.
d. Back up the license files in the license of the OMU active workspace directory
to the backup/license directory of the PC.
e. Back up the performance task files in /ftp/DefaultMeas of the OMU active
workspace directory to the backup/DefaultMeas directory of the PC.
f. Back up the certificate files in /ftp/cert of the OMU active workspace directory
to the backup/cert directory of the PC.
g. Back up the bin directory. To back up the bin directory, first run the Linux OS
command tar czvf bin.tgz bin/ in the OMU active workspace directory to
compress the bin directory. Then, back up the compressed bin.tgz file to the
backup/bin directory of the PC.
5. Shut down the GBAM to be replaced.
a. Log in to the GBAM as user root, and then run the Linux OS command /etc/rc.d/
omud stop to stop all applications on the GBAM to be replaced.
b. Run the Linux OS command poweroff to shut down the GBAM to be replaced.
c. Turn off SW3 and SW6 on the power distribution box that control the power
supply to the GBAM to be replaced. Figure 8-33 shows the labels for the power
switches on the front panel of the power distribution box.
6. Remove the GBAM.
a. Remove the power cable, PGND cable, and Ethernet cables from the GBAM to
be replaced.
b. Remove the screws fixing the GBAM to the rack. Then, remove the hangers from
the GBAM to be replaced.
c. Remove the GBAM from the cabinet along the guide rails.
7. Installing the OMU/SAU Boards
8. Installing the OMU Applications in the Active Workspace
BSC6900 GU
Site Maintenance Guide 8 Replacing Boards and Modules
Issue 07 (2013-06-28) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
239
9. Modify the external fixed IP address, mask, gateway IP address, and computer name
of the OMU by using the omutool. For details, see Changing IP Addresses of OMU
Ethernet Adapters and Their Subnet Masks and Changing the Computer Name.
10. Recover the data.
a. Recover the reg.ini file by first deleting the reg.ini file in the /mbsc/bam/
common/ directory of the OMU and then uploading the reg.ini file in the backup/
common directory of the PC to the /mbsc/bam/common/ directory of the OMU.
b. Recover the license files by uploading the license files in the backup/license
directory of the PC to the /mbsc/bam/version_a/license directory of the OMU.
c. Recover the performance task files by uploading the files in the backup/
DefaultMeas directory of the PC to the /mbsc/bam/version_a/ftp/
DefaultMeas directory of the OMU.
d. Recover the license files by uploading the files in the backup/cert directory of
the PC to the /mbsc/bam/version_a/ftp/cert directory of the OMU.
e. Recover the bin directory.
Run the Linux OS command mv /mbsc/bam/version_a/bin /mbsc/bam/
version_a/binbak to change the name of the bin directory in the /mbsc/bam/
version_a directory to binbak.
Upload the bin.tgz file in the backup/bin directory of the PC to the /mbsc/
bam/version_a directory of the OMU.
Run the Linux OS command tar xzvf bin.tgz to decompress the bin directory.
Run the Linux OS command rm -fr /mbsc/bam/version_a/binbak to delete
the binbak directory.
f. Recover the OMU databases.
Upload the files in the backup/data directory of the PC to the OMU.
Recover the OMU data by using the omu_backup_linker tool. For details, see
Restoring System Data.
11. Run the Linux OS command /etc/rc.d/omud start to start the OMU services.
12. Log in the OMU and run the DSP OMU command to check the status and IP addresses
of the new board.
13. Run the DSP OMUMODULE command to check the status of OMU services.
14. Run the DSP BRD command to query the status of the OMU board.
15. After the OMU board works normally, run the ADD BRD command to add the
configuration data of the OMU board.
16. Run the SET SCUPORT command to disable ports 10 and 11 on the SCUa board in
subrack 0.
BSC6900 GU
Site Maintenance Guide 8 Replacing Boards and Modules
Issue 07 (2013-06-28) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
240
NOTE
The procedure for switching over the OMU from single-server mode to dual-server mode is different in
different scenarios:
l Deployment of a new BSC6900: See Setting the OMU Working Mode in BSC6900 GU OMU
Administration Guide.
l Upgrade from BSC6000 to BSC6900: See Setting the OMU Working Mode in BSC6900 GU OMU
Administration Guide.
l Upgrade from BSC6810 to BSC6900: See Setting the OMU Working Mode in BSC6900 GU OMU
Administration Guide.
----End
BSC6900 GU
Site Maintenance Guide 8 Replacing Boards and Modules
Issue 07 (2013-06-28) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
241
9 Replacing the Cables
About This Chapter
This chapter describes how to replace the Ethernet cable, E1/T1 cable, optical cable, clock signal
cable, cable to the alarm box, and power distribution box monitoring cable. This chapter also
describes how to check that the cables are successfully replaced and how to handle the faulty
cables.
Context
The requirements of installing the signal cables see the Principles of Installing the Signal Cables.
9.1 Replacing a Power Cable
This section describes how to replace a power cable. It takes about 10 minutes to replace a power
cable in overhead mode and about 30 minutes to replace a power cable in underfloor mode.
9.2 Replacing an E1/T1 Cable
This section describes how to replace an E1/T1 cable of the BSC6900. The cable consists of the
Y-shaped 75-ohm coaxial cable and Y-shaped 120-ohm twisted pair cable. It takes about 10
minutes to replace an E1/T1 cable.
9.3 Replacing an Optical Cable
This section describes how to replace an optical cable. The BSC6900 optical cables are LC/PC-
SC/PC single mode optical cable, LC/PC-SC/PC multi-mode optical cable, LC/PC-FC/PC single
mode optical cable, LC/PC-FC/PC multi-mode optical cable, LC/PC-LC/PC single mode optical
cable, and LC/PC-LC/PC multi-mode optical cable. It takes about five minutes to replace the
cable.
9.4 Replacing an Ethernet Cable
This section describes how to replace an Ethernet cable. It takes 5 to 20 minutes to replace an
Ethernet cable.
9.5 Replacing a Clock Signal Cable
This section describes how to replace a clock signal cable. It takes five to twenty minutes to
replace a clock signal cable depending on the installation position of the reference clock.
9.6 Replacing a Y-Shaped Clock Cable
This section describes how to replace a Y-shaped clock cable. It takes about 5 to 20 minutes to
replace a Y-shaped clock cable, depending on the installation position of the Y-shaped clock
cable.
BSC6900 GU
Site Maintenance Guide 9 Replacing the Cables
Issue 07 (2013-06-28) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
242
9.7 Replacing an Inter-TNUa Cable
This section describes how to replace an inter-TNUa cable. It takes five to twenty minutes to
replace an inter-TNUa cable depending on the installation position.
9.8 Replacing an EMU RS485 Communication Cable
This section describes how to replace the RS485 communication cable. It takes about five
minutes to replace the RS485 communication cable.
9.9 Replacing a Signal Cable to the Alarm Box
This section describes how to replace a signal cable connected to the alarm box. It takes five to
twenty minutes to replace a signal cable depending on the installation position of the alarm box.
9.10 Replacing the Monitoring Signal Cable for the Power Distribution Box
This section describes how to replace a monitoring cable of the power distribution box. It takes
about 10 minutes to replace a monitoring cable.
9.11 Replacing the Monitoring Signal Cable for the Independent Fan Subrack
This section describes how to replace a monitoring signal cable for the independent fan subrack.
It takes about 10 minutes to replace a monitoring signal cable for the independent fan subrack.
9.12 Replacing an SFP+ High-Speed Cable
This section describes how to replace an SFP+ high-speed cable. It takes about 10 minutes to
replace an SFP+ high-speed cable.
BSC6900 GU
Site Maintenance Guide 9 Replacing the Cables
Issue 07 (2013-06-28) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
243
9.1 Replacing a Power Cable
This section describes how to replace a power cable. It takes about 10 minutes to replace a power
cable in overhead mode and about 30 minutes to replace a power cable in underfloor mode.
Prerequisites
l The tools are ready. The tools are the diagonal pliers, wrench, medium-size flat-head
screwdriver, large-size Phillips screwdriver, and socket wrench.
l The required materials are ready, including cable ties or wax strings.
l The backup power cable is ready.
Context
CAUTION
l To avoid damage to the boards, ASIC chips, or other electronic components, wear an ESD
wrist strap properly. Ensure that the ESD wrist strap is properly connected to the ESD
connector on the cabinet. If no ESD wrist strap or no proper grounding point is available,
wear ESD gloves.
l Replacing the power cable between the PDF and the power distribution box may affect the
system operation. If the single-input external power is supplied, the replacement causes the
system to power off, therefore disrupting the services carried on the system. If the dual-input
external power is supplied, the replacement does not affect the system operation, but triggers
a power failure alarm.
l Replacing the power cable between the power distribution box and the subrack may affect
the system operation. If the single-input power is supplied, the replacement causes the
subrack to power off, therefore disrupting the services of the subrack. If the dual-input power
is supplied, the replacement does not affect the system operation.
l Replacing the power cable between the power distribution box and the independent fan
subrack may affect the system operation. If the single-input power is supplied, the
replacement causes the independent fan subrack to power off, therefore disrupting the
services of the independent fan subrack. If the dual-input power is supplied, the replacement
does not affect the system operation.
l Before replacing a power cable, check the power supply mode (for example, single input or
dual input) of the power cable. In the case of single input, be well prepared for the possible
service interruption.
Lay power cables or install power cables by referring to Installing the Power Cables and PGND
Cables.
Procedure
Step 1 Check the quantity, length, and type of the -48 V power cables and GND cables to be replaced.
Ensure that the backup -48 V cables and GND cables are of the proper length and type. Ensure
that the power cable connectors are available.
BSC6900 GU
Site Maintenance Guide 9 Replacing the Cables
Issue 07 (2013-06-28) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
244
Step 2 Attach temporary labels to the backup -48 V power cable and GND cable for easy identification.
The content on the temporary label should be consistent with the content on the engineering
label of the power cable to be replaced.
Step 3 Set switches SW1 to SW6, as described in Table 9-1.
Table 9-1 Setting switches SW1 to SW6
Type of Power Cable
to Be Replaced
External Power Supply
Mode
Operation
Power cable between
the PDF and the power
distribution box
Single input Record the states of the switches
for power output and turn off all
the switches that are ON.
Dual input/double dual inputs Record the states of the switches
for power output and turn off the
switch that controls the -48 V
power cable to be replaced.
Power cable between
the power distribution
box and the subrack
Single input/dual input Record the states of the switches
for power output and turn off the
switch that controls the -48 V
power cable to be replaced.
Power cable between
the power distribution
box and the independent
fan subrack
Single input/dual input Record the states of the switches
for power output and turn off the
switch that controls the -48 V
power cable to be replaced.

Step 4 To replace the power cable between the PDF and the power distribution box, set the switch on
the DC PDF that controls the power supply of the cabinet to OFF, and then disconnect the input
power of the power distribution box. To replace the power cable between the power distribution
box and the subrack/independent fan subrack, skip this step.
Step 5 Remove the original -48 V power cable and GND cable, and lay out the backup -48 V power
cable and GND cable.
Step 6 Connect the backup -48 V power cable and GND cable to the corresponding ports.
Step 7 Replace the temporary labels on the backup -48 V power cable and GND cable with the
engineering labels.
The content on the engineering label of the backup -48 V power cable and GND cable must be
consistent with the content on the engineering label of the original -48 V power cable and GND
cable. For details, see Attaching an Engineering Label to a Signal Cable.
Step 8 Bind the backup -48 V power cable and GND cable.
Step 9 Check whether the backup -48 V power cable and GND cable are correctly connected, and check
whether a short-circuit occurs in the backup -48 V power cable and GND cable by using a
multimeter.
Step 10 Set the switch that controls the power supply of the power distribution box on the PDF to ON.
BSC6900 GU
Site Maintenance Guide 9 Replacing the Cables
Issue 07 (2013-06-28) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
245
Step 11 Set the switches whose original states are ON to ON according to the records in step 3.
Step 12 After replacing the power cable, check the items listed in Table 9-2.
Table 9-2 Checklist for power cable replacement
Item Result Action
Cable connection is
correct.
Yes Go to the next item.
No Remove the power cable and
reconnect it.
The connectors of the
power cable are properly
inserted into the port.
Yes Go to the next item.
No Secure the connector.
Alarms related to the
power cable are cleared.
Yes Go to the next item.
No 1. Clear the alarms by
referring to the alarm
online help on the LMT.
2. If the alarms persist,
contact Huawei for
technical support.

----End
Follow-up Procedure
Dispose of the replaced power cable properly to prevent short-circuits and environmental
pollution.
9.2 Replacing an E1/T1 Cable
This section describes how to replace an E1/T1 cable of the BSC6900. The cable consists of the
Y-shaped 75-ohm coaxial cable and Y-shaped 120-ohm twisted pair cable. It takes about 10
minutes to replace an E1/T1 cable.
Prerequisites
l The tools are ready. The tools are the ESD wrist strap, flat-head screwdriver, and diagonal
pliers.
l The required materials are ready, including cable ties or wax strings.
l A new E1/T1 cable is ready.
BSC6900 GU
Site Maintenance Guide 9 Replacing the Cables
Issue 07 (2013-06-28) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
246
Context
CAUTION
To protect the components from electrostatic discharge, wear an ESD wrist strap properly.
Ensure that the ESD wrist strap is properly connected to the ESD connector on the cabinet. If
no ESD wrist strap or no proper grounding point is available, wear ESD gloves.
CAUTION
l Replacing the E1/T1 cable disrupts the services carried over the E1/T1 cable.
l If the BSC6900 and its peer end are connected through only the E1/T1 cable, all the services
between the BSC6900 and its peer end are disrupted during the replacement.
Lay E1/T1 cables or install E1/T1 cables by referring to Installing the E1/T1 Cables.
Procedure
Step 1 Confirm the quantity, length, and type of the E1/T1 cables to be replaced. Arrange for a new
E1/T1 cable with proper length and type. Note that extra length should be reserved.
Step 2 Add a connector for the DDF to the new E1/T1 cable.
Step 3 Attach temporary labels to the new E1/T1 cable. The content on the temporary label should be
consistent with the content on the original label.
NOTE
To facilitate the routing of E1/T1 cables in real situations, you may have to remove the side doors and rear
door of the cabinet. Install the removed doors after arranging the E1/T1 cables.
Step 4 Lay out the new E1/T1 cable along the original routing, or according to the new routing
requirements on site.
Step 5 On the BSC6900 side, remove the fastening screws on both ends of the E1/T1 cable without
using any tools. Then, disconnect the E1/T1 cable to be replaced from the BSC6900 and the
DDF respectively.
Step 6 Connect the new E1/T1 cable without using any tools to the original ports on the BSC6900 and
the DDF.
Step 7 Replace the temporary labels on the new cable with the engineering labels.
The content on the engineering label of the new E1/T1 cable must be identical with the content
on the engineering label of the original E1/T1 cable. For details, see Attaching an Engineering
Label to a Signal Cable.
Step 8 Bind the new E1/T1 cables.
Step 9 After replacing the E1/T1 cable, check the following item listed in Table 9-3.
BSC6900 GU
Site Maintenance Guide 9 Replacing the Cables
Issue 07 (2013-06-28) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
247
Table 9-3 Checklist for E1/T1 cable replacement
Item Result Action
Cable connection is
correct.
Yes Check the next item.
No Remove the E1/T1 cable and
reconnect it.
The connectors of the
E1/T1 cable are
properly inserted into
the ports.
Yes Check the next item.
No Secure the connector.
Alarms related to
transmission cable are
cleared.
Yes End the check.
No 1. Clear the alarms by referring
to the alarm online help on
the LMT.
2. If the alarms persist, contact
Huawei for technical
support.

----End
Follow-up Procedure
Dispose of the replaced E1/T1 cable properly to prevent short circuit and environmental
pollution.
9.3 Replacing an Optical Cable
This section describes how to replace an optical cable. The BSC6900 optical cables are LC/PC-
SC/PC single mode optical cable, LC/PC-SC/PC multi-mode optical cable, LC/PC-FC/PC single
mode optical cable, LC/PC-FC/PC multi-mode optical cable, LC/PC-LC/PC single mode optical
cable, and LC/PC-LC/PC multi-mode optical cable. It takes about five minutes to replace the
cable.
Prerequisites
l The tools are ready. The tools are the ESD wrist strap, dustfree cotton cloth, fiber cleaner,
and diagonal pliers.
l The materials are ready. The materials are cable ties or wax strings.
l A new optical cable is ready.
l Confirm the quantity, length, and type of optical cables to be replaced.
BSC6900 GU
Site Maintenance Guide 9 Replacing the Cables
Issue 07 (2013-06-28) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
248
Context
CAUTION
To protect the components from electrostatic discharge, wear an ESD wrist strap properly.
Ensure that the ESD wrist strap is properly connected to the ESD connector on the cabinet. If
no ESD wrist strap or no proper grounding point is available, wear ESD gloves.
CAUTION
l When replacing the optical cable, invisible laser radiation might be emitted from
disconnected fibers or optical connectors. Do not stare into the beams or view directly with
optical instruments to prevent eye damages.
l When the BSC6900 and other NEs are connected in optical port backup mode, replacing one
optical cable does not affect services of the system. Otherwise, replacing an optical cable
disrupts all the services carried on that cable.
l When the BSC6900 and its peer equipment are connected through only the optical cable, all
services between them are disrupted during the replacement.
Lay optical cables or install optical cables by referring to Installing the Optical Cables.
Procedure
Step 1 Attach temporary labels to the new cable for easy identification. It is recommended that content
of the temporary label be consistent with that of the original label.
Step 2 Lay out the new optical cable according to the original routing or according to the new routing
requirements on site.
Step 3 Remove the optical cable to be replaced.
If... Then...
The connector type is LC/PC or SC/PC. Press the tab on the connector and remove the
cable.
The connector type is FC/PC, Unscrew the optical connector counterclockwise.
NOTE
If the removed optical cable is not damaged, cap the connector. If the connectors are dirty, clean them with
the dustfree cotton cloth or the fiber cleaner.
Step 4 Remove the dustproof cap from the optical connector and reserve the cap for later use. Connect
the new cable to the original ports.
BSC6900 GU
Site Maintenance Guide 9 Replacing the Cables
Issue 07 (2013-06-28) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
249
CAUTION
For the LC/PC, SC/PC or FC/PC connector, the TX end and the RX end must be connected
correctly by referring to the temporary label. Otherwise, the signal cannot be received or
transmitted.
Step 5 Replace the temporary labels on the new cable with the engineering labels. Content of the
engineering label must be consistent with that of the temporary label. For details, see Attaching
an Engineering Label to a Signal Cable.
Step 6 Bind the new optical cable.
Step 7 Check the items in Table 9-4.
Table 9-4 Checklist for optical cable replacement
Item Result Action
Cable connection is
correct.
Yes Check the next item.
No Remove the cable and reconnect it.
The connectors of
the optical cable are
properly inserted
into the port.
Yes Check the next item.
No Secure the connector.
Alarms related to the
transmission cable
are cleared.
Yes End the check.
No
Clear these alarms by referring to the alarm online
help on the LMT. If the faults persist, contact
Huawei for technical support.

----End
Follow-up Procedure
Dispose of the replaced optical cables to prevent environmental pollution.
9.4 Replacing an Ethernet Cable
This section describes how to replace an Ethernet cable. It takes 5 to 20 minutes to replace an
Ethernet cable.
Prerequisites
l The tools are ready. The tools are the ESD wrist strap, Ethernet cable meter, Ethernet cable
pliers, and diagonal pliers.
l The materials are ready. The materials are cable ties or wax strings.
l A new Ethernet cable is ready.
BSC6900 GU
Site Maintenance Guide 9 Replacing the Cables
Issue 07 (2013-06-28) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
250
Context
CAUTION
To protect the components from electrostatic discharge, wear an ESD wrist strap properly.
Ensure that the ESD wrist strap is properly connected to the ESD connector on the cabinet. If
no ESD wrist strap or no proper grounding point is available, wear ESD gloves.
CAUTION
l Replacing the Ethernet cables to the LMT disrupts the communication between the LMT PC
and the OMU.
l The Port Trunking function is used in the interconnection ports on the inter-subrack SCUa
board. Replacing one Ethernet cable has no adverse effect on the system.
l For the FG2a board, if the BSC6900 is connected to the peer equipment through only the
Ethernet cable, services carried between the BSC6900 and the peer equipment are disrupted
during the replacement of the Ethernet cable.
l The OMUa board is configured with a pair of Ethernet cables. Replacing one of them has no
adverse impact on the system.
l Confirm the quantity, length, and type of the Ethernet cables to be replaced. The Ethernet
cables from different manufacturers differ in color and diameter. The new Ethernet cable
should be compatible with the cable to be replaced.
l Lay Ethernet cables or install Ethernet cables by referring to Installing the Ethernet Cables.
Procedure
Step 1 Arrange for a new Ethernet cable with proper length and type. Note that extra length should be
reserved.
Step 2 Assemble the shielded RJ45 connector the unshielded RJ45 connector and the Ethernet cable
according to the actual requirements by referring to Assembling the Shielded RJ45 Connector
and the Ethernet Cable or Assembling the Unshielded RJ45 Connector and the Ethernet Cable,
and then check the appearance of metal contact strips and test the connection of assembled cables
by referring to Checking the Appearance of Metal Contact Strips and Testing the Connection of
Assembled Cables.
Step 3 Attach temporary labels to the new cable for clear identification.
It is recommended that the content of the temporary label be consistent with that of the old label.
Step 4 Lay out the new Ethernet cable according to the original or on-site routing requirements.
Step 5 Disconnect the Ethernet cable to be replaced from the ports.
Step 6 Connect the new Ethernet cable to the original ports.
Step 7 Replace the temporary labels on the new cable with the engineering labels
BSC6900 GU
Site Maintenance Guide 9 Replacing the Cables
Issue 07 (2013-06-28) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
251
Content of the engineering label must be consistent with that of the temporary label. For details,
see Attaching an Engineering Label to a Signal Cable.
Step 8 Bind the new Ethernet cable with cable ties.
Step 9 Check the items in Table 9-5.
Table 9-5 Checklist for Ethernet cable replacement
Item Result Action
Cable connection is
correct.
Yes Check the next item.
No Remove the cable and reconnect it.
The connectors of the
cable are properly
inserted into the port.
Yes Check the next item.
No Secure the connector.
Alarms related to
network
communications are
cleared.
Yes Check the next item.
No
Clear these alarms by referring to the alarm
online help on the LMT. If the faults persist,
contact Huawei for technical support.
Two ends connected by
the cable can properly
communicate with
each other after the
Ping command is
executed in DOS
mode.
Yes End the check.
No
Check the cable connection. If the cable
connection is faulty, replace it with a new one.

----End
Follow-up Procedure
Dispose of the replaced Ethernet cable to prevent environmental pollution.
9.5 Replacing a Clock Signal Cable
This section describes how to replace a clock signal cable. It takes five to twenty minutes to
replace a clock signal cable depending on the installation position of the reference clock.
Prerequisites
l The tools are ready. The tools are the ESD wrist strap and diagonal pliers.
l The materials are ready. The materials are cable ties or wax strings.
l A new clock signal cable is ready.
BSC6900 GU
Site Maintenance Guide 9 Replacing the Cables
Issue 07 (2013-06-28) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
252
Context
CAUTION
To protect the components from electrostatic discharge, wear an ESD wrist strap properly.
Ensure that the ESD wrist strap is properly connected to the ESD connector on the cabinet. If
no ESD wrist strap or no proper grounding point is available, wear ESD gloves.
Lay clock signal cables or install clock signal cables by referring to Installing the Clock Signal
Cables.
Procedure
Step 1 Attach temporary labels to the new cable for easy identification. It is recommended that content
of the temporary label be identical with that of the old label.
Step 2 Lay out the new clock signal cable according to the original routing or according to the new
routing requirements on site.
Step 3 Disconnect the clock signal cable from the port.
Step 4 Connect the new clock signal cable to the original ports.
Step 5 Replace the temporary labels on the new cable with the engineering labels.
Content of the engineering label must be consistent with that of the temporary label. For details,
see Attaching an Engineering Label to a Signal Cable.
Step 6 Bind the new clock signal cables.
Step 7 After replacing the clock signal cable, check the items in Table 9-6.
Table 9-6 Checklist for clock signal cable replacement
Item Result Action
Cable connection is
correct.
Yes Check the next item.
No Remove the cable and reconnect it.
The connectors of the
clock signal cable are
properly inserted into
the ports.
Yes Check the next item.
No Secure the connectors.
Alarms related to the
clock signal cable are
cleared.
Yes End the check.
No
Clear these alarms by referring to the alarm online
help on the LMT. If the faults persist, contact
Huawei for technical support.

----End
BSC6900 GU
Site Maintenance Guide 9 Replacing the Cables
Issue 07 (2013-06-28) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
253
Follow-up Procedure
Dispose of the replaced clock signal cable to prevent environmental pollution.
9.6 Replacing a Y-Shaped Clock Cable
This section describes how to replace a Y-shaped clock cable. It takes about 5 to 20 minutes to
replace a Y-shaped clock cable, depending on the installation position of the Y-shaped clock
cable.
Prerequisites
l The tools and items required for replacing a Y-shaped clock cable are ready. The tools and
items are ESD wrist strap and diagonal pliers.
l The required materials are ready. The materials are cable ties or wax strings.
l A new Y-shaped clock cable is ready.
Context
CAUTION
To protect the components from electrostatic discharge, wear an ESD wrist strap properly.
Ensure that the ESD wrist strap is properly connected to the ESD connector on the cabinet. If
no ESD wrist strap or no proper grounding point is available, wear ESD gloves.
CAUTION
Replacing the Y-shaped clock cable triggers a clock alarm and leads to a failover of the SCUa.
Lay Y-shaped clock cables or install Y-shaped clock cables by referring to Installing the Y-
Shaped Clock Cables.
Procedure
Step 1 Confirm the number, length, and type of the clock cables to be replaced. Attach temporary labels
to the new cables to distinguish them from others. The content on the temporary label should be
identical to the content on the engineering label of the Y-shaped clock cable to be replaced.
Step 2 Ensure that the Y-shaped clock cable is connected to an SCUa in standby mode. Before replacing
the Y-shaped clock cable connecting to the active SCUa, switch the SCUa from the active state
to the standby state.
Step 3 Disconnect the Y-shaped clock cable from the ports.
Step 4 Lay out the new Y-shaped clock cable according to the original route.
Step 5 Connect the new Y-shaped clock cable to the original ports.
BSC6900 GU
Site Maintenance Guide 9 Replacing the Cables
Issue 07 (2013-06-28) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
254
Step 6 Replace the temporary label on the new cable with the engineering label.
The content on the engineering label of the new Y-shaped clock cable must be identical to the
content on the engineering label of the original Y-shaped clock cable. For details, see Attaching
an Engineering Label to a Signal Cable.
Step 7 Bind the new Y-shaped clock cable.
Step 8 After replacing the Y-shaped clock cable, check the items listed in Table 9-7.
Table 9-7 Checklist for the new Y-shaped clock cable
Item Result Action
Check whether the
physical connection is
correct.
Yes Go to the next item.
No Remove the Y-shaped clock cable
and reconnect it.
Check whether the
connector of the Y-
shaped clock cable is
properly inserted into the
port.
Yes Go to the next item.
No Secure the insertion.
Check whether alarms
related to the clock cable
are cleared.
Yes End the check.
No 1. Handle the alarm by referring to
the alarm help information on the
LMT.
2. If the alarms persist, contact
Huawei Customer Service
Center.

----End
Follow-up Procedure
Dispose of the replaced Y-shaped clock cable in an environment-friendly way.
9.7 Replacing an Inter-TNUa Cable
This section describes how to replace an inter-TNUa cable. It takes five to twenty minutes to
replace an inter-TNUa cable depending on the installation position.
Prerequisites
l The tools are ready, including the ESD wrist strap, flat-head screwdriver, and diagonal
pliers.
l The required materials are ready. The materials are cable ties or wax strings.
l A new inter-TNUa cable is ready.
BSC6900 GU
Site Maintenance Guide 9 Replacing the Cables
Issue 07 (2013-06-28) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
255
Context
CAUTION
To protect the components from electrostatic discharge, wear an ESD wrist strap properly.
Ensure that the ESD wrist strap is properly connected to the ESD connector on the cabinet. If
no ESD wrist strap or no proper grounding point is available, wear ESD gloves.
CAUTION
Replacing the inter-TNUa cable disrupts the TDM switching services between the two subracks
that are connected by the inter-TNUa cable.
Lay inter-TNUa cables or install inter-TNUa cables by referring to Installing the Inter-TNUa
Cables.
Procedure
Step 1 Confirm the quantity, length, and type of the inter-TNUa cables to be replaced. Attach temporary
labels to the new cables for easy identification.
The content on the temporary label should be identical with the content on the engineering label
of the inter-TNUa cable to be replaced.
Step 2 Remove the fastening screws from the inter-TNUa cable connector without using any tools, and
then remove the cable.
Step 3 Lay out the new inter-TNUa cable according to the original routing, or according to the new
routing requirements on site.
Step 4 Connect the new inter-TNUa cable to the original ports without using any tools.
Step 5 Replace the temporary labels on the new inter-TNUa cable with the engineering labels.
The content on the engineering label of the new inter-TNUa cable must be identical with the
content on the engineering label of the original inter-TNUa cable. For details, see Attaching an
Engineering Label to a Signal Cable.
Step 6 Bind the new inter-TNUa cable.
Step 7 After replacing the inter-TNUa cable, check the items listed in Table 9-8.
Table 9-8 Checklist for inter-TNUa cable replacement
Item Result Action
Cable connection is
correct.
Yes Check the next item.
No Remove the inter-TNUa cable
and reconnect it.
BSC6900 GU
Site Maintenance Guide 9 Replacing the Cables
Issue 07 (2013-06-28) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
256
Item Result Action
The connectors of the
cable are properly
inserted into the port.
Yes Check the next item.
No Secure the connector.
Alarms related to
transmission cables
are cleared.
Yes End the check.
No 1. Clear the alarms by referring
to the alarm online help on
the LMT.
2. If the alarms persist, contact
Huawei for technical support.

----End
Follow-up Procedure
Dispose of the replaced inter-TNUa cable to prevent short circuit and environmental pollution.
9.8 Replacing an EMU RS485 Communication Cable
This section describes how to replace the RS485 communication cable. It takes about five
minutes to replace the RS485 communication cable.
Prerequisites
l The tools are ready, including the ESD gloves, diagonal pliers, and flat-head screwdriver.
l The required materials are ready, including cable ties or wax strings.
l A new RS485 communication cable is ready.
Context
CAUTION
l To avoid damage to the boards, ASIC chips, or other electronic components, wear an ESD
wrist strap properly. Ensure that the ESD wrist strap is properly connected to the ESD
connector on the cabinet. If no ESD wrist strap or no proper grounding point is available,
wear ESD gloves.
l It is recommended that you need to use the same board type to replace the old board. To use
a board of the different version to replace the board (for example, use a board of version a
to replace a board of version b), contact Huawei for technical support.
Lay RS485 communication cables or install RS485 communication cables by referring to
Installing the EMU RS485 Communication Cables.
BSC6900 GU
Site Maintenance Guide 9 Replacing the Cables
Issue 07 (2013-06-28) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
257
Procedure
Step 1 Lay out the new signal cable according to the original routing, or according to the new routing
requirements on site.
Step 2 On the EMU side, remove the DB9 male connector on one end of the EMU RS485
communication cable from the DB9 female socket on the EMU.
Step 3 On the BSC6900 side, remove the RJ45 connector on the other end of the EMU RS485
communication cable from the J1 port on the power distribution box of the BSC6900 cabinet.
Step 4 According to the original cable positions, connect a new RS485 communication cable to the
EMU and the power distribution box.
Step 5 Attach engineering labels to the new RS485 communication cable. For details, see Attaching an
Engineering Label to a Signal Cable.
The content on the engineering label of the new RS485 communication cable must be identical
with that on the engineering label of the original RS485 communication cable.
Step 6 Power on the EMU.
Step 7 Test the EMU by referring to the manual delivered with the EMU.
Step 8 If the LEDs on the front panel of the EMU indicate abnormal communication on the serial port,
check the connection.
----End
Follow-up Procedure
Dispose of the replaced RS485 communication cable properly to prevent environmental
pollution.
9.9 Replacing a Signal Cable to the Alarm Box
This section describes how to replace a signal cable connected to the alarm box. It takes five to
twenty minutes to replace a signal cable depending on the installation position of the alarm box.
Prerequisites
l The tools are ready. The tools are the ESD gloves, ESD wrist strap, and diagonal pliers.
l The materials are ready. The materials are cable ties.
l A new signal cable is ready.
BSC6900 GU
Site Maintenance Guide 9 Replacing the Cables
Issue 07 (2013-06-28) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
258
Context
CAUTION
l To avoid damage to the boards, ASIC chips, or other electronic components, wear an ESD
wrist strap properly. Ensure that the ESD wrist strap is properly connected to the ESD
connector on the cabinet. If no ESD wrist strap or no proper grounding point is available,
wear ESD gloves.
l It is recommended that you need to use the same board type to replace the old board. To use
a board of the different version to replace the board (for example, use a board of version a
to replace a board of version b), contact Huawei for technical support.
CAUTION
Communication between the alarm box and the LMT PC is disrupted during the replacement.
Procedure
Step 1 Lay out the new signal cable according to the original routing or according to the new routing
requirements on site.
Step 2 Loosen the DB9/DB25 connector and then remove the signal cable from the LMT that reports
alarms.
Step 3 On the alarm box side, power off the alarm box, unlock the alarm box, remove the front panel,
and then disconnect the signal cable.
Step 4 Connect the new signal cable to the LMT PC and the alarm box by referring to the original
connection of the signal cable.
Step 5 Reinstall the front panel and lock the alarm box.
Step 6 Attach engineering labels to the new signal cable. The content of the new label must be the same
as the content of the old one.
Step 7 Power on the alarm box.
Step 8 Test the alarm box by referring to the manual delivered with the alarm box.
Step 9 If the LEDs on the front panel of the alarm box indicate abnormal communication on the serial
port, check the connection.
----End
Follow-up Procedure
Dispose of the replaced signal cable properly to prevent environmental pollution.
BSC6900 GU
Site Maintenance Guide 9 Replacing the Cables
Issue 07 (2013-06-28) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
259
9.10 Replacing the Monitoring Signal Cable for the Power
Distribution Box
This section describes how to replace a monitoring cable of the power distribution box. It takes
about 10 minutes to replace a monitoring cable.
Prerequisites
l The tools are ready. The tools are the ESD wrist strip, diagonal pliers, and Phillips
screwdriver.
l The materials are ready. The materials are cable ties or wax strings.
l A new monitoring cable is ready.
Context
CAUTION
To protect the components from electrostatic discharge, wear an ESD wrist strap properly.
Ensure that the ESD wrist strap is properly connected to the ESD connector on the cabinet. If
no ESD wrist strap or no proper grounding point is available, wear ESD gloves.
Procedure
Step 1 Attach temporary labels to the new cable for easy identification. It is recommended that content
of the temporary label be consistent with that of the old label.
Step 2 Lay out the monitoring cable.
Step 3 Remove the monitoring cable to be replaced from the port.
Step 4 Connect the new monitoring cable to the original ports.
Step 5 Replace the temporary labels on the new cable with the engineering labels.
Content of the engineering label must be consistent with that of the temporary label. For details,
see Attaching an Engineering Label to a Signal Cable.
Step 6 Bind the monitoring cable.
Step 7 After replacing the monitoring cable of the power distribution box, check the items in Table
9-9.
Table 9-9 Checklist for monitoring cable replacement
Item Result Action
Cable connection is
correct.
Yes Check the next item.
BSC6900 GU
Site Maintenance Guide 9 Replacing the Cables
Issue 07 (2013-06-28) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
260
Item Result Action
No
Remove the monitoring cable and connect the
cable again.
The connectors of the
monitoring cable are
properly inserted into
the port.
Yes Check the next item.
No Secure the connector.
LEDs on the panel
properly indicate the
running of power
distribution box.
Yes Check the next item.
No Contact Huawei for technical support.
Alarms related to the
monitoring cable are
cleared.
Yes End the check.
No
Clear these alarms by referring to the alarm
online help on the LMT. If the faults persist,
contact Huawei for technical support.

----End
Follow-up Procedure
Dispose of the replaced monitoring cable to prevent environmental pollution.
9.11 Replacing the Monitoring Signal Cable for the
Independent Fan Subrack
This section describes how to replace a monitoring signal cable for the independent fan subrack.
It takes about 10 minutes to replace a monitoring signal cable for the independent fan subrack.
Prerequisites
l The tools are ready. The tools are the ESD wrist strip, diagonal pliers, and Phillips
screwdriver.
l The materials are ready. The materials are cable ties or wax strings.
l A new monitoring signal cable for the independent fan subrack is ready.
Context
CAUTION
To protect the components from electrostatic discharge, wear an ESD wrist strap properly.
Ensure that the ESD wrist strap is properly connected to the ESD connector on the cabinet. If
no ESD wrist strap or no proper grounding point is available, wear ESD gloves.
BSC6900 GU
Site Maintenance Guide 9 Replacing the Cables
Issue 07 (2013-06-28) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
261
Procedure
Step 1 Attach temporary labels to the new cable for easy identification. It is recommended that content
of the temporary label be identical with that of the old label.
Step 2 Lay out the new monitoring signal cable for the independent fan subrack.
Step 3 Disconnect the monitoring signal cable to be replaced from the port.
Step 4 Connect the new monitoring signal cable to the corresponding port.
Step 5 Replace the temporary labels on the new cable with the engineering labels.
The content of the engineering label must be consistent with that of the temporary label. For
details, see Attaching an Engineering Label to a Signal Cable.
Step 6 Bind the monitoring signal cable to other cables.
Step 7 After replacing the monitoring signal cable, check the items in Table 9-10.
Table 9-10 Checklist for monitoring signal cable replacement
Item Result Action
Cable connection is
correct.
Yes Go to the next item.
No
Remove the monitoring signal cable and connect
the cable again.
The connectors of the
monitoring signal cable
are securely connected
to the ports.
Yes Go to the next item.
No
Secure the connectors of the monitoring signal
cable.
The LEDs on the panel
of the independent fan
subrack correctly
indicate the state of the
fan box.
Yes Go to the next item.
No Contact Huawei for technical support.
Alarms related to the
monitoring signal cable
are cleared.
Yes End the check.
No
Clear the alarms by referring to the alarm online
help on the LMT. If the alarms persist, contact
Huawei for technical support.

----End
Follow-up Procedure
Dispose of the replaced monitoring signal cable properly to prevent environmental pollution.
9.12 Replacing an SFP+ High-Speed Cable
This section describes how to replace an SFP+ high-speed cable. It takes about 10 minutes to
replace an SFP+ high-speed cable.
BSC6900 GU
Site Maintenance Guide 9 Replacing the Cables
Issue 07 (2013-06-28) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
262
Prerequisites
l The tools are ready. They are the ESD wrist strap, the ESD box or bag, and the diagonal
pliers.
l A new SFP+ high-speed cable is ready.
Context
CAUTION
To protect the components from electrostatic discharge, wear an ESD wrist strap properly.
Ensure that the ESD wrist strap is properly connected to the ESD connector on the cabinet. If
no ESD wrist strap or no proper grounding point is available, wear ESD gloves.
For details on how to install SFP+ high-speed cables, see Installing the Inter-SCUb SFP+ High-
Speed Cables Between Different Subracks.
Procedure
Step 1 Confirm the quantity, length, and type of the SFP+ high-speed cables to be replaced. Attach
temporary label to the new cable for easy identification. The content on the temporary label
should be consistent with that on the engineering label of the SFP+ high-speed cable to be
replaced.
Step 2 Confirm that the SCUb whose SFP+ high-speed cable is to be replaced works in standby mode.
If the SCUb works in active mode, perform active/standby switchover on the SCUb boards.
Step 3 Pull out the connector of the SFP+ high-speed cable to be replaced from where it is inserted by
the handle, as shown in Figure 9-1.
Figure 9-1 SFP+ High-Speed Cable

Step 4 Lay out the new SFP+ high-speed cable according to the original routing.
Step 5 Connect the new SFP+ high-speed cable to the corresponding ports.
Step 6 Replace the temporary label on the new SFP+ high-speed cable with the engineering label.
The content on the engineering label must be consistent with that on the engineering label of the
original SFP+ high-speed cable. For details, see Attaching an Engineering Label to a Signal
Cable.
Step 7 Bind the new SFP+ high-speed cable.
Step 8 After replacing the SFP+ high-speed cable, check the items listed in Table 9-11.
BSC6900 GU
Site Maintenance Guide 9 Replacing the Cables
Issue 07 (2013-06-28) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
263
Table 9-11 Checklist for SFP+ high-speed cable replacement
Item Result Action
Cable connection is
correct.
Yes Check the next item.
No Remove the SFP+ high-speed
cable and reconnect it.
The connector of the
SFP+ high-speed cable
is properly inserted
into the port.
Yes Check the next item.
No Secure the connector.
Alarms related to
transmission cables are
cleared.
Yes End the check.
No 1. Clear the alarms by referring
to the alarm online help on
the LMT.
2. If the alarms persist, contact
Huawei for technical
support.

----End
Follow-up Procedure
Dispose of the replaced SFP+ high-speed cable to prevent short circuit and environmental
pollution.
BSC6900 GU
Site Maintenance Guide 9 Replacing the Cables
Issue 07 (2013-06-28) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
264
10 LEDs on the Boards
About This Chapter
This chapter describes the LEDs on the BSC6900 boards.
10.1 LEDs on the AEUa Board
There are three LEDs on the AEUa board: RUN, ALM, and ACT.
10.2 LEDs on the AOUa Board
There are three LEDs on the AOUa board: RUN, ALM, and ACT.
10.3 LEDs on the AOUc Board
There are four types of LEDs on the AOUc board: RUN, ALM, ACT, and LOS.
10.4 LEDs on the DPUa Board
There are three LEDs on the DPUa board: RUN, ALM, and ACT.
10.5 LEDs on the DPUb Board
There are three LEDs on the DPUb board: RUN, ALM, and ACT.
10.6 LEDs on the DPUc Board
There are three LEDs on the DPUc board: RUN, ALM, and ACT.
10.7 LEDs on the DPUd Board
There are three LEDs on the DPUd board: RUN, ALM, and ACT.
10.8 LEDs on the DPUe Board
There are three LEDs on the DPUe board: RUN, ALM, and ACT.
10.9 LEDs on the EIUa Board
There are three LEDs on the EIUa board: RUN, ALM, and ACT.
10.10 LEDs on the FG2a Board
Among all the LEDs on the FG2a board, RUN, ALM, and ACT indicate the status of the FG2a
board, and other LEDs indicate the status of Ethernet ports. There are two LEDs at each Ethernet
port: LINK and ACT.
10.11 LEDs on the FG2c Board
Among all the LEDs on the FG2c board, RUN, ALM, and ACT indicate the status of the FG2c
board, and other LEDs indicate the status of Ethernet ports. There are two LEDs at each Ethernet
port: LINK and ACT.
BSC6900 GU
Site Maintenance Guide 10 LEDs on the Boards
Issue 07 (2013-06-28) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
265
10.12 LEDs on the FG2d Board
Among all the LEDs on the FG2d board, RUN, ALM, and ACT indicate the status of the FG2d
board, and other LEDs indicate the status of Ethernet ports. There are two LEDs at each Ethernet
port: LINK and ACT.
10.13 LEDs on the GCUa/GCGa Board
There are three LEDs on the panel of the GCUa/GCGa board: RUN, ALM, and ACT.
10.14 LEDs on the GOUa Board
There are three LEDs on the GOUa board: RUN, ALM, and ACT.
10.15 LEDs on the GOUc Board
There are five types of LEDs on the GOUc board: RUN, ALM, ACT, LINK (optical port LED),
and ACT (optical port LED).
10.16 LEDs on the GOUd Board
There are five types of LEDs on the GOUd board: RUN, ALM, ACT, LINK (optical port LED),
and ACT (optical port LED).
10.17 LEDs on the MDMC Board
There are two LEDs on the MDMC board: RUN and ALM.
10.18 LEDs on the NIUa Board
There are three LEDs on the NIUa board: RUN, ALM, and ACT.
10.19 LEDs on the OIUa Board
There are four LEDs on the OIUa board: RUN, ALM, ACT, and LOS.
10.20 LEDs on the OMUa/OMUb Board
There are five types of LEDs on the OMUa/OMUb board: RUN, ALM, ACT, OFFLINE, and
HD.
10.21 LEDs on the PAMU Board
There are two LEDs on the PAMU board: RUN and ALM.
10.22 LEDs on the PEUa Board
There are three LEDs on the PEUa board: RUN, ALM, and ACT.
10.23 LEDs on the POUa Board
There are three LEDs on the POUa board: RUN, ALM, and ACT.
10.24 LEDs on the POUc Board
There are four types of LEDs on the POUc board: RUN, ALM, ACT, and LOS.
10.25 LEDs on the SAUa Board
There are five types of LEDs on the SAUa board: RUN, ALM, ACT, HD, and OFFLINE.
10.26 LEDs on the SAUc Board
There are five types of LEDs on the SAUc board: RUN, ALM, ACT, HDD, and OFL.
10.27 LEDs on the SCUa Board
Among all the LEDs on the SCUa board, RUN, ALM, and ACT indicate the status of the SCUa
board, and other LEDs indicate the status of Ethernet ports. There are two LEDs at each Ethernet
port: LINK and ACT.
10.28 LEDs on the SCUb Board
Among all the LEDs on the SCUb board, RUN, ALM, and ACT indicate the status of the SCUb
board, LINK and ACT indicate the status of each 10M/100M/1000M Ethernet port, and 10G
LINK indicates the status of each 10G Ethernet port.
BSC6900 GU
Site Maintenance Guide 10 LEDs on the Boards
Issue 07 (2013-06-28) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
266
10.29 LEDs on the SPUa Board
Among all the LEDs on the SPUa board, RUN, ALM, and ACT indicate the status of the SPUb
board, and other LEDs indicate the status of Ethernet ports. There are two LEDs at each Ethernet
port: LINK and ACT.
10.30 LEDs on the SPUb Board
Among all the LEDs on the SPUb board, RUN, ALM, and ACT indicate the status of the SPUb
board, and other LEDs indicate the status of Ethernet ports. There are two LEDs at each Ethernet
port: LINK and ACT.
10.31 LEDs on the TNUa Board
There are three LEDs on the TNUa board: RUN, ALM, and ACT.
10.32 LEDs on the UOIa Board
There are three LEDs on the UOIa board: RUN, ALM, and ACT.
10.33 LEDs on the UOIc Board
There are four types of LEDs on the UOIc board: RUN, ALM, ACT, and LOS.
BSC6900 GU
Site Maintenance Guide 10 LEDs on the Boards
Issue 07 (2013-06-28) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
267
10.1 LEDs on the AEUa Board
There are three LEDs on the AEUa board: RUN, ALM, and ACT.
Table 10-1 describes the LEDs on the AEUa board.
Table 10-1 LEDs on the AEUa board
LED Color Status Description
RUN Green ON for 1s and OFF for
1s
The board is functional.
ON for 0.125s and OFF
for 0.125s
The board is in loading state.
ON There is power supply, but the board
is faulty.
OFF There is no power supply, or the board
is faulty.
ALM Red OFF There is no alarm.
ON or blinking There is a fault alarm.
ACT Green ON The board is in active mode.
OFF The board is in standby mode.

10.2 LEDs on the AOUa Board
There are three LEDs on the AOUa board: RUN, ALM, and ACT.
Table 10-2 describes the LEDs on the AOUa board.
Table 10-2 LEDs on the AOUa board
LED Color Status Description
RUN Green ON for 1s and OFF for
1s
The board is functional.
ON for 0.125s and OFF
for 0.125s
The board is in loading state.
ON There is power supply, but the board
is faulty.
OFF There is no power supply, or the board
is faulty.
ALM Red OFF There is no alarm.
BSC6900 GU
Site Maintenance Guide 10 LEDs on the Boards
Issue 07 (2013-06-28) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
268
LED Color Status Description
ON or blinking There is a fault alarm.
ACT Green ON The board is in active mode.
OFF The board is in standby mode.

10.3 LEDs on the AOUc Board
There are four types of LEDs on the AOUc board: RUN, ALM, ACT, and LOS.
Table 10-3 describes the LEDs on the AOUc board.
Table 10-3 LEDs on the AOUc board
LED Colo
r
Status Description
RUN Gree
n
ON for 1s and OFF for 1s The board is functional.
ON for 0.125s and OFF for
0.125s
The board is in loading state.
ON There is power supply, but the board
is faulty.
OFF There is no power supply, or the board
is faulty.
ALM Red OFF There is no alarm.
ON or blinking There is a fault alarm.
ACT Gree
n
ON The board is in active mode.
OFF The board is in standby mode.
LOS Gree
n
ON The STM-1 port does not receive
signals properly.
OFF The STM-1 port receives signals
properly.

10.4 LEDs on the DPUa Board
There are three LEDs on the DPUa board: RUN, ALM, and ACT.
Table 10-4 describes the LEDs on the DPUa board.
BSC6900 GU
Site Maintenance Guide 10 LEDs on the Boards
Issue 07 (2013-06-28) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
269
Table 10-4 LEDs on the DPUa board
LED Color Status Description
RUN Green ON for 1s and OFF for
1s
The board is functional.
ON for 0.125s and OFF
for 0.125s
The board is in loading state.
ON There is power supply, but the board
is faulty.
OFF There is no power supply, or the board
is faulty.
ALM Red OFF There is no alarm.
ON or blinking There is a fault alarm.
ACT Green ON The board is functional.
OFF The board is loading software or it is
abnormal.

10.5 LEDs on the DPUb Board
There are three LEDs on the DPUb board: RUN, ALM, and ACT.
Table 10-5 describes the LEDs on the DPUb board.
Table 10-5 LEDs on the DPUb board
LED Color Status Description
RUN Green ON for 1s and OFF for
1s
The board is functional.
ON for 0.125s and OFF
for 0.125s
The board is in loading state.
ON There is power supply, but the board
is faulty.
OFF There is no power supply, or the board
is faulty.
ALM Red OFF There is no alarm.
ON or blinking There is a fault alarm.
ACT Green ON The board is functional.
OFF The board is loading software or it is
abnormal.

BSC6900 GU
Site Maintenance Guide 10 LEDs on the Boards
Issue 07 (2013-06-28) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
270
10.6 LEDs on the DPUc Board
There are three LEDs on the DPUc board: RUN, ALM, and ACT.
Table 10-6 describes the LEDs on the DPUc board.
Table 10-6 LEDs on the DPUc board
LED Color Status Description
RUN Green ON for 1s and OFF for
1s
The board is functional.
ON for 0.125s and OFF
for 0.125s
The board is in loading state.
ON There is power supply, but the
board is faulty.
OFF There is no power supply, or the
board is faulty.
ALM Red OFF There is no alarm.
ON or blinking There is a fault alarm.
ACT Green ON The board is functional.
OFF The board is loading software or
it is abnormal.

10.7 LEDs on the DPUd Board
There are three LEDs on the DPUd board: RUN, ALM, and ACT.
Table 10-7 describes the LEDs on the DPUd board.
Table 10-7 LEDs on the DPUd board
LED Color Status Description
RUN Green ON for 1s and OFF
for 1s
The board is functional.
ON for 0.125s and
OFF for 0.125s
The board is in loading state.
ON There is power supply, but the
board is faulty.
OFF There is no power supply, or the
board is faulty.
BSC6900 GU
Site Maintenance Guide 10 LEDs on the Boards
Issue 07 (2013-06-28) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
271
LED Color Status Description
ALM Red OFF There is no alarm.
ON or blinking There is a fault alarm.
ACT Green ON The board is functional.
OFF The board is loading software or it
is abnormal.

10.8 LEDs on the DPUe Board
There are three LEDs on the DPUe board: RUN, ALM, and ACT.
Table 10-8 describes the LEDs on the DPUe board.
Table 10-8 LEDs on the DPUe board
LED Color Status Description
RUN Green ON for 1s and OFF for
1s
The board is functional.
ON for 0.125s and OFF
for 0.125s
The board is in loading state.
ON There is power supply, but the board
is faulty.
OFF There is no power supply, or the board
is faulty.
ALM Red OFF There is no alarm.
ON or blinking There is a fault alarm.
ACT Green ON The board is functional.
OFF The board is loading software or it is
abnormal.

10.9 LEDs on the EIUa Board
There are three LEDs on the EIUa board: RUN, ALM, and ACT.
Table 10-9 describes the LEDs on the EIUa board.
BSC6900 GU
Site Maintenance Guide 10 LEDs on the Boards
Issue 07 (2013-06-28) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
272
Table 10-9 LEDs on the EIUa board
LED Color Status Description
RUN Green ON for 1s and OFF for
1s
The board is functional.
ON for 0.125s and OFF
for 0.125s
The board is in loading state.
ON There is power supply, but the board
is faulty.
OFF There is no power supply, or the board
is faulty.
ALM Red OFF There is no alarm.
ON or blinking There is a fault alarm.
ACT Green ON The board is in active mode.
OFF The board is in standby mode.

10.10 LEDs on the FG2a Board
Among all the LEDs on the FG2a board, RUN, ALM, and ACT indicate the status of the FG2a
board, and other LEDs indicate the status of Ethernet ports. There are two LEDs at each Ethernet
port: LINK and ACT.
Table 10-10 describes the LEDs on the FG2a board.
Table 10-10 LEDs on the FG2a board
LED Color Status Description
RUN Green ON for 1s and OFF for 1s The board is functional.
ON for 0.125s and OFF for
0.125s
The board is in loading
state.
ON There is power supply, but
the board is faulty.
OFF There is no power supply,
or the board is faulty.
ALM Red OFF There is no alarm.
ON or blinking There is a fault alarm.
ACT Green ON The board is in active
mode.
OFF The board is in standby
mode.
BSC6900 GU
Site Maintenance Guide 10 LEDs on the Boards
Issue 07 (2013-06-28) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
273
LED Color Status Description
LINK (at the
Ethernet port)
Green ON The link is well connected.
OFF The link is disconnected.
ACT (at the
Ethernet port)
Green OFF There is no data
transmission over the
Ethernet port.
Blinking There is data transmission
over the Ethernet port.

10.11 LEDs on the FG2c Board
Among all the LEDs on the FG2c board, RUN, ALM, and ACT indicate the status of the FG2c
board, and other LEDs indicate the status of Ethernet ports. There are two LEDs at each Ethernet
port: LINK and ACT.
Table 10-11 describes the LEDs on the FG2c board.
Table 10-11 LEDs on the FG2c board
LED Color Status Description
RUN Green ON for 1s and OFF for 1s The board is functional.
ON for 0.125s and OFF for
0.125s
The board is in loading
state.
ON There is power supply, but
the board is faulty.
OFF There is no power supply,
or the board is faulty.
ALM Red OFF There is no alarm.
ON or blinking There is a fault alarm.
ACT Green ON The board is in active
mode.
OFF The board is in standby
mode.
LINK (at the
Ethernet port)
Green ON The link is well connected.
OFF The link is disconnected.
ACT (at the
Ethernet port)
Orange OFF There is no data
transmission over the
Ethernet port.
BSC6900 GU
Site Maintenance Guide 10 LEDs on the Boards
Issue 07 (2013-06-28) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
274
LED Color Status Description
Blinking There is data transmission
over the Ethernet port.

10.12 LEDs on the FG2d Board
Among all the LEDs on the FG2d board, RUN, ALM, and ACT indicate the status of the FG2d
board, and other LEDs indicate the status of Ethernet ports. There are two LEDs at each Ethernet
port: LINK and ACT.
Table 10-12 describes the LEDs on the FG2d board.
Table 10-12 LEDs on the FG2d board
LED Color Status Description
RUN Green ON for 1s and OFF for 1s The board is functional.
ON for 0.125s and OFF for
0.125s
The board is in loading
state.
ON There is power supply, but
the board is faulty.
OFF There is no power supply,
or the board is faulty.
ALM Red OFF There is no alarm.
ON or blinking There is a fault alarm.
ACT Green ON The board is in active
mode.
OFF The board is in standby
mode.
LINK (at the
Ethernet port)
Green ON The link is well connected.
OFF The link is disconnected.
ACT (at the
Ethernet port)
Orange OFF There is no data
transmission over the
Ethernet port.
Blinking There is data transmission
over the Ethernet port.

10.13 LEDs on the GCUa/GCGa Board
There are three LEDs on the panel of the GCUa/GCGa board: RUN, ALM, and ACT.
BSC6900 GU
Site Maintenance Guide 10 LEDs on the Boards
Issue 07 (2013-06-28) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
275
Table 10-13 describes the LEDs on the GCUa/GCGa board.
Table 10-13 LEDs on the GCUa/GCGa board
LED Color Status Description
RUN Green ON for 1s and OFF for
1s
The board is functional.
ON for 0.125s and OFF
for 0.125s
The board is in loading state.
ON There is power supply, but the
board is faulty.
OFF There is no power supply, or the
board is faulty.
ALM Red OFF There is no alarm.
ON or blinking There is a fault alarm.
ACT Green ON The board is in active mode.
OFF The board is in standby mode.

10.14 LEDs on the GOUa Board
There are three LEDs on the GOUa board: RUN, ALM, and ACT.
Table 10-14 describes the LEDs on the GOUa board.
Table 10-14 LEDs on the GOUa board
LED Color Status Description
RUN Green ON for 1s and OFF for 1s The board is functional.
ON for 0.125s and OFF for
0.125s
The board is in loading
state.
ON There is power supply, but
the board is faulty.
OFF There is no power supply,
or the board is faulty.
ALM Red OFF There is no alarm.
ON or blinking There is a fault alarm.
ACT Green ON The board is in active
mode.
BSC6900 GU
Site Maintenance Guide 10 LEDs on the Boards
Issue 07 (2013-06-28) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
276
LED Color Status Description
OFF The board is in standby
mode.

10.15 LEDs on the GOUc Board
There are five types of LEDs on the GOUc board: RUN, ALM, ACT, LINK (optical port LED),
and ACT (optical port LED).
Table 10-15 describes the LEDs on the GOUc board.
Table 10-15 LEDs on the GOUc board
LED Color Status Description
RUN Green ON for 1s and OFF for 1s The board is functional.
ON for 0.125s and OFF for
0.125s
The board is in loading
state.
ON There is power supply, but
the board is faulty.
OFF There is no power supply,
or the board is faulty.
ALM Red OFF There is no alarm.
ON or blinking There is a fault alarm.
ACT Green ON The board is in active
mode.
OFF The board is in standby
mode.
LINK (optical
port LED)
Green ON The link is well connected.
OFF The link is disconnected.
ACT (optical
port LED)
Green OFF There is no data
transmission over the
Ethernet port.
Blinking There is data transmission
over the Ethernet port.

10.16 LEDs on the GOUd Board
There are five types of LEDs on the GOUd board: RUN, ALM, ACT, LINK (optical port LED),
and ACT (optical port LED).
BSC6900 GU
Site Maintenance Guide 10 LEDs on the Boards
Issue 07 (2013-06-28) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
277
Table 10-16 describes the LEDs on the GOUd board.
Table 10-16 LEDs on the GOUd board
LED Color Status Description
RUN Green ON for 1s and OFF for 1s The board is functional.
ON for 0.125s and OFF for
0.125s
The board is in loading
state.
ON There is power supply, but
the board is faulty.
OFF There is no power supply,
or the board is faulty.
ALM Red OFF There is no alarm.
ON or blinking There is a fault alarm.
ACT Green ON The board is in active
mode.
OFF The board is in standby
mode.
LINK (optical
port LED)
Green ON The link is well connected.
OFF The link is disconnected.
ACT (optical
port LED)
Green OFF There is no data
transmission over the
Ethernet port.
Blinking There is data transmission
over the Ethernet port.

10.17 LEDs on the MDMC Board
There are two LEDs on the MDMC board: RUN and ALM.
Table 10-17 describes the LEDs on the MDMC board.
Table 10-17 LEDs on the MDMC board
LED Color Status Description
RUN Green ON for 1s and OFF for
1s
The MDMC board is functional and
communicates with the SCUa/SCUb
board properly.
ON for 0.25s and OFF
for 0.25s
The MDMC board is not working or it
does not communicate with the SCUa/
SCUb board properly.
BSC6900 GU
Site Maintenance Guide 10 LEDs on the Boards
Issue 07 (2013-06-28) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
278
LED Color Status Description
OFF The power supply to the MDMC board
is abnormal or the power distribution
box does not work properly.
ALM Red OFF There is no alarm.
ON The power distribution box is faulty.
During the self-check of the MDMC
board, however, the ALM LED is also
ON. This indicates that the ALM LED
is functional.

10.18 LEDs on the NIUa Board
There are three LEDs on the NIUa board: RUN, ALM, and ACT.
Table 10-18 describes the LEDs on the NIUa board.
Table 10-18 LEDs on the NIUa board
LED Color Status Description
RUN Green ON for 1s and OFF for
1s
The board is functional.
ON for 0.125s and OFF
for 0.125s
The board is in loading state.
ON There is power supply, but the board
is faulty.
OFF There is no power supply, or the board
is faulty.
ALM Red OFF There is no alarm.
ON or blinking There is a fault alarm.
ACT Green ON The board is in active mode.
OFF The board is in standby mode, or the
board is disconnected.

10.19 LEDs on the OIUa Board
There are four LEDs on the OIUa board: RUN, ALM, ACT, and LOS.
Table 10-19 describes the LEDs on the OIUa board.
BSC6900 GU
Site Maintenance Guide 10 LEDs on the Boards
Issue 07 (2013-06-28) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
279
Table 10-19 LEDs on the OIUa board
LED Color Status Description
RUN Green ON for 1s and OFF for 1s The board is functional.
ON for 0.125s and OFF for
0.125s
The board is in loading state.
ON There is power supply, but the
board is faulty.
OFF There is no power supply, or the
board is faulty.
ALM Red OFF There is no alarm.
ON or blinking There is a fault alarm.
ACT Green ON The board is in active mode.
OFF The board is in standby mode.
LOS Green ON The STM-1 port does not receive
signals properly.
OFF The STM-1 port receives signals
properly.

10.20 LEDs on the OMUa/OMUb Board
There are five types of LEDs on the OMUa/OMUb board: RUN, ALM, ACT, OFFLINE, and
HD.
Table 10-20 describes the LEDs on the OMUa/OMUb board.
Table 10-20 LEDs on the OMUa/OMUb board
LED Color Status Description
RUN Green ON for 1s and OFF for 1s The board is functional.
ON for 0.125s and OFF
for 0.125s
The board is being started.
ON There is power supply, but the board
is faulty.
OFF There is no power supply, or the
board is faulty.
ALM Red OFF There is no alarm.
ON or blinking There is a fault alarm.
ACT Green ON The board is in active mode.
BSC6900 GU
Site Maintenance Guide 10 LEDs on the Boards
Issue 07 (2013-06-28) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
280
LED Color Status Description
OFF The board is in standby mode, or the
board is disconnected.
OFFLINE Blue ON The board can be removed.
OFF The board cannot be removed.
ON for 0.125s and OFF
for 0.125s
The board is being switched over to
the other working mode.
HD Green OFF There is no read or write operation
on the hard disk.
Blinking The hard disk is being read or
written to.

10.21 LEDs on the PAMU Board
There are two LEDs on the PAMU board: RUN and ALM.
Table 10-21 describes the LEDs on the PAMU board.
Table 10-21 LEDs on the PAMU board
LED Color Status Description
RUN Green ON for 1s and OFF for
1s
The PAMU board is functional and
communicates with the SCUa/SCUb
board properly.
ON for 0.25s and OFF
for 0.25s
The PAMU board is faulty or it does not
communicate with the SCUa/SCUb
board properly.
OFF The power supply to the PAMU board
is abnormal or the power distribution
box does not work properly.
ALM Red OFF There is no alarm.
ON The power distribution box is faulty.
During the self-check of the PAMU
board, however, the ALM LED is also
ON. This indicates that the ALM LED
is functional.

10.22 LEDs on the PEUa Board
There are three LEDs on the PEUa board: RUN, ALM, and ACT.
BSC6900 GU
Site Maintenance Guide 10 LEDs on the Boards
Issue 07 (2013-06-28) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
281
Table 10-22 describes the LEDs on the PEUa board.
Table 10-22 LEDs on the PEUa board
LED Color Status Description
RUN Green ON for 1s and OFF for 1s The board is functional.
ON for 0.125s and OFF for
0.125s
The board is in loading
state.
ON There is power supply, but
the board is faulty.
OFF There is no power supply,
or the board is faulty.
ALM Red OFF There is no alarm.
ON or blinking There is a fault alarm.
ACT Green ON The board is in active
mode.
OFF The board is in standby
mode.

10.23 LEDs on the POUa Board
There are three LEDs on the POUa board: RUN, ALM, and ACT.
Table 10-23 describes the LEDs on the POUa board.
Table 10-23 LEDs on the POUa board
LED Color Status Description
RUN Green ON for 1s and OFF for 1s The board is functional.
ON for 0.125s and OFF for
0.125s
The board is in loading
state.
ON There is power supply, but
the board is faulty.
OFF There is no power supply,
or the board is faulty.
ALM Red OFF There is no alarm.
ON or blinking There is a fault alarm.
ACT Green ON The board is in active
mode.
BSC6900 GU
Site Maintenance Guide 10 LEDs on the Boards
Issue 07 (2013-06-28) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
282
LED Color Status Description
OFF The board is in standby
mode.

10.24 LEDs on the POUc Board
There are four types of LEDs on the POUc board: RUN, ALM, ACT, and LOS.
Table 10-24 describes the LEDs on the POUc board.
Table 10-24 LEDs on the POUc board
LED Color Status Description
RUN Green ON for 1s and OFF for 1s The board is functional.
ON for 0.125s and OFF for
0.125s
The board is in loading state.
ON There is power supply, but the board
is faulty.
OFF There is no power supply, or the
board is faulty.
ALM Red OFF There is no alarm.
ON or blinking There is a fault alarm.
ACT Green ON The board is in active mode.
OFF The board is in standby mode.
LOS Green ON The STM-1 port does not receive
signals properly.
OFF The STM-1 port receives signals
properly.

10.25 LEDs on the SAUa Board
There are five types of LEDs on the SAUa board: RUN, ALM, ACT, HD, and OFFLINE.
Table 10-25 describes the LEDs on the SAUa board.
Table 10-25 LEDs on the SAUa board
LED Color Status Description
RUN Green ON for 1s and OFF for 1s The board is functional.
BSC6900 GU
Site Maintenance Guide 10 LEDs on the Boards
Issue 07 (2013-06-28) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
283
LED Color Status Description
ON for 0.125s and OFF
for 0.125s
The board is being started.
ON There is power supply, but the board
is faulty.
OFF There is no power supply, or the
board is faulty.
ALM Red OFF There is no alarm.
ON or blinking There is an alarm.
ACT Green ON The board is in active mode.
OFF The board is disconnected.
OFFLINE Blue ON The board can be removed.
OFF The board cannot be removed.
ON for 0.125s and OFF
for 0.125s
The board is being switched over to
the other working mode.
HD Green OFF No data on the hard disk is being
read or written.
Blinking Data on the hard disk is being read
or written.

10.26 LEDs on the SAUc Board
There are five types of LEDs on the SAUc board: RUN, ALM, ACT, HDD, and OFL.
Table 10-26 describes the LEDs on the SAUc board.
Table 10-26 LEDs on the SAUc board
LED Color Status Description
RUN Green ON for 1s and OFF for 1s The board is functional.
ON for 0.125s and OFF
for 0.125s
The board is being started.
ON There is power supply, but the board
is faulty.
OFF There is no power supply, or the
board is faulty.
ALM Red OFF There is no alarm.
BSC6900 GU
Site Maintenance Guide 10 LEDs on the Boards
Issue 07 (2013-06-28) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
284
LED Color Status Description
ON or blinking There is an alarm.
ACT Green ON The board is in active mode.
OFF The board is disconnected.
OFL Blue ON The board can be removed.
OFF The board cannot be removed.
ON for 0.125s and OFF
for 0.125s
The board is being switched over to
the other working mode.
HDD Green OFF No data on the hard disk is being
read or written.
Blinking Data on the hard disk is being read
or written.

10.27 LEDs on the SCUa Board
Among all the LEDs on the SCUa board, RUN, ALM, and ACT indicate the status of the SCUa
board, and other LEDs indicate the status of Ethernet ports. There are two LEDs at each Ethernet
port: LINK and ACT.
Table 10-27 describes the LEDs on the SCUa board.
Table 10-27 LEDs on the SCUa board
LED Color Status Description
RUN Green ON for 1s and OFF for 1s The board is functional.
ON for 0.125s and OFF for
0.125s
The board is in loading
state.
ON There is power supply, but
the board is faulty.
OFF There is no power supply,
or the board is faulty.
ALM Red OFF There is no alarm.
ON or blinking There is a fault alarm.
ACT Green ON The board is in active
mode.
OFF The board is in standby
mode.
BSC6900 GU
Site Maintenance Guide 10 LEDs on the Boards
Issue 07 (2013-06-28) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
285
LED Color Status Description
LINK (at the
Ethernet port)
Green ON The link is well connected.
OFF The link is disconnected.
ACT (at the
Ethernet port)
Green OFF There is no data
transmission over the
Ethernet port.
Blinking There is data transmission
over the Ethernet port.

10.28 LEDs on the SCUb Board
Among all the LEDs on the SCUb board, RUN, ALM, and ACT indicate the status of the SCUb
board, LINK and ACT indicate the status of each 10M/100M/1000M Ethernet port, and 10G
LINK indicates the status of each 10G Ethernet port.
Table 10-28 describes the LEDs on the SCUb board.
Table 10-28 LEDs on the SCUb board
LED Color Status Description
RUN Green ON for 1s and OFF for 1s The board is functional.
ON for 0.125s and OFF for
0.125s
The board is in loading
state.
ON There is power supply, but
the board is faulty.
OFF There is no power supply,
or the board is faulty.
ALM Red OFF There is no alarm.
ON or blinking There is a fault alarm.
ACT Green ON The board is in active
mode.
OFF The board is in standby
mode.
LINK (at the
Ethernet port)
Green ON The link is well connected.
OFF The link is disconnected.
ACT (at the
Ethernet port)
Green OFF There is no data
transmission over the
Ethernet port.
BSC6900 GU
Site Maintenance Guide 10 LEDs on the Boards
Issue 07 (2013-06-28) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
286
LED Color Status Description
Blinking There is data transmission
over the Ethernet port.
10G LINK Green ON The link is well connected.
OFF The link is disconnected.

10.29 LEDs on the SPUa Board
Among all the LEDs on the SPUa board, RUN, ALM, and ACT indicate the status of the SPUb
board, and other LEDs indicate the status of Ethernet ports. There are two LEDs at each Ethernet
port: LINK and ACT.
Table 10-29 describes the LEDs on the SPUa board.
Table 10-29 LEDs on the SPUa board
LED Color Status Description
RUN Green ON for 1s and OFF for 1s The board is functional.
ON for 0.125s and OFF
for 0.125s
The board is in loading state.
ON There is power supply, but the board
is faulty.
OFF There is no power supply, or the
board is faulty.
ALM Red OFF There is no alarm.
ON or blinking There is a fault alarm.
ACT Green ON The board is in active mode.
OFF The board is in standby mode.
LINK (at the
Ethernet port)
Green ON The link is well connected.
OFF The link is disconnected.
ACT (at the
Ethernet port)
Green OFF There is no data transmission over
the Ethernet port.
Blinking There is data transmission over the
Ethernet port.

BSC6900 GU
Site Maintenance Guide 10 LEDs on the Boards
Issue 07 (2013-06-28) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
287
10.30 LEDs on the SPUb Board
Among all the LEDs on the SPUb board, RUN, ALM, and ACT indicate the status of the SPUb
board, and other LEDs indicate the status of Ethernet ports. There are two LEDs at each Ethernet
port: LINK and ACT.
Table 10-30 describes the LEDs on the SPUb board.
Table 10-30 LEDs on the SPUb board
LED Color Status Description
RUN Green ON for 1s and OFF for 1s The board is functional.
ON for 0.125s and OFF
for 0.125s
The board is in loading state.
ON There is power supply, but the board
is faulty.
OFF There is no power supply, or the
board is faulty.
ALM Red OFF There is no alarm.
ON or blinking There is a fault alarm.
ACT Green ON The board is in active mode.
OFF The board is in standby mode.
LINK (at the
Ethernet port)
Green ON The link is well connected.
OFF The link is disconnected.
ACT (at the
Ethernet port)
Orange OFF There is no data transmission over
the Ethernet port.
Blinking There is data transmission over the
Ethernet port.

10.31 LEDs on the TNUa Board
There are three LEDs on the TNUa board: RUN, ALM, and ACT.
Table 10-31 describes the LEDs on the TNUa board.
Table 10-31 LEDs on the TNUa board
LED Color Status Description
RUN Green ON for 1s and OFF for 1s The board is functional.
BSC6900 GU
Site Maintenance Guide 10 LEDs on the Boards
Issue 07 (2013-06-28) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
288
LED Color Status Description
ON for 0.125s and OFF
for 0.125s
The board is in loading
state.
ON There is power supply,
but the board is faulty.
OFF There is no power
supply, or the board is
faulty.
ALM Red OFF There is no alarm.
ON or blinking There is a fault alarm.
ACT Green ON The board is in active
mode.
OFF The board is in standby
mode.

10.32 LEDs on the UOIa Board
There are three LEDs on the UOIa board: RUN, ALM, and ACT.
Table 10-32 describes the LEDs on the UOIa board.
Table 10-32 LEDs on the UOIa board
LED Color Status Description
RUN Green ON for 1s and OFF for 1s The board is functional.
ON for 0.125s and OFF for
0.125s
The board is in loading
state.
ON There is power supply, but
the board is faulty.
OFF There is no power supply,
or the board is faulty.
ALM Red OFF There is no alarm.
ON or blinking There is a fault alarm.
ACT Green ON The board is in active
mode.
OFF The board is in standby
mode.

BSC6900 GU
Site Maintenance Guide 10 LEDs on the Boards
Issue 07 (2013-06-28) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
289
10.33 LEDs on the UOIc Board
There are four types of LEDs on the UOIc board: RUN, ALM, ACT, and LOS.
Table 10-33 describes the LEDs on the UOIc board.
Table 10-33 LEDs on the UOIc board
LED Colo
r
Status Description
RUN Gree
n
ON for 1s and OFF for 1s The board is functional.
ON for 0.125s and OFF for
0.125s
The board is in loading state.
ON There is power supply, but the board
is faulty.
OFF There is no power supply, or the board
is faulty.
ALM Red OFF There is no alarm.
ON or blinking There is a fault alarm.
ACT Gree
n
ON The board is in active mode.
OFF The board is in standby mode.
LOS Gree
n
ON The STM-1 port does not receive
signals properly.
OFF The STM-1 port receives signals
properly.
BSC6900 GU
Site Maintenance Guide 10 LEDs on the Boards
Issue 07 (2013-06-28) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
290
11 DIP Switches on Components
About This Chapter
This chapter describes the DIP switches on the boards and subracks of the BSC6900.
11.1 DIP Switch on the Subrack
The DIP switch on a subrack is used to set the number of the subrack.
11.2 DIP Switches on the AEUa Board
The AEUa board provides five DIP switches, namely, S2, S4, S6, S8, and S10.
11.3 DIP Switches on the AOUa Board
The AOUa board provides two DIP switches, both of which are labeled S1. The two DIP switches
are used to set the mode of the two STM-1/OC-3 optical ports.
11.4 DIP Switches on the EIUa Board
The EIUa board provides five DIP switches, namely, S1, S3, S4, S5, and S6.
11.5 DIP Switch on the MDMC Board
The MDMC board provides an S2 DIP switch.
11.6 DIP Switch on the PAMU Board
The PAMU provides an SW1 DIP switch.
11.7 DIP Switches on the PEUa Board
The PEUa board provides five DIP switches, namely, S2, S4, S6, S8, and S10.
11.8 DIP Switch on the PFCU Board
The PFCU board has one DIP switch, which is named SW1 and consists of four bits. The DIP
switch is used to set the address of the PFCU board. When the PFCU board is configured in a
fan box of the service subrack, the address of the PFCU board is set to 1. When the PFCU board
is configured in the independent fan subrack, the address of the PFCU board is set to 4.
11.9 DIP Switches on the POUa Board
The POUa board provides two DIP switches, both of which are labeled S1. The two DIP switches
are used to set the mode of the two STM-1/OC-3 optical ports.
BSC6900 GU
Site Maintenance Guide 11 DIP Switches on Components
Issue 07 (2013-06-28) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
291
11.1 DIP Switch on the Subrack
The DIP switch on a subrack is used to set the number of the subrack.
Location of the DIP Switch
The DIP switch is located on the lower back of the subrack. For details on the location of the
DIP switch, see Components of the Subrack.
Appearance
Figure 11-1 shows the cover plate for the DIP switch on the subrack.
Figure 11-1 Cover plate for the DIP switch on the subrack

Description about the DIP Switch
The DIP switch on the subrack has eight bits numbered in ascending order from 1 to 8. Table
11-1 describes the bits.
BSC6900 GU
Site Maintenance Guide 11 DIP Switches on Components
Issue 07 (2013-06-28) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
292
Table 11-1 Description about the bits
Bit Description
1-5 Bits 1 to 5 are used for setting the subrack number. Bit 1 is the
least significant bit. If the bit is set to ON, it indicates 0. If the bit
is set to OFF, it indicates 1.
6 Odd parity check bit
7 Reserved, undefined, generally set to ON
8 (the most significant
bit)
Startup type of the subrack, generally set to OFF
NOTE
l For the inventory sites upgrading from BSC6000, BSC6810 to
BSC6900, keep the former settings.
l For the new sites in BSC6900, the bit is conservative and is fixed to
OFF.

CAUTION
l You must set the DIP switch before powering on the subrack. The setting after the power-
on is invalid.
Principle of the DIP Switch Setting
As the DIP switch uses odd parity check, the number of 1s in the eight bits must be an odd
number. The method for setting the bits is as follows:
1. Set bit 1 to bit 5 as required.
2. Set bit 7 to ON.
3. Set bit 8 to OFF.
4. Check the number of 1s in the seven bits of the DIP switch.
l If the number of 1s is even, set bit 6 to OFF.
l If the number of 1s is odd, set bit 6 to ON.
Table 11-2 describes the setting of the DIP switch in the case.
Table 11-2 Setting of the DIP switch
Subr
ack
No.
Bit Setting of the
DIP Switch
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1
ON ON ON ON ON ON ON OFF
BSC6900 GU
Site Maintenance Guide 11 DIP Switches on Components
Issue 07 (2013-06-28) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
293
Subr
ack
No.
Bit Setting of the
DIP Switch
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 1 0 0 0 0 1 0 1
OFF ON ON ON ON OFF ON OFF
2 0 1 0 0 0 1 0 1
ON OFF ON ON ON OFF ON OFF
3 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 1
OFF OFF ON ON ON ON ON OFF
4 0 0 1 0 0 1 0 1
ON ON OF
F
ON ON OFF ON OFF
5 1 0 1 0 0 0 0 1
OFF ON OF
F
ON ON ON ON OFF

11.2 DIP Switches on the AEUa Board
The AEUa board provides five DIP switches, namely, S2, S4, S6, S8, and S10.
Layout of the DIP Switches
Figure 11-2 shows the layout of the DIP switches on the AEUa board.
BSC6900 GU
Site Maintenance Guide 11 DIP Switches on Components
Issue 07 (2013-06-28) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
294
Figure 11-2 Layout of the DIP switches on the AEUa board
(1) Sub-board (2) Bottom plate

BSC6900 GU
Site Maintenance Guide 11 DIP Switches on Components
Issue 07 (2013-06-28) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
295
NOTE
l All DIP switches are on the front panel of the sub-board. The front panel is combined with the bottom
plate, so the DIP switches are not exposed.
l DIP switches S2, S4, S6, S8, and S10 are set from the side. As shown in Figure 11-2, there are two
square holes between DIP switches, one between S2 and S4, and the other between S8 and S6. Through
the two holes, you can set S2, S4, S8, and S6. DIP switch S10 is located in the right corner of the sub-
board, and therefore you can set S10 along the side. The direction of the arrow in Figure 11-2 is to
turn inwards. To set the bits of S2, S4, S6, or S8 to ON, turn them inwards. To set the bits of S2, S4,
S6, or S8 to OFF, turn them outwards. To set the bits of S10 to ON, turn them outwards. To set the bits
of S10 to OFF, turn them inwards.
l You can also run the SET E1T1 command on the LMT to set S10. If there is any inconsistency between
the physical setting of S10 on the AEUa board and the setting of S10 by command, take the setting by
command as the criterion. By default, the working mode of S10 is set to E1. You can also run the SET
E1T1 command on the LMT to change the working mode of S10 from E1 mode to E1 balanced mode,
E1 unbalanced mode, or T1 mode. When you run the SET E1T1 command to set the support for
balanced and unbalanced modes parameter to No and set the working mode of S10 to E1, you must
also manually set the bits of S10 to set the working mode of S10 to E1 balanced mode or E1 unbalanced
mode.
l If signals are transmitted in E1 unbalanced mode, the signals are transmitted through the 75-ohm coaxial
cable and the TX end of the cable is grounded, that is, the corresponding DIP bit is set to ON. If signals
are transmitted in E1(T1) balanced mode, the signals are transmitted through the 120-ohm twisted pair
cable and the TX end of the cable is not grounded, that is, the corresponding DIP bit is set to OFF.
Description of the DIP Switches
DIP switches S2, S4, S6, and S8 on the AEUa board are used to enable or disable the grounding
of 0 to 31 E1s/T1/J1s at the TX end. DIP switch S10 is used to set the working mode to E1
balanced mode, E1 unbalanced mode, T1 mode, or J1 mode. Table 11-3 describes S2, S4, S6,
S8, and S10.
Table 11-3 Description of the DIP switches on the AEUa board
DIP Switch Bit Description Setting of
DIP Bit
Meaning
S2 1-8 TX ground switch
of E1s/T1s/J1s 24
to 31
ON Set the working mode
to E1 unbalanced mode
OFF Set the working mode
to other modes
S4 1-8 TX ground switch
of E1s/T1s/J1s 16
to 23
ON Set the working mode
to E1 unbalanced mode
OFF Set the working mode
to other modes
S6 1-8 TX ground switch
of E1s/T1s/J1s 0
to 7
ON Set the working mode
to E1 unbalanced mode
OFF Set the working mode
to other modes
S8 1-8 TX ground switch
of E1s/T1s/J1s 8
to 15
ON Set the working mode
to E1 unbalanced mode
BSC6900 GU
Site Maintenance Guide 11 DIP Switches on Components
Issue 07 (2013-06-28) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
296
DIP Switch Bit Description Setting of
DIP Bit
Meaning
OFF Set the working mode
to other modes
S10 1-2 DIP switch for
setting the
working mode,
consisting of two
bits
(ON, ON) Set the working mode
to E1 unbalanced mode
(OFF, ON) Set the working mode
to E1 balanced mode
(ON, OFF) Set the working mode
to T1 mode
(OFF, OFF) Set the working mode
to J1 mode

11.3 DIP Switches on the AOUa Board
The AOUa board provides two DIP switches, both of which are labeled S1. The two DIP switches
are used to set the mode of the two STM-1/OC-3 optical ports.
Layout of the DIP Switches
Figure 11-3 shows the layout of the DIP switches on the AOUa board.
BSC6900 GU
Site Maintenance Guide 11 DIP Switches on Components
Issue 07 (2013-06-28) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
297
Figure 11-3 Layout of the DIP switches on the AOUa board
(1) Sub-board (2) Bottom plate

CAUTION
All DIP switches of the AOUa board are on the front panel of the sub-board. The front panel is
faced to and combined with the bottom plate, and so the DIP switches are hidden in between.
Description of the DIP Switches
Table 11-4 describes the DIP switches on the AOUa board.
Table 11-4 Description of the DIP switches on the AOUa board
DIP Switch Bit Setting of
DIP Bit
Meaning
S1 1-2 (ON, ON) Set loading mode to JTAG configuration
(OFF, OFF) Set loading mode to CPU slave parallel
configuration
BSC6900 GU
Site Maintenance Guide 11 DIP Switches on Components
Issue 07 (2013-06-28) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
298
DIP Switch Bit Setting of
DIP Bit
Meaning
3 ON Set working mode to T1 mode
OFF Set working mode to E1 mode
4 ON Set the mapped path to AU3
OFF Set the mapped path to AU4
5 ON Set the information structure to TU11
OFF Set the information structure to TU12
6 ON SONET
OFF SDH
7 - Reserved
8 - Reserved

11.4 DIP Switches on the EIUa Board
The EIUa board provides five DIP switches, namely, S1, S3, S4, S5, and S6.
Figure 11-4 shows the layout of the DIP switches on the EIUa board.
BSC6900 GU
Site Maintenance Guide 11 DIP Switches on Components
Issue 07 (2013-06-28) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
299
Figure 11-4 Layout of the DIP switches on the EIUa board
(1) Sub-board (2) Bottom plate

NOTE
l When the 75-ohm coaxial cable is used, the signal transmission uses the E1 unbalanced mode. In this
case, the TX end is grounded, that is, the corresponding bit of the DIP switch is set to ON.
l When the 120-ohm twisted pair cable is used, the signal transmission uses the E1(T1) balanced mode.
In this case, the TX end is not grounded, that is, the corresponding bit of the DIP switch is set to OFF.
l All DIP switches of the EIUa board are on the front panel of the sub-board. The front panel is faced to
and combined with the bottom plate, and so the DIP switches are hidden in between.
Table 11-5 describes the DIP switches on the EIUa board.
Table 11-5 Description of the DIP switches on the EIUa board
DIP Switch Bit Description Setting for 75-
ohm Coaxial
Cable
Setting for
120-ohm
Twisted Pair
Cable
S1 8 Impedance
selection switch
of E1s/T1s 0-7
ON OFF
BSC6900 GU
Site Maintenance Guide 11 DIP Switches on Components
Issue 07 (2013-06-28) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
300
DIP Switch Bit Description Setting for 75-
ohm Coaxial
Cable
Setting for
120-ohm
Twisted Pair
Cable
7 Impedance
selection switch
of E1s/T1s 8-15
ON OFF
6 Impedance
selection switch
of E1s/T1s
16-23
ON OFF
5 Impedance
selection switch
of E1s/T1s
24-31
ON OFF
1-4 Reserved - -
S3 1-8 TX ground
switch of E1s/
T1s 0-7
ON OFF
S4 1-8 TX ground
switch of E1s/
T1s 8-15
ON OFF
S5 1-8 TX ground
switch of E1s/
T1s 16-23
ON OFF
S6 1-8 TX ground
switch of E1s/
T1s 24-31
ON OFF

Table 11-6 describes the different DIP switches.
Table 11-6 Description of the different DIP switches
DIP Switch Description
E1/T1 impedance selection switch Used to select the logical transmission mode of the
board and to notify the software of the current
transmission mode
E1/T1 TX ground switch Used to control the grounding of the transmitting end
of the E1/T1 signals

BSC6900 GU
Site Maintenance Guide 11 DIP Switches on Components
Issue 07 (2013-06-28) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
301
NOTE
l The DIP switches are set for 75-ohm coaxial cables by default.
l The setting for the DIP switches on the active board must be the same as that for the DIP switches
on the standby board.
l The RX end is not grounded either in balanced or in unbalanced mode.
11.5 DIP Switch on the MDMC Board
The MDMC board provides an S2 DIP switch.
Figure 11-5 shows the layout of the DIP switch on the MDMC board.
Figure 11-5 DIP switch on the MDMC board

With four bits, the DIP switch S4 is used to set the address of the MDMC board.
To set the address, first remove the MDMC board and then set S2 as described in Table 11-7.
Table 11-7 DIP switch on the MDMC board
Address Bit Setting of DIP Bit Description
0 1 (the most significant
bit)
ON 0
2 ON 0
3 ON 0
4 (the least significant
bit)
ON 0

NOTE
In the BSC6900, the DIP switch on the MDMC board must be set as described in Table 11-7.
11.6 DIP Switch on the PAMU Board
The PAMU provides an SW1 DIP switch.
Figure 11-6 shows the layout of the DIP switch on the PAMU board.
BSC6900 GU
Site Maintenance Guide 11 DIP Switches on Components
Issue 07 (2013-06-28) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
302
Figure 11-6 Layout of the DIP switch on the PAMU board

With four bits, the DIP switch SW1 is used to set the address of the PAMU board.
To set the address, first remove the PAMU board and then set the SW1 as described in Table
11-8.
Table 11-8 DIP switch on the PAMU board
Address Bit Setting of DIP Bit Description
0 1 (the most significant
bit)
ON 0
2 ON 0
3 ON 0
4 (the least significant
bit)
ON 0

NOTE
In the BSC6900, the DIP switch on the PAMU board must be set as described in Table 11-8.
11.7 DIP Switches on the PEUa Board
The PEUa board provides five DIP switches, namely, S2, S4, S6, S8, and S10.
Figure 11-7 shows the layout of the DIP switches on the PEUa board.
BSC6900 GU
Site Maintenance Guide 11 DIP Switches on Components
Issue 07 (2013-06-28) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
303
Figure 11-7 Layout of the DIP switches on the PEUa board
(1) Sub-board (2) Bottom plate

BSC6900 GU
Site Maintenance Guide 11 DIP Switches on Components
Issue 07 (2013-06-28) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
304
NOTE
l All DIP switches are on the front panel of the sub-board. The front panel is combined with the bottom
plate, so the DIP switches are not exposed.
l DIP switches S2, S4, S6, S8, and S10 are set from the side. As shown in Figure 11-7, there are two
square holes between DIP switches, one between S2 and S4, and the other between S8 and S6. Through
the two holes, you can set S2, S4, S8, and S6. DIP switch S10 is located in the right corner of the sub-
board, and therefore you can set S10 along the side. The direction of the arrow in Figure 11-7 is to
turn inwards. To set the bits of S2, S4, S6, or S8 to ON, turn them inwards. To set the bits of S2, S4,
S6, or S8 to OFF, turn them outwards. To set the bits of S10 to ON, turn them outwards. To set the bits
of S10 to OFF, turn them inwards.
l You can also run the SET E1T1 command on the LMT to set S10. If there is any inconsistency between
the physical setting of S10 on the PEUa board and the setting of S10 by command, take the setting by
command as the criterion. By default, the working mode of S10 is set to E1. You can also run the SET
E1T1 command on the LMT to change the working mode of S10 from E1 mode to E1 balanced mode,
E1 unbalanced mode, or T1 mode. When you run the SET E1T1 command to set the support for
balanced and unbalanced modes parameter to No and set the working mode of S10 to E1, you must
also manually set the bits of S10 to set the working mode of S10 to E1 balanced mode or E1 unbalanced
mode.
l If signals are transmitted in E1 unbalanced mode, the signals are transmitted through the 75-ohm coaxial
cable and the TX end of the cable is grounded, that is, the corresponding DIP bit is set to ON. If signals
are transmitted in E1(T1) balanced mode, the signals are transmitted through the 120-ohm twisted pair
cable and the TX end of the cable is not grounded, that is, the corresponding DIP bit is set to OFF.
DIP switches S2, S4, S6, and S8 on the PEUa board are used to enable or disable the grounding
of 0 to 31 E1s/T1s/J1s at the TX end. DIP switch S10 is used to set the working mode to E1
balanced mode, E1 unbalanced mode, T1 mode, or J1 mode. Table 11-9 describes the DIP
switches on the PEUa board.
Table 11-9 Description about DIP switches on the PEUa board
DIP
Switc
h
Bit Description Setting of DIP
Switch
Meaning
S2 1-8 TX ground switch of
E1s/T1s/J1s 24 to 31
ON Setting the
working mode to
E1 unbalanced
mode
OFF Setting the
working mode to
other modes
S4 1-8 TX ground switch of
E1s/T1s/J1s 16 to 23
ON Setting the
working mode to
E1 unbalanced
mode
OFF Setting the
working mode to
other modes
S6 1-8 TX ground switch of
E1s/T1s/J1s 0 to 7
ON Setting the
working mode to
E1 unbalanced
mode
BSC6900 GU
Site Maintenance Guide 11 DIP Switches on Components
Issue 07 (2013-06-28) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
305
DIP
Switc
h
Bit Description Setting of DIP
Switch
Meaning
OFF Setting the
working mode to
other modes
S8 1-8 TX ground switch of
E1s/T1s/J1s 8 to 15
ON Setting the
working mode to
E1 unbalanced
mode
OFF Setting the
working mode to
other modes
S10 1-2 DIP switch for setting the
working mode,
consisting of two bits
(ON, ON) Setting the
working mode to
E1 unbalanced
mode
(OFF, ON) Setting the
working mode to
E1 balanced
mode
(ON, OFF) Setting the
working mode to
T1 mode
(OFF, OFF) Setting the
working mode to
J1 mode

11.8 DIP Switch on the PFCU Board
The PFCU board has one DIP switch, which is named SW1 and consists of four bits. The DIP
switch is used to set the address of the PFCU board. When the PFCU board is configured in a
fan box of the service subrack, the address of the PFCU board is set to 1. When the PFCU board
is configured in the independent fan subrack, the address of the PFCU board is set to 4.
DIP Switch on the PFCU Board (in a Fan Box of the service subrack)
Figure 11-8 shows the DIP switch on the PFCU board.
BSC6900 GU
Site Maintenance Guide 11 DIP Switches on Components
Issue 07 (2013-06-28) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
306
Figure 11-8 DIP switch on the PFCU board

To set the address of the PFCU board, remove the fan box, and then set SW1 as described in
Table 11-10. For how to remove the fan box, see 8.34 Replacing the Fan Box. After setting
the DIP switch, the address of the PFCU board is 1.
Table 11-10 DIP switch on the PFCU board (in a fan box of the service subrack)
DIP Switch Bit Setting of DIP
Switch
Description
SW1 1 (the least significant
bit)
OFF 1
2 ON 0
3 ON 0
4 (the most significant
bit)
ON 0

DIP Switch on the PFCU Board (in the Independent Fan Subrack)
Figure 11-9 shows the DIP switch on the PFCU board.
Figure 11-9 DIP switch on the PFCU board

To set the address of the PFCU board, remove the fan box, and then set SW1 as described in
Table 11-11. For how to remove the fan box, see 8.34 Replacing the Fan Box. After the setting,
the address of the PFCU board is 4.
BSC6900 GU
Site Maintenance Guide 11 DIP Switches on Components
Issue 07 (2013-06-28) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
307
Table 11-11 DIP switch on the PFCU board (in the independent fan subrack)
DIP Switch Bit Setting of DIP
Switch
Description
SW1 1 (the least significant
bit)
ON 0
2 ON 0
3 OFF 1
4 (the most significant
bit)
ON 0

NOTE
The DIP switch on the PFCU board of the BSC6900 must be set according to the preceding descriptions.
11.9 DIP Switches on the POUa Board
The POUa board provides two DIP switches, both of which are labeled S1. The two DIP switches
are used to set the mode of the two STM-1/OC-3 optical ports.
Layout of the DIP Switches
Figure 11-10 shows the layout of the DIP switches on the POUa board.
BSC6900 GU
Site Maintenance Guide 11 DIP Switches on Components
Issue 07 (2013-06-28) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
308
Figure 11-10 Layout of the DIP switches on the POUa board
(1) Sub-board (2) Bottom plate

CAUTION
All the DIP switches on the POUa board are on the front panel of the sub-board. The front panel
is faced to and combined with the bottom plate, and so the DIP switches are hidden in between.
Description of the DIP Switches
Table 11-12 describes the DIP switches on the POUa board.
Table 11-12 Description of the DIP switches on the POUa board
DIP Switch Bit Setting of DIP Bit Meaning
S1 1-2 (ON, ON) Setting loading mode
to JTAG configuration
(OFF, OFF) Setting loading mode
to CPU slave parallel
configuration
BSC6900 GU
Site Maintenance Guide 11 DIP Switches on Components
Issue 07 (2013-06-28) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
309
DIP Switch Bit Setting of DIP Bit Meaning
3 ON Setting working mode
to T1 mode
OFF Setting working mode
to E1 mode
4 ON Setting the mapped
path to AU3
OFF Setting the mapped
path to AU4
5 ON Setting the
information structure
to TU11
OFF Setting the
information structure
to TU12
6 ON SONET
OFF SDH
7 - Reserved
8 - Reserved
BSC6900 GU
Site Maintenance Guide 11 DIP Switches on Components
Issue 07 (2013-06-28) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
310
12 BSC6900 Site Maintenance Record
This chapter describes the BSC6900 site maintenance record.
Table 12-1 presents the BSC6900 site maintenance record.
Table 12-1 BSC6900 site maintenance record
Site name: Maintenance Date:
Time of fault
occurring:
Time of fault clearing:
Maintenance type Operator:
Maintenance type Replacing a board Replacing a cable Replacing the
subrack, fan box,
or power
distribution box
Routine cleaning Expanding the
subrack
Others
Maintenance
operations:

Commissioning
result:

BSC6900 GU
Site Maintenance Guide 12 BSC6900 Site Maintenance Record
Issue 07 (2013-06-28) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
311